Home

CubeSuite+ V2.00.00 Integrated Development Environment User`s

1. v Kind of project Application CA850 _ Project name Input the name of the project here Place C Documents and Settings xxxxxx My Documents v Make the project folder lt is shown absolute path of a project file to create C Pass the file composition of an existing project to the new project Project to be passed Input project file to be diverted Copy composition files in the diverted project folder to a new Remark When a subproject is created the title bar says Create Subproject The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 125 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE How to open 1 When creating a main project Click the Start button in the toolbar to open the Start panel and then click the GO button in the Create New Project area From the File menu select New gt gt Create New Project From the Project menu select Create New Project 2 When creating a subproject From the Project menu select Add gt gt Add New Subproject On the Project Tree panel select project or subproject and then select Add gt gt Add New Subproject from the context menu Description of each area 1 Microcontroller Select the microcontroller type to use in the project You can s
2. Opens the Create Project dialog box to add the created subproject to a project Add New Subproject The subproject cannot be added to another subproject Add File Opens Add Existing File dialog box to add the selected file to a project Add New File Opens the Add File dialog box to create a file with the selected file tyoe and add to a project The added file can be opened with the application corresponds to the file extension Adds a new Category node to the root of the File node This allows the category name to be changed Add New Category The default category name is New category The new category name can be changed to the same name as the existing Category node Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Sets the selected subproject to an active project Set Selected subproject Active Project Remove from Project Removes the selected subproject from the project The subproject file itself is not deleted from the file system with this operation When the selected subproject is the active project it cannot be removed from the project Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Paste This menu is always disabled Rename You can rename the selected subproject Displays the selected subproject s property in Property panel Property 3 When a Micr
3. Install location C Program Files Renesas Electronics CubeSuite After you select the install target and installation location click the Next button Caution You cannot change the install location on a host machine where CubeSuite have been installed If you wish to change the installation location uninstall CubeSuite then perform the installation Remark If you wish to specify the install target in detail click the Details button The Select Components win dow appears The Component Selection area shows the details of the install target you selected in the Development Tools Selection window After select the check boxes of the tools in the Component Selection area click the Next button Figure 2 7 Select Components Window Installer step 4 8 Select Components Component Selection Product Name Size CubeSuite Vx xx xx Must Install xxxKB R8C Compiler NC30 V x x Release xx xxx KB 78KO Compiler CA78K0 Vx xx xxx KB RL78 78K0R Compiler CA78KOR Vx xx xxx KB V V850 Compiler CA850 Vx xx xx KB Explanation Drive C Free space xxxKB Required space xxxKB Install location C Program Files Renesas Electronics D CubeSuite lt Back Next gt Cancel Caution The check boxes of products that must be installed cannot be cleared R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 15 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 CHAPT
4. 3 PFile name f 4 y Network iles of type Program files exe Function buttons The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open Inthe General Text Editor category of the Option dialog box click the Browse button in the External text edi tor area Description of each area 1 Look in area Select the location folder of the executable file for the external text editor to register from the drop down list 2 List of files area This area displays a list of files matching the conditions selected in Look in area and Files of type area 3 File name area Specify the name of the executable file for the external text editor R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 289 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 4 Files of type area Select the type of the executable file for the external text editor to register from the following drop down list Program files exe Executable format default All files All formats Function buttons Open Specifies the selected file in the Option dialog box Cancel Ignores the setting and closes this dialog box R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 290 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Python Console panel This panel is used to use IronPython to control CubeSuite a
5. Use this category to configure general settings relating to fonts and colors on each panel Figure A 50 Option Dialog Box General Font and Color Category E 1 General k 5 S Startup and Exit General Font and Color E Display G Extermal Text Editor Setting place G P Default A Use default color G External Tools Build Debug Waring 1 E Python Console Error 1 tay Tert Editor P Reserved word Use default background color Update Comment amp Others String literal E User Information Control code Highlight Changed value Edit value v Reset Selected Item Colors 2 P Display example l ABCD abcd 0123 3 P Font settings for text editor Font a h gt m Function buttons Initialize All Settings Cancel Apply Help The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open From the Tool menu select Options Description of each area 1 Color options area Use this area to configure the colors a Setting place area Select a location from the list for which the color will be specified The relationships between the list items and default color settings are as follows Example Description DefaultNote AaBbCc Font color Black The standard display color in all windows and panels Background color White Warning AaBbCc Font color Blue Warning messages ar
6. F 3 2 Add C source files and other files Add C source files to be used for creation of the download file to the debug dedicated project By adding the C source file to the project you can perform source level debugging step execution in source level units etc You can also add files other than C source files as necessary Caution To perform source level debugging a load module file with the symbol information must be added as a download file to debug see F 3 1 Add a download file When you add load module files to the Download file node of the project tree and download to the debug tool based on source file information obtained from the download file source files are automatically added to the project tree Cautions 1 When a load module file has been added in the Download File Settings tab on the Property panel of the debug tool source files are not added to the project tree 2 Whether or not to automatically add source files to the project tree is determined by a setting in the General Build Debug category in the Option dialog box When there are files which cannot be added by the above method use the following methods to add them Adding an existing file Creating and adding an empty file R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 311 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX F USING AN EXTERNAL BUILD TOOL 1 Adding an existing file a Add an individual files Drag a file s from Explorer or th
7. Pastes the contents of the clipboard Undoes the last action Redoes an undone action Be 2 S Ge cr Sc Opens the Find and Replace dialog box or the Trace Search dialog box if the Trace panel has focus or the Memory Search dialog box if the Memory panel has focus and perform the specified search Searches backward in the panel being searched using the specified parameters Searches forward in the panel being searched using the specified parameters Pressing the Enter key leads to the execution of a quick search for the specified word Note Zooms in and out on the display of the panel that currently has focus The zoom percentage 25 to 300 is specified by selecting it from the drop down list or directly entering the value into the text box It is also possible to zoom in and out on the display by moving the mouse wheel forward or backward while holding down the Ctrl key Note The find including Quick Find and replace conditions are individually set for the Output panel and Edi tor panel Accordingly for example when finding of a word with the Editor panel active proceeds after finding in the Output panel if the find and replace conditions in use are different the string found in the Output panel may not be found in the Editor panel b Build toolbar Build toolbar shows buttons used in build process Runs a build of the project A build of a subproject is also run when i
8. CubeSuite One Point Advice To use a wider screen Press the Automatically Hide button with the pin icon at the top of each panel When a panel is not used that panel automatically becomes atab 1 at the side of the window resulting in a wider usable screen area Displayed contents random om 704 3 Function buttons The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open From the Help menu select One Point Advice Automatically opens at CubeSuite startup when Do not show this dialog box at startup is unchecked Description of each area 1 Tips display Area Tips for using CubeSuite are randomly shown edit not allowed 2 Page feed area The current page number in this dialog box and the buttons for page feed are shown One previous page is shown The button is disabled when the first page is shown One next page is shown The button is disabled when the last page is shown R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 264 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 3 Do not show this dialog box at startup This configuration is saved as the one for the active user Does not open this dialog box automatically at startup Opens this dialog box automatically at startup when Main window appears default Remark This property can also be set from the Opti
9. Eri sub Subproject B a uPD70F3746 Microcontroller A Pin Configurator Design Tool eij Code Generator Design Tool A CA850 Build Tool S 850 Simulator Debug Tool D Program Analyzer Analyze Tool g File On the project tree project components are displayed as the nodes below in a tree view If you select each component node or file its detailed information properties is displayed in the Property panel and you can change its settings R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Feb 01 2013 ztENESAS Page 37 of 491 CubeSuite V2 00 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS You can also make project settings from the context menu for each component node or file Node Explanation Project name Project Hereafter referred to as Project node The project s name Microcontroller name Microcontroller Hereafter referred to as Microcontroller node The microcontroller used in the project Design Tool name Design Tool Hereafter referred to as Design Tool node The design tool pin configurator code generator etc used Note that Code Generator Design Tool node is not shown when the project type is a debug dedicated projectN Build tool name Build tool Hereafter referred to as Build Tool node The build tool compiler assembler etc used Note When the project type is a debug dedicated projec None is shown as build tool name Debug tool name Deb
10. Function buttons Button Function Initialize All Settings Restores all settings on this dialog box to their default values Note however that newly added items in the General External Tools category will not be removed OK Applies all setting and closes this dialog box Cancel Ignores the setting and closes this dialog box Apply Applies all setting does not close this dialog box Help Displays the help of this dialog box R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Feb 01 2013 2tENESAS Page 238 of 491 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Plug in Manager dialog box This dialog box is used to set the plug ins to be read in when this product is started Caution The settings in this dialog box are effective from the next time this product is started Figure A 59 Plug in Manager Dialog Box Plug in Manager Checked plug ins are loaded at the CubeSuite start up These settings are enabled at the next start up You can never uncheck a check box of the grayout plugin that is required by the CubeSuite Also on the Basic Function tab it is recommended that the checkboxes of the plug in for the target microcontroller of the development are not cleared 1 Basic Function Additional Function Module Name Description C Code Generator Plug in Plug in to generate the device driver automatically C Debug Console Plug in DebugConsole plug in to support using standard 1 0 M
11. Hook This function registers a hook or callback function Save This function saves all editing files and projects Source This function runs a script file R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Feb 01 2013 2tENESAS Page 333 of 491 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX G Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS ClearConsole This function clears the string displayed on the Python console Specification format ClearConsole Argumeni s None Return value If the string was cleared successfully True If there was an error when clearing the string False Detailed description This function clears the string displayed on the Python console Example of use gt gt gt ClearConsole True gt gt gt R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 334 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX G Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS CubeSuiteExit This function exits from CubeSuite Specification format CubeSuiteExit Argumeni s None Return value None Detailed description This function exits from CubeSuite Caution The editing file will not be saved even if the project file has been modified Use Save function to save the editing file Example of use gt gt gt CubeSuiteExit R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 335 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX G Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS This function displays the help f
12. How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can use a text box directly enter the text Ristriction Up to 256 characters Up to 256 characters are allowed R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 157 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Microcontroller Information tab This tab shows the detailed information on microcontrollers configured in the project categorized by the following and the configuration can be changed 1 File Information 2 Microcontroller Information 3 Notes Figure A 23 Property Panel Microcontroller Information Tab Property uPD70F3746 Property E File Information Microcontroller Information Notes File name This is the file name of this device file Description of each category 1 File Information The detailed information on the file is shown File name Displays device file name Default Device file name How to change Changes not allowed Absolute path Displays the absolute path of the device file Default The absolute path of the device file How to change Changes not allowed R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 158 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 2 Microcontroller Information The detailed information on microcontrollers is displayed and
13. R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 224 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Function buttons Button Function Initialize All Settings Restores all settings on this dialog box to their default values Note however that newly added items in the General External Tools category will not be removed Applies all setting and closes this dialog box Ignores the setting and closes this dialog box Applies all setting does not close this dialog box Displays the help of this dialog box R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Feb 01 2013 2tENESAS Page 225 of 491 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE General Build Debug category Use this category to configure general setting relating to building and debugging Figure A 54 Option Dialog Box General Build Debug Category 1 General q E Startup and Exit General Build Debug E Display 1 Enema Te Editor A9 Enable Rapid Build ont an olor E External Tools If rapid build is selected the build is started when the edited source file is E Build Debug saved As a result the build is executed in parallel with editing When rapid E Python Console build is selected we recommend saving a file with Ctrl S after the file edit is G Text Editor completed Update 2 To thers P C Observe registered files changing 3 z PC Show depen
14. b Use spaces as tabs When you press the Tab key in the text editor a group of space characters is inserted equal to the width of a tab When you press the Tab key in the text editor the tab character is inserted default R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 231 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE c Show whitespace marks Whitespace marks such as space and tab are shown in the text editor Whitespace marks such as space and tab are not shown in the text editor default 2 General Use this area to configure general settings in the text editor a Enable syntax coloring Enables the coloring of keywords in the text editor that have supported file types default No coloring of keywords is displayed in the text editor b Emable smart editing Enables the smart edit function default Disables the smart edit function Remark This function is disabled when the build tool is CA850 CA780R or CA78KO c Enable code outlining This item is only available if the Enable syntax coloring check box is selected Enables the code outlining feature in the text editor This enables the expansion and collapse of code blocks for file types that support it default Does not use the code outlining feature in the text editor d Enable file encoding auto detection Enables automatic determination of the encoding when a
15. Default Name of the main project file How to change Changes not allowed Absolute path Displays the absolute path of the main project file to save the information on them Default Absolute name of main projects How to change Changes not allowed 2 Notes The detailed information on records is displayed and their configuration can be changed Memo Add memos to main projects Memo is added one item in one line The added memos are displayed as subproperty Default Memo Number of items How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can use a text box directly enter the text Restriction Up to 256 characters Up to 256 characters are allowed R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 155 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Subproject tab This tab shows the detailed information on subproject categorized by the following and the configuration can be changed 1 File 2 Notes Figure A 22 Property Panel Subproject Tab Property E sub Property E File Save with absolute path Notes File name This is the name of the file to which the information of this subproject is to be saved Description of each category 1 File The detailed information on files are displayed File name Displays the file name of the file to save the info
16. From the Windows Start menu select Programs gt gt Renesas Electronics CubeSuite gt gt Uninstaller Remark In Windows 8 double click on Uninstaller on the start screen Description of each area 1 Select Tools area The CubeSuite products that are installed appear here Select the check boxes of the tools to uninstall 2 Progress Graph area This area displays a progress bar of the uninstallation process 3 Progress Details area This area displays information about ongoing and completed uninstalls for each tool to be uninstalled R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 295 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Function buttons Button Function Select all Selects all check boxes Unselect all Clears all check boxes Uninstall Uninstalls the selected tools Abort Uninstallation Cancels the uninstallation Exit Closes this window R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 296 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX B GLOSSARY APPENDIX B GLOSSARY This section defines terms used in the CubeSuite manual 1 Node This refers to an element representing a branch or leaf on a tree view connected with lines to show a hierarchy in the Project Tree panel and other views Figure B 87 Project Tree Panel Project Tree EME sample Project uPD7OF3746 Microcontroller es A Pin Configurator Design Tool w eij Code Gene
17. Hook functions are initialized by the following operations When a project file is loaded When a new project file is created When the active project is changed When the debugging tool is switched If Callback functions are declared they are called after CubeSuite events occur Callback functions are called after CubeSuite events occur R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 337 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX G Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS The name of the callback function is pythonConsoleCallback The parameter of the callback function is the callback trigger 10 After event registration 11 After event deletion 12 Before start of execution 13 After break 14 After CPU reset 18 After debug tool properties are changed 19 Before download 20 After memory or register is changeed 30 Before build 63 After time specified by XRunBreak has elapsed Example Sample script file def pythonConsoleCallback Id if Id 63 Processing you want to perform after time specified by XRunBreak has elapsed Cautions 1 Do not use the following functions in the callback function debugger Reset function debugger Run function debugger Breakpoint function 2 It is not possible to call debugger XRunBreak Set with different conditions in the callback func tion Do not make a specification like the following def pythonConsoleCallback Id if Id 6
18. R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 221 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE General External Tools category Use this category to register external tools that can be launched directly from CubeSuite and configure these external tools when they are so launched Registering an external tool here allows it to be launched directly via the Tool menu Figure A 53 Option Dialog Box General External Tools Category g General a E Startup and Exit General Extemal E Display G Extermal Text Editor Menu list G Font and Color BR E xtemal Tools New Extemal Tool i G Build Debug 1 gt Python Console gt G Text Editor QQ Update Others E User Information Menu name New External Tool Command path Startup options Startup folder C Use Output panel C Input options at startup C Close window when command exit Function buttons Initialize All Settings OK Cancel Apply Help The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open From the Tool menu select Options Description of each area 1 Registered external tools area a Menu list area This area displays a list of menu items added to the Tool menu for launching external tools that have been added via this dialog box To add a new external tool click the Ne
19. Remarks 1 In Windows 8 double click on Update Manager on the start screen 2 The Checking for Updates dialog box appears as the manager checks for update information Figure 2 20 Checking for Updates Dialog Box z Checking updates 4 Please wait R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 23 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 Select update items A list of appropriate update items appears on the Select updates page Figure 2 21 Select updates Page CubeSuite Update Manager Select updates EZ y ta All Select updates R RL78 G13 16KB m R5F1006AA It s strongly recommended that you apply the updates to keep software up to date Update Dowsboud aad at EDownload and install EXDownload only Download only Total OUpdate s OKB Option Select all Review update history CubeSuite Restore hidden updates O amp CubeSuite Vxx xx xx Change settings Download size xxxKB Help This is update for CubeSuite Detail Exit xox Renesas Electronics Corporation Select the check boxes of updates and click Download and install or Download only in the update selection area When Download and install is clicked 3 When Download only is clicked 5 Remarks 1 In the menu area select a microcontroller to only display update items for the selected microcontroller If you launched the CubeSuite Update Manager window by selecting Check for Updates from t
20. Rename the build mode with entered name in the opening the Character String Input dia log box Caution When duplicating or renaming the build mode the existing build mode name cannot be used Remarks 1 Up to 127 characters can be specified as a build mode name When the input violates any restric tion the following messages are shown in the tooltip Message Description A build mode with the same name already exists The entered build mode name already exists More than 127 characters cannot be specified Build mode name is too long more than 128 char acters The build mode name is invalid The following Invalid build mode name is entered The charac characters cannot be used lt gt ters lt gt cannot be used because the build mode name is used for the folder name 2 Up to 20 build modes can be added When the input violates any restriction the following mes sages are shown in the tooltip The maximum number of build modes that can be The number of build modes exceed 20 set per project subproject is 20 Function buttons Closes this dialog box Displays the help of this dialog box R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 199 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Character String Input dialog box This dialog box is used to input and edit characters in one line Figure A 42 Character Stri
21. debugger Map Information Argumeni s None Return value List of map information see the MapInfo property for detail Detailed description This function displays map information number start address end address access size memory type Example of use gt gt gt debugger Map Information 1 0x00000000 0x0005FFFF 32 Internal ROM area 2 0x00060000 Ox03FF6FFF 8 Non map area 3 Ox03FF7000 Ox03FFEFFF 32 Internal RAM area 4 Ox03FFF000 Ox03FFFFFF 8 SFR gt gt gt R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 401 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX G Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS debugger Map Set This function configures memory mapping Specification format debugger Map Set mapType address1 address2 accessSize 8 cs Argumeni s Argument Description Specify a memory type The memory types that can be specified are shown below Type Description MapType EmulationRom Emulation ROM area MapType EmulationRam Emulation RAM area MapType Target Target memory area MapType TargetRom Target ROM area MapType Stack Stack area MapType Protect I O protect area address1 Specify a map start address address2 Specify a map end address accessSize Specify an access size bit default 8 For V850 specify either 8 16 or 32 For 78KOR IECUBE specify either 8 or 16 Specify the chip select default not specified W
22. 1 Selected build mode area This area displays the build mode selected in the Build mode list area a Button Apply to All Set the build mode of the main project and all subprojects of the currently opened project to the currently displayed build mode Build mode list area This area displays all build modes that exist in the currently opening project main project and subproject in a list The current build modes of all projects are same the build mode is selected by default If they are not same 2 DefaultBuild will be selected The build mode that exists only in part of the main project and subproject is shown with the mark Note that the DefaultBuild is the default build mode and is always displayed at the top R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 198 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE a Button Duplicate Duplicates the selected build mode The Character String Input dialog box opens And the build mode is duplicated with the name entered in the dialog box and added to the main project and all the subprojects in the currently opening project When the build mode with mark does not exist in the main project or subproject and duplicate the build mode DefaultBuild will be duplicated Up to 20 build modes can be added Delete Deletes the selected build mode Note that DefaultBuild cannot be deleted Rename Renames the selected build mode
23. Create Project Microcontroller Using microcontroller x S VE50E MA3 Product Name uPD 7031314 S J uPD7031 314 144 pin Internal ROM size KBytes 256 pg tO ee Intemal BAM size Bytes 16384 JE pPD7031324Y 1 44pin JE yPD703132BY 1 44pin JE pPD7031334 1 44pin AD FOTW ADAVASA A Aine Kind of project Debug Only Project name DebugOnly i Make the project folder D work DebugOnly D ebugOnly mtpj C Pass the file composition of an existing project to the new project When you click the Create button after configuring all settings the project file of the debug dedicated project is created in the location specified in the Place item and the structure of the created debug dedicated project is displayed as a tree in the Project Tree panel Note See 2 6 2 Create a new project or 2 6 3 Add anew subproject for details on how to configure each item R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 308 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX F USING AN EXTERNAL BUILD TOOL Figure F 3 Project Tree Panel After Creating a Debug dedicated Project Project Tree gt O88 _ J DebugOnly Project F uPD7031314 Microcontroller i In a debug dedicated project E7 Design Tool Ej T onng ato A None Build Tool the build tool name is shown as 2S 850 Simulator Debug Tool None Build Tool g File E ral Download files F 3 Adda F
24. Rearrange Commands dialog box This dialog box allows you to change the arrangement including addition and deletion of menu items and buttons in the Main window Version Information dialog box This dialog box is used to display versions of CubeSuite and each plug in product Detail Version Information dialog box This dialog box is used to display detail version information of this product and the present project information One Point Advice dialog box This dialog box is used to display tips for using CubeSuite Other Windows dialog box This dialog box is used to select one of the divide panels shown in the Main window to activate or close Open Project dialog box This dialog box is used to open an existing project or select the project file to designate the project to divert when creating a new project Open File dialog box This dialog box is used to open a file Add Existing Subproject dialog box This dialog box is used to select subprojects for adding existing subprojects to projects Browse For Folder dialog box This dialog box is used to select the folder or file output destination e g source code or report file for the caller of this dialog box Save Project As dialog box R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Feb 01 2013 This dialog box is used to save project files as different names 7tENESAS Page 92 of 491 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Wind
25. Specify the address to display default 0 Return value None Detailed description debugger Jump File displays the file specified by fileName in the Editor panel If lineNumber is specified then the line specified by lineNumber in the file specified by fileName is displayed debugger Jump Address displays the panel specified by jumpType If address is specified then the area corresponding to the specified address is displayed Example of use gt gt gt debugger Jump File C test testJump c gt gt gt debugger Jump File C test testJump h 25 gt gt gt debugger Jump Address JumpType Memory 0x2000 gt gt gt R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 399 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX G Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS debugger Map Clear This function clears the mapping settings Specification format debugger Map Clear Argumeni s None Return value If the memory map was cleared successfully True If there was an error when clearing the memory map False Detailed description This function clears the mapping settings Example of use gt gt gt debugger Map Clear True gt gt gt R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 RENESAS Feb 01 2013 Page 400 of 491 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX G Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS debugger Map Information This function displays map information Specification format
26. APPENDIX G Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS Description Write to non writable SFR RL78 78KOR Bs O lt fee a ayoz ANOUN Joye NWIS aon OANSIUI Joye nwis Joyeinwy z3 z a1oyOANOIUI Joyejnwis lorillegal Illegal access to periph eral I O register with address StackOverflow Break due to stack over flow StackUnderflow Break due to stack underflow UninitializeStackPointer Break due to uninitial ized stack pointer UninitializeMemoryRead Read uninitialized mem ory TimerOver Execution timeout detected Unspecifiedlllegal Illegal operation in user program relating to peripheral chip features Imslxslllegal Break due to illegal write to IMS IXS register BeforeExecution Pre execution break SecurityProtect Accessed security pro tected region FlashMacroService Flash macro service active RetryOver Number of retries exceeded limit Flashlllegal Illegal Flash break Peripheral Break from peripheral WordMissAlignAccess Word access to odd address Temporary Temporary break Escape Escape break Fetch Fetched from guard area or area where fetches are prohibited R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Feb 01 2013 Page 388 of 491 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX G Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS Break trigger String Description RL78 7
27. Each option is described below Option Description Launch CubeSuite without displaying the Main window and exit without perform ing any actions bbA build mode name Execute a build Launch without displaying the Main window build all the projects included in spec ified project file name with the build mode specified by build mode name and then exit If a project does not have the build mode specified by build mode name then the build mode is copied based on the DefaultBuild and the build is performed If the build mode specified by build mode name is not defined in the project speci fied by project file name then an error will be displayed and processing will end If build mode name is omitted then the build will use the DefaultBuild If project file name is omitted then an error will be displayed and processing will end brA build mode name Execute a rebuild Launch without displaying the Main window build all the projects included in spec ified project file name with the build mode specified by build mode name and then exit If a project does not have the build mode specified by build mode name then the build mode is copied based on the DefaultBuild and the build is performed If the build mode specified by build mode name is not defined in the project speci fied by project file name then an error will be displayed and processing will end If build mode name is omitted then the build will use
28. Header file h hpp inc CC RX Header file Header file h inc CA850 CX NC30 Localised sup port CA78KOR CA78K0 Header file Assembler source file src s CC RX Assembler source file Assemble file s CA850 Assembler source file Assemble file asm s CX Assembler source file Assemble file a30 NC30 Localised support Assembler source file Assemble file asm CA78KOR CA78K0 Assembler source file Link directive file dir dr CA850 CX Link directive file Link directive file dr dir CA78KOR CA78KO Link directive file Section file sf CA850 Section file Symbol information file sfg CX Symbol information file Variable and function information file vfi CA78KOR Variable and function information file Variable information file vfi CA78KO Variable and function information file Function information file fin N CA78K0 Function information file R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Feb 01 2013 Map file map lbp CC RX NC30 Localised support Map file 2tENESAS Page 272 of 491 CubeSuite V2 00 00 Map file map CA850 CX CA78KOR CA78K0 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Map file Symbol table file sym CA78KOR CA78K0 Symbol table file Assemble list file Ist CC RX NC30 Localised sup port Assemble list file
29. Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Set to Default Build Option for Sets the current build options as the standard for the project When a subproject is Project added its setting is not made When the build option that is different from the standard option is set its property is displayed in boldface Import Build Options Opens the Import Build Options dialog box to import the build options from the selected project file Property Displays the selected build tool s property on the Property panel 5 When a Download file node is selected This node is displayed only for a debug dedicated project see APPENDIX F USING AN EXTERNAL BUILD TOOL Shows the cascading menu to add download files to the project Add File Opens the Add Existing File dialog box to add the selected file to the project as a download file Add New File Opens the Add File dialog box to create a file with the selected file type and add to the file to the project as a download file Add New Category Adds a new Category node directly below this node This allows the category name to be changed Up to 200 characters can be specified The default category name is New category You can also add a Category node with the same name as the existing Category node This menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation and when categories are ne
30. RL78 family 78KOR microcontrollers 78KO microcontrollers integrating the necessary tools for the develop ment phase of software e g design implementation and debugging into a single platform By providing an integrated environment it is possible to perform all development using just this product without the need to use many different tools separately Readers This manual is intended for users who wish to understand the functions of the CubeSuite and design software and hardware application systems Purpose This manual is intended to give users an understanding of the functions of the CubeSuite to use for reference in developing the hardware or software of systems using these devices Organization This manual can be broadly divided into the following units CHAPTER 1 GENERAL CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE APPENDIX B GLOSSARY APPENDIX C HOW THE MANUALS ARE ORGANIZED APPENDIX D INPUT CONVENTIONS APPENDIX E REGULAR EXPRESSIONS SYNTAX APPENDIX F USING AN EXTERNAL BUILD TOOL APPENDIX G Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS APPENDIX H INDEX How to Read This Manual It is assumed that the readers of this manual have general knowledge of electricity logic circuits and microcontrollers Conventions Data significance Higher digits on the left and lower digits on the right Active low representation XXX overscore over pin or signal name Note Footnote for item marked with Note in the text Caution Information requi
31. User Information E Display G External Text Editor GE Font and Color E Extemal Tools User information G Build Debug Input the user information E Python Console Name Information a G Text Editor __ User Information N Update z J Others 1 ETI User Information Department User nami E mail Telephone number Fax number Additional information __ Sales Information Paint of contact Please enter the e mail address of your technical sup m a Function buttons riiaizs Al Setings The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open From the Tool menu select Options Description of each area 1 Information area a User information area This area displays a list of user information The content in the Information field can be edited To edit the information select one of the items from the list click the Edit button and then type the information directly into the text box up to 256 characters b Buttons Edits the content of the selected Information item by typing directly in the text box This button is disabled if nothing is selected in the list R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 237 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 2 Buttons Initialize Settings Returns all currently displayed setting to their default values
32. Variable and function information file vfi CA78KOR Variable and function information file Variable information file vfi CA78KO Variable and function information file Function information file fin N 2 CA78KO Function information file Map file map CA850 CX NC30 Localised sup port CA78KOR CA78K0 Map file Map file map lbp CC RX Map file Symbol table file sym CA78KOR CA78K0 Symbol table file Assemble list file Ist CC RX NC30 Localised sup port Assemble list file Hex file hex CC RX CA850 CX NC30 Localised sup port Hex file Hex file hex hxb hxf CA78KOR CA78K0 Hex file S record file mot CC RX NC30 Localised support S record file Jump table file jmp CC RX Jump table file Symbol address file fsy CC RX Symbol address file Cross reference file cref CC RX NC30 Localised sup port Cross reference file 2tENESAS Page 281 of 491 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Link subcommand file clnk CC RX NC30 Localised Link subcommand file support Text file txt Text format Notes 1 This file type is only shown for a debug dedicated project 2 This file type is only shown for microcontrollers with a memory bank b In the Output panel The following file types file type are displayed The file can only be sav
33. You can customize items to include on a toolbar or a menu Figure A 64 User Setting Dialog Box Commands Tab User Setting Toolbars Categories Commands All Commands A File 1 Build E Debug Exit Disassemble 2 Edit View e GJ Project Tree ar Property Jump Output v Memnrs 3 v Rearrange Commands Function buttons Keyboard The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open From the Tool menu select User Setting Description of each area 1 Categories area Display a list of the categories of commands that CubeSuite provides 2 lt Commands area Display a list of the names of commands belonging to the category selected in the Categories area together with their icons if exist When All Commands is selected in the Categories area the name of all commands that CubeSuite provides are displayed together with their icons if exist To add a command on a toolbar menu drag and drop the command name in this area onto the toolbar menu dis played in the actual Main window R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 249 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 3 Buttons Modify Selection In order that the menu item or the button on a toolbar currently selected in the Main window displays the foll
34. common Version This property refers the version of CubeSuite Specification format common Version Setting s None Reference Version of CubeSuite Detailed description This property refers the version of CubeSuite Example of use gt gt gt print common Version V1 02 00 01 Apr 2012 R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 461 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX G Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS common ViewLine This property sets or refers the number of screen lines for the Python console Specification format common ViewLine number Setting s number Set the number of screen lines for the Python console default 10000 Reference Current set value Detailed description This property sets or refers the number of screen lines for the Python console Example of use gt gt gt print common ViewLine 10000 gt gt gt common ViewLine 20000 R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 462 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX G Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS common ViewOutput This property sets and displays the setting for whether or not to display results of Python functions for CubeSuite and error messages in the Python console Specification format common ViewOutput bool Setting s Setting Description Set whether or not to display results of Python functions for CubeSuite and error mes
35. p name Matches any character in the Unicode general category specified by name for example LI Nd Z See the E 3 Supported Unicode General Categories for details on the Unicode general category Matches any word character which includes letters digits and underscores R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 302 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX E REGULAR EXPRESSIONS SYNTAX Character Class Description Matches any non word character Matches any whitespace character Matches any non whitespace character Matches any decimal digit Matches any non digit Escaped built in character classes such as w and s may be used in a character class This exam ple matches any period word or whitespace character E 3 Supported Unicode General Categories The following table describes the supported Unicode general categories These categories can be used with the p and P character classes See the E 2 Character Classes for details on the character classes Table E 3 List of Supported Unicode General Categories Unicode General Categories Description Letter Uppercase Letter Lowercase Letter Titlecase Letter Modifier Letter Other Mark Nonspacing Mark Spacing Combining Mark Enclosing Number Decimal Digit Number Letter Number Other Punctuation Connector Punctuation Dash Punctuation Open
36. ter For example cat dog tiger The left most successful match wins R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 306 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX F USING AN EXTERNAL BUILD TOOL APPENDIX F USING AN EXTERNAL BUILD TOOL This section describes how to create a project when debugging files generated with a build tool other than the one pro vided by CubeSuite CC RX CA850 CX NC30 Localised support CA78KOR CA78K0 F 1 Overview CubeSuite automatically determines the load module file or hex file output by the build tool provided by CubeSuite CC RX CA850 CX NC30 Localised support CA78KOR CA78K0 as the download file for debugging For this reason you must create a dedicated project hereafter referred to as a debug dedicated project in order to debug a load mod ule file or hex file created by an external build tool e g a compiler or assembler other than the build tool provided by CubeSuite as the download file Creating a debug dedicated project enables you to perform debugging without going through the build tool provided by CubeSuite A debug dedicated project also enables you to configure commands to execute build processes e g make suited to your execution environment and you can perform builds linked to an external build tool by executing these commands from CubeSuite The operational sequence for using a debug dedicated project is described below Figure F 1 Operational Sequence for Usin
37. then instruction codes are not displayed If is specified in address then it is interpreted as the address following the last address disassembled Example of use gt gt gt debugger Assemble Disassemble main 0x00004088 F545 br _TestInit 0x8e gt gt gt debugger Assemble Disassemble main 2 0x00004088 F545 br _TestInit 0x8e 0x0000408A OA5A mov Oxa r11 gt gt gt debugger Assemble Disassemble main 5 False 0x00004088 br _TestInit 0x8e 0x0000408A mov Oxa r11 0x0000408C movea 0x19 r0 r13 0x00004090 mov r13 r12 0x00004092 movhi Oxffff gp rl gt gt gt R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 364 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX G Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS debugger Assemble LineAssemble This function performs line assembly Specification format debugger Assemble LineAssemble address code Argumeni s Argument Description Specify the address at which to start assembly Specify the string to assemble Return value If line assembly was performed successfully True If there was an error when performing line assembly False Detailed description This function performs assembly of the string specified by code from the address specified by address If is specified in address then it is interpreted as the address following the last address assembled Example of use gt gt gt debugger Assemble Disassemble main
38. 0x00004088 F545 br _TestInit 0x8e gt gt gt debugger Assemble Disassemble 0x0000408A OA5A mov Oxa r11 gt gt gt debugger Assemble LineAssemble main mov r13 r12 True gt gt gt debugger Assemble Disassemble main 1 False 0x00004088 mov r13 r12 gt gt gt R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 365 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX G Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS debugger Breakpoint Delete This function deletes a break point Specification format debugger Breakpoint Delete breakNumber Argumeni s Specify the break event number to delete Return value If a break point was deleted successfully True If there was an error when deleting a break point False Detailed description This function deletes the break event specified by breakNumber If breakNumber is not specified then breaks of all break event numbers will be deleted Example of use gt gt gt debugger Breakpoint Enable 1 True gt gt gt debugger Breakpoint Disable 1 True gt gt gt debugger Breakpoint Delete 1 True gt gt gt R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 366 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX G Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS debugger Breakpoint Disable This function disables a break point setting Specification format debugger Breakpoint Disable breakNumber Argumeni s Specify the
39. Grand Century Place 193 Prince Edward Road West Mongkok Kowloon Hong Kong Tel 852 2886 9318 Fax 852 2886 9022 9044 Renesas Electronics Taiwan Co Ltd 3F No 363 Fu Shing North Road Taipei Taiwan Tel 886 2 8175 9600 Fax 886 2 8175 9670 Renesas Electronics Singapore Pte Ltd 80 Bendemeer Road Unit 06 02 Hyflux Innovation Centre Singapore 339949 Tel 65 6213 0200 Fax 65 6213 0300 Renesas Electronics Malaysia Sdn Bhd Unit 906 Block B Menara Amcorp Amcorp Trade Centre No 18 Jin Persiaran Barat 46050 Petaling Jaya Selangor Darul Ehsan Malaysia Tel 60 3 7955 9390 Fax 60 3 7955 9510 Renesas Electronics Korea Co Ltd 11F Samik Lavied or Bldg 720 2 Yeoksam Dong Kangnam Ku Seoul 135 080 Korea Tel 82 2 558 3737 Fax 82 2 558 5141 2013 Renesas Electronics Corporation and Renesas Solutions Corp Colophon 1 3 CubeSuite V2 00 00 tENESAS Renesas Electronics Corporation R20UT2444EJ0100
40. It also provides information for when you use the connected debug tool to debug your programs 6 Analysis This manual describes the analyze tools The analysis tool analyzes the source program and information while the program is executing and provides information about the functions and variables 7 Message This manual describes output messages R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 299 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX D INPUT CONVENTIONS APPENDIX D INPUT CONVENTIONS This section describes input conventions D 1 Input Conventions Below are input conventions for configuring information in the panels and dialog boxes provided by CubeSuite 1 Character sets The following character sets are allowed for input Table D 1 List of Character Sets Character Sets Outline ASCII Single byte numbers letters and punctuation Shift JIS Double byte letters numbers punctuation Hiragana Katakana and Kanji and single byte Katakana EUC JP Double byte letters numbers punctuation Hiragana Katakana and Kanji and single byte Katakana Double byte letters numbers punctuation Hiragana Katakana and Kanji including Chi nese and single byte Katakana 2 Numbers Numbers may be input in the following base formats Table D 2 List of Number Bases Decimal number Starts with 1 to 9 followed by a sequence of the digits 0 to 9 and 0 Hexadecimal number Starts with 0x followed
41. Kind of project Project name Place Select using kind of Group D work PM Browse Backup the project composition after before conversion Cancel Help Figure 2 73 Project Convert Setting Dialog Box When Subproject Is Selected Project Convert Setting Project Ta proje R Group2 E projectx R projectY a Group3 l R projectZ Project settings New microcontroller Microcontroller New microcontroller fy VO50ES HE3 Wh VE50ES HF3 Ah V850ES HG3 iy VE50ES HI3 y VE50ESGSH y VE50ESG3 U fe V850ES H3 H uarare wais a Product Name uPD70F3746 Intemal ROM size KBytes 1024 Intermal RAM size Bytes 61440 New project Kind of project Project name Place Appcation CAB0 project 7 D work PM E V Backup the project composition after before conversion Cancel Help After setting the microcontroller to be used for the conversion target project and project type name and place of creation settings click the OK button Remarks 1 When the main project is selected the New microcontroller area and Kind of project in the New project area will be invalid R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Feb 01 2013 2tENESAS Page 68 of 491 CubeSuite V2 00 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 If you select Backup the project composition files after conversion immediately after th
42. License kep OOK POO ODO HOOK HOON Serial number xxxxKKK R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 22 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 4 Using the Update Feature The update feature updates installed tools and documents to their latest versions It acquires information about the latest versions via the Internet and then downloads and installs them There are two update methods manual update where you perform the update guided by information displays and auto update which automatically updates according to your settings Caution When you use the update feature the host machine must have a connection to the Internet 2 4 1 The manual update feature This section describes the manual update 1 Launch Update Manager From the Windows the Start menu select Programs gt gt Renesas Electronics CubeSuite gt gt Update Man ager or from the CubeSuite menu select Help gt gt Check for Updates The CubeSuite Update Manager window launches Figure 2 19 CubeSuite Update Manager Window T CubeSuite Update Manager Select updates EZ All CubeSuite Update Manager RL78 G13 16KB R5F1006AA CubeSuite Update Manager keeps CubeSuite related software and documents up to date Option Review update history Restore hidden updates Checking updates Change settings Gg Please wait Help Exit Vex xx oo cox xox Renesas Electronics Corporation
43. New Toolbar dialog box This dialog box is used to create a new toolbar to appear in the Main window Figure A 65 New Toolbar Dialog Box New Toolbar Toolbar name ltraToolbar1 Location v Function buttons The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open In the Toolbars tab of the User Setting dialog box click the New button Description of each area 1 Toolbar name Type in the name of the new toolbar directly via the keyboard UltraToolbar1 is specified by default 2 Location Select the location for the new toolbar from the following drop down list The location specified here is the location where the new toolbar will appear immediately after it is created tool bars can be moved freely by dragging and dropping Docked Top Displays the toolbar at the top of the Main window default Docked Bottom Displays the toolbar at the bottom of the Main window Docked Left Displays the toolbar on the leftedge of the Main window Docked Right Displays the toolbar on the rightedge of the Main window Floating Displays the toolbar above the Main window without docking it R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 RENESAS Page 251 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Function buttons Button Function Creates a new toolbar with the specified information an
44. None Variable Address This holds the address Code This holds code information as a collection of bytes Detailed description DisassemblelInfo is a class and it is the structure of the return value from the debugger Assemble Disassemble function Example of use gt gt gt info debugger Assemble Disassemble main 4 Disassemble command 0x000002DC B51D br _main 0x36 0x000002DE 0132 movOxl r6 0x000002E0 60FF3800 jarl func _staticl lp 0x000002E4 63570100 st w r10 Ox0 sp gt gt gt print info 0 Address 732 gt gt gt print info 0 Code 0 181 gt gt gt print info 0 Code 1 29 gt gt gt print Mnemonic br _main 0x36 gt gt gt print info Address 740 gt gt gt print info Code 0 99 gt gt gt print info Code 1 87 gt gt gt print info Code 2 R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 445 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX G Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS 1 gt gt gt print info 3 Code 3 0 gt gt gt print info 3 Mnemonic st w r10 0x0 sp gt gt gt R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 446 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX G Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS Downloadinfo This class holds download information return value of the debugger Download Information function Type class DownloadInfo Number None Name None Obj ectDownload SymbolDownload
45. R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Feb 01 2013 2tENESAS Page 119 of 491 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE h Window Window menu shows menu items to operate the window Splits the active Editor panel horizontally Only the active Editor panel can be splited Other panels will not be splited A panel can be splited a maximum of two times Remove Split Removes the split view of the Editor panel Close All Panels Closes all splited panels 1 Tab name of panel Moves the focus to 1 tab name of panel 2 Tab name of panel Moves the focus to 2 tab name of panel 3 Tab name of panel Moves the focus to 3 tab name of panel 4 Tab name of panel Moves the focus to 4 tab name of panel 5 Tab name of panel Moves the focus to 5 tab name of panel 6 Tab name of panel Moves the focus to 6 tab name of panel 7 Tab name of panel Moves the focus to 7 tab name of panel 8 Tab name of panel Moves the focus to 8 tab name of panel 9 Tab name of panel Moves the focus to 9 tab name of panel Other Windows If 10 or more divide panels are open open the Other Windows dialog box i Help The Help menu displays help related menu commands Help Opens the help for this product Open Help for Target Opens the help corresponding to the window panel dialog box error message or other object that currently has focus One Point Advice Opens the One Point Advice dialog
46. Specification format debugger XRunBreak Set time timeType TimeType Ms periodic False Argumeni s Argument Description time Specify the break time timeType Specify the break time unit The units that can be specified are shown below Type Description TimeType Min Minute unit TimeType S Second unit TimeType Ms Millisecond unit default TimeType Us Microsecond unit TimeType Ns Nanosecond unit periodic Specify whether to call the callback every time the specified time elapses True Call at every specified time interval False Call one time only default Return value If XRunBreak information was configured successfully True If there was an error when configuring XRunBreak information False Detailed description This function configures XRunBreak information The XRunBreak calling interval depends on the simulator Register the Python function that is processed after the specified time passes See Hook for detail Caution If you use the following operations while program is running after the XRunBreak information is set please use these operations after program is stopped Resets the CPU Resets the CPU and then executes the program from the reset address Set Remove Breakpoints R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 433 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX G Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS Example of use gt gt gt debugge
47. Specifies one or more matches for example w or abc Same as 1 Specifies zero or one matches for example w or abc Same as 0 1 Specifies exactly n matches for example pizza 2 Specifies at least n matches for example abc 2 Specifies at least n but no more than m matches E 5 Atomic Zero Width Assertions The following table describes the atomic zero width assertions The metacharacters described in the following table do not cause the engine to advance through the string or consume characters They simply cause a match to succeed or fail depending on the current position in the string R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 304 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX E REGULAR EXPRESSIONS SYNTAX Table E 6 List of Atomic Zero Width Assertions Assertion Description A Specifies that the match must occur at the beginning of the document or the beginning of the line For example region returns only those occurrences of the character string region that occur at the begin ning of a line Specifies that the match must occur at the end of the string before n at the end of the string or at the end of the line A Specifies that the match must occur at the beginning of the document z Specifies that the match must occur at the end of the document b Specifies that the match must occur on a boundary between w alphanumeric and W nonalphanume
48. Subproject node Indicates that this is the subproject for the conversion target project When selected the area on the right shows the subproject setting items Remarks 1 Holding down the Ctrl key and selecting a main project node and subproject node allows you to make a multiple project setting 2 For the following conversions subproject nodes do not appear Ina CubeSuite project when there are no subprojects In a HEW workspace when there is only one project In a HEW project Ina PM project 3 When the input for Place violates any restriction the following messages are shown in the tooltip Message Description Some project names are too long Make it For project settings not selected in this area the absolute within 259 characters path of the conversion target project file exceeds 259 char acters The device is not specified in some The device list of the microcontroller selected for a project projects Select the project in tree view that is not selected in this area does not include the set and please set the device tings for that project This message is shown when CubeSuite does not sup port the device for the CubeSuite or PM project or when a device was not set after the HEW project was opened 2 New microcontroller area Carry out the microcontroller settings for the conversion target project Remark This area will be invalid when a PM workspace is converted and the main proje
49. Variable Variable Description Number This holds the download number Name This holds the file name Obj ectDownload This holds whether object information has been downloaded or not True Object information has been downloaded False Object information has not been downloaded SymbolDownload This holds whether symbol information has been downloaded or not True Symbol information has been downloaded False Symbol information has not been downloaded Detailed description Downloadinfo is a class and it is the structure of the return value from the debugger Download Information func tion Example of use gt gt gt info debugger Download Information 1 DefaultBuild sample out gt gt gt print info 0 Number 1 gt gt gt print info 0 Name DefaultBuild sample out gt gt gt print info 0 ObjectDownload True gt gt gt print info SymbolDownload m rue gt gt gt R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 447 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX G Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS This class holds map information return value of the debugger Map Information function Type class MapInfo Number 0 StartAddress EndAddress AccessSize None MapTypeName Variable Variable Description Number This holds the number StartAddress This holds the start address of the map area EndAddress This holds the end addr
50. gt gt debugger Erase True gt gt gt debugger Erase EraseOption External False gt gt gt R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 386 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX G Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS debugger GetBreakStatus This function displays a break condition Specification format debugger GetBreakStatus Argumeni s None Return value Break trigger string See Detailed description Remarks 1 Returns the string portion of the BreakStatus enum 2 Determine conditions by writing in the format BreakStatus string Detailed description This function displays break trigger During execution this will be None Break trigger String Description RL78 78KOR D oO lt oa Oo ayoyZeANONUIN Joye NWIS L aop COANN J0eNnwIS 10enwg za z aop INONU L aop COANN Joye nUIS None No break Manual Forced break Event Break due to event Software Software break TraceFull Break due to trace full TraceDelay Break due to trace delay NonMap Access to non mapped area WriteProtect Write to write protected area ReadProtect Read from read pro tected area Sfrillegal Illegal SFR access SfrReadProtect Read from non readable SFR R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 387 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 Break trigger String SfrWriteProtect
51. gt debugger GetValue testVal 100 gt gt gt debugger GetValue testVal WatchOption Hexdecimal 0x64 gt gt gt debugger GetValue testVal WatchOption Binary 0b1100100 gt gt gt debugger SetValue testVal 0x256 True gt gt gt debugger GetValue testVal WatchOption Hexdecimal 0x256 R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 426 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX G Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS debugger Where This function displays a stack backtrace Specification format debugger Where Argumeni s None Return value List of a backtrace see the Stacklnfo property for detail Detailed description This function displays a stack backtrace Caution If Information below might be inaccurate is displayed then the information displayed below may not be reliable RL78 78KOR Example of use gt gt gt debugger Where 1 test2 c sub2 13 Information below might be inaccurate 2 func c func 34 gt gt gt R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 427 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX G Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS debugger Whereami This function displays a location Specification format debugger Whereami address Argumeni s Specify the address of the location to display Return value Strings of the location Detailed description This function displa
52. project group that includes the active project Projects other than this project are registered in recently used projects However the number of projects that exceeds four is not registered 2 The project settings after conversion of those in the PM project group are set to the same set tings as the project listed first in the workspace file In addition files are not registered 3 If you wish to organize each of the projects into a single project after conversion add each project as a subproject to a single project 4 When loading a workspace that includes projects without build tools specified build tools are set according to the microcontroller Cautions 1 Only projects that can be loaded by PM and built normally can be loaded into CubeSuite 2 If there is already a subproject file in the same folder and with the same file name excluding the file extension as the project file then the project file will not be saved correctly Change the name of the main project or the subproject on the project tree 3 When only one project exists in a PM workspace the project will be converted to the main project R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 69 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 When opening from a PM project file prj a Select the project for conversion settings When a PM project file is selected the Project Convert Setting dialog box will open Figure 2 75 Project Convert Set
53. sages in the Python console True Display in the Python console default False Do not display in the Python console Reference Current set value Detailed description This property sets and displays the setting for whether or not to display results of Python functions for CubeSuite and error messages in the Python console Example of use gt gt gt print common ViewOutput False gt gt gt common ViewOutput True R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 463 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX G Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS G3 8 CubeSuite Python property for project Below is a list of CubeSuite Python properties for a project Table G 8 CubeSuite Python Property For Project Property Name Function Description project Device This property refers the microcontroller of the active project project lsOpen This property confirms whether the project has been opened project Kind This property refers the kind of the active project project Name This property refers the active project file name without path project Nickname This property refers the nickname of the microcontroller of the active project project Path This property refers the active project file name with path R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Feb 01 2013 2tENESAS Page 464 of 491 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX G Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS
54. tENESAS Page 122 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Start panel This panel allows you to open a tutorial access create open a project and load a sample project with single click Figure A 15 Start Panel Learn About CubeSuite We recommend reading the tutorial to find out what can be done in CubeSuite 1 ei The tutorial contains the information on how to effectively use CubeSuite Create New Project 2 A new project can be created new project can also be created by reusing the file configuration registered to an existing project Open Existing Project Loads the project of CubeSuite Can also be opened directly from the following link Recent Project GO ul Ric Nothing ite Project Nothing Open Existing CubeSuite High performance Embedded Workshop PM Project The project created with the old IDE can be converted to the CubeSuite project Support version High performance Embedded Workshop GO V 4 07 00 or later SH RX REC M16C H8 project 1 In following case the build options also can be converted erted From the HEW RX compiler package V 1 00R00 or later project to the CubeSuite RX project Open Sample Project Many sample projects that can be built immediately are provided After selecting the desired project from the list below press the GO button and specify the destination folder to copy the selected sample project 78K0 78KOR
55. the system encoding is used The encoding name conforms to the NET specifications Examples Encoding utf 8 Encoding euc jp Specify an option The options that can be specified are shown below Type Description WatchOption Auto Automatically detect when displaying default WaichOption Binary Display in binary format WaitchOption Octal Display in octal format WatchOption Decimal Display in decimal format WaitchOption SignedDecimal Display in signed decimal format WaitchOption UnsignedDecimal Display in unsigned decimal format WatchOption Hexdecimal Display in hexadecimal format WatchOption String Display as a string WatchOption Sizeof Display the variable size in decimal format WatchOption Float Display in float type WatchOption Double Display in double type The displayed value is returned in the format specified by watchOption When watchOption is specified as WatchOption Auto the format is returned to match the variable value However if the return value is a double type it is returned as a string when watchOption is specified as WatchOp tion Double or watchOption is specified as WatchOption Auto and the return value is a double type Detailed description This function displays the value of the variable specified by variableName If encode is specified then perform encoding using encode If
56. valid registered licenses area shown in the Licenses area Figure 2 16 License Manager Window S License Manager You can add and remove license of Renesas Electronics microcontroller development tools License key is case insensitive and does not contain alphabetical 0 Add this License key Licenses RX License Pack 1 RX License Pack 1 License kep OOOO POO DODO HOOK POON Serial number sxsw R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 21 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 3 2 Add a license In the License Manager window in the Add this License key text box enter a license key then click the Add button to add the license Figure 2 17 License Manager Window License Manager You can add and remove license of Renesas Electronics microcontroller development tools License key is case insensitive and does not contain alphabetical 0 Add this Licenseteey Licenses 2 3 3 Delete a license In the License Manager window select the license you wish to delete from the Licenses area then click the Remove button to delete the license Figure 2 18 License Manager Window M License Manager You can add and remove license of Renesas Electronics microcontroller development tools License key is case insensitive and does not contain alphabetical 0 Add this License key Licenses Rx License Pack 1 RX License Pack 1
57. 243 B Basic Function tab 241 Batch build 329 Batch Build dialog box 202 Bookmarks dialog box 176 Browse For Folder dialog box 276 Build 323 Build mode 319 Build Mode Settings dialog box 198 Build Options tab 160 Cc Change Microcontroller dialog box 167 change the project name 50 Character String Input dialog box 200 Checking for Updates dialog box 105 Clean 326 Commands tab 249 Create Project dialog box 125 CubeSuite project 56 CubeSuite Python functions 332 CubeSuite Uninstaller window 295 CubeSuite Update Manager window 94 Download and install page 98 Download only page 100 Error page 104 Finish page 101 History page 102 Restore hidden updates page 103 Select updates page 96 Customize Keyboard dialog box 254 APPENDIX H INDEX D Debug dedicated project 307 Detail Version Information dialog box 261 Download and install page 98 Download only page 100 E Editor panel 163 Encoding dialog box 175 Error page 104 F favorites menu 49 Find and Replace dialog box 179 Find in Files tab 183 Quick Find tab 180 Quick Replace tab 187 Replace in Files tab 190 Find in Files tab 183 Finish page 101 G General Build Debug category 226 General Display category 212 General External Text Editor category
58. 78KO Common manual Remarks 1 The manual that you can refer will differ depending on which products are installed 2 The CubeSuite Integrated Development Environment User s Manual Start includes instructions on builds in the design implementation processes when using an external build tool 1 Start This manual describes an outline of CubeSuite It also describes installation updates license settings and other information It describes the operations from launching CubeSuite to creating a project 2 Design This manual describes the design tool pin assignment and code generation 3 Coding This manual describes the roles and functions of the commands of the C compiler assembler and other tools included with CubeSuite It provides information necessary for development using the C compiler and assembler as well as expert knowledge on effective coding techniques R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 298 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX C HOW THE MANUALS ARE ORGANIZED 4 Build This manual describes the build tools The build tool component is part of CubeSuite It enables various types of information to be configured via a GUI tool This enables you to generate load module files hex format object module files or library files from your source files according to your objectives 5 Debug This manual describes how to control the connection and execution settings of your debug tool
59. 78KO Compiler CA78K0 V x xx Installing Installation completed successfully RL78 78K0R Compiler CA78K0R Vx xx Installing CubeSuite When all installations of the install targets are finished the Next button becomes enabled Check the information and click the Next button Remark If you click the Abort Installations button a message stating that the user chose to cancel the installa tion appears in the Install Status area The installation will halt when the installation of the tool cur rently being installed finishes R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 17 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 10 Confirm the results of the installation When all setup related tasks are finished the results of the installation appear Figure 2 12 Setup Completion Window Installer step 8 8 Setup Completion Setup is complete Click Finish to exit setting All installations were completed successfully The latest product update information can be checked when the Launch Update Manager is checked CubeSuite jack Click the Finish button to complete the installation Remarks 1 When having a check in a Launch Update Manager check box the CubeSuite Update Manager window opens after completing the installation See 2 4 Using the Update Feature for the update method 2 If required software was installed in steps 2 and 3 above a m
60. A WINDOW REFERENCE Print Opens the Print dialog box provided by Windows in order to print the contents of the active Editor panel Print Preview Opens the Print Preview window to preview the source file before printing Recent Files Displays a list of recently used files in a cascading menu to open those files 1 Recent File Uses this item to open the most recently used file 2 Recent File Uses this item to open the second most recently used file 3 Recent File Uses this item to open the third most recently used file 4 Recent File Uses this item to open the fourth most recently used file Recent Projects Displays a list of recently used projects in a cascading menu to open those projects 1 Recent Project Uses this item to open the most recently used project 2 Recent Project Uses this item to open the second most recently used project 3 Recent Project Uses this item to open the third most recently used project 4 Recent Project Uses this item to open the fourth most recently used project Exit b Edit When the rapid start is enabled this product enters the wait state When the rapid start is disabled exit from this product proceeds If there are unsaved source files or main or subproject files then a Message dia log box will ask if you want to save them The Edit menu displays editing related menu commands Undo Undoes the la
61. BreakCondition gt gt gt Condition Address main gt gt gt breakNumber debugger Breakpoint Set Condition gt gt gt print breakNumber 1 gt gt gt debugger Breakpoint Information 1 PythonBreak0001 Enable 0x000002dc R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 370 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX G Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS debugger Connect This function connects to the debug tool Specification format debugger Connect Argumeni s None Return value If the debug tool was connected successfully True If there was an error when connecting to the debug tool False Detailed description This function connects to the debug tool Example of use gt gt gt debugger Connect True gt gt gt R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 371 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX G Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS debugger DebugTool Change This function changes the debug tool Specification format debugger DebugTool Change debugToo1 Argumeni s debugTool Specify the debug tool to change The debug tools that can be specified are shown below Type Description DebugTool Simulator Simulator DebugTool Minicube MINICUBE DebugTool Minicube2 MINICUBE2 Serial connect DebugTool Minicube2Jtag MINICUBE2 JTAG connect DebugTool lecube IECUBE DebugTool lecube2 IECUBE2 DebugTool E1Jtag E1 JTAG connect D
62. Build mode property in the Build Mode category on the Build Options tab in the Property panel Figure F 23 Build mode Property Build mode Default Build R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 320 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX F USING AN EXTERNAL BUILD TOOL b When changing the build mode for the entire project Select Build Mode Settings from the Build menu The Build Mode Settings dialog box will open Figure F 24 Build Mode Settings Dialog Box Build Mode Settings Selected build mode BuildMode2 Apply to All Build mode list DefaultBuild BuildMode2 Select the build mode to be changed from Build mode list The selected build mode will be displayed in Selected build mode Click the Apply to All button The build mode for the main project and all the subprojects including projects other than a debug dedicated project which belong to the project will be changed to the build mode selected in the dialog box Caution For subprojects that the selected build mode does not exist the build mode of the sub project is duplicated from the contents of its DefaultBuild and then the selected build mode is created newly to the subproject i e the selected build mode with the contents of the subproject is added F 4 3 Set the target project for a build When running a build that targets a specific debug dedicated project main project or subproject
63. C Stack Usage Tracer Utility to display and adjust stack usage of each functions a C Tool Interface Protocol TIP Plug in Plug in that acts as an interface between tools TIP C Update Manager Plug in Plug in to communicate with CubeSuite Update Manager Function buttons The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open From the Tool menu select Plug in Setting R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 243 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Description of each area 1 Plug in list area This area shows a list of the plug ins other than build tool and debug tool plug ins installed in this product plug ins present in the Plugins folder of this product in the following format Module Name Shows the plug in module names The plug ins read in when this product is started are selected with check boxes Description Shows a simple description of the plug in Remarks 1 The Editor panel plug in cannot be removed from the list of those read in and so the display is grayed out 2 When this product is started from the command line plug ins below the Plugins folder specified with the np option do not appear in this area When the npall option is specified plug ins below the Plugins folder are not read in and thus nothing appears in this area See 2 12 Manipulate CubeS
64. Configurator Design Tool eij Code Generator Design Tool A C4850 Build Tool S 850 Simulator Debug Tool p Program Analyzer Analyze Tool File 2 Er sub Subproject uPD70F3746 Microcontroller A Pin Configurator Design Tool eij Code Generator Design Tool A CA850 Build Tool 850 Simulator Debug Tool p Program Analyzer Analyze Tool E3 Ei File E E sub2 Subproject J uPD70F3746 Microcontroller A Pin Configurator Design Tool H eij Code Generator Design Tool A CA850 Build Tool S V850 Simulator Debug Tool p Program Analyzer Analyze Tool w File Main project Project Subproject Subproject In addition project settings and the settings for subprojects added to a project are independent and have no effect on each other When making the same settings between the main project and subprojects or between differing subprojects select multiple nodes to set on the project tree and make the settings with the Property panel Caution A subproject cannot be added to another subproject Remark See 2 6 3 Add anew subproject and 2 7 2 Add an existing subproject for how to add subprojects R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 39 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 6 1 Start a project On the tool bar click amp start to open the Start panel You can click the buttons on the panel to create a new project or open an existing one Note
65. Deleting download files a Select download files Select the check boxes of download files in the History page and click the Delete button Figure 2 35 History Page History by You can save disk space by deleting downloaded files Also you may copy the files to other PCs to update Select all Legend Download F Instal Success Suspended Failed Title State Date E Oi CubeSuite Vxxx xx ee January XX XXXX XXXXXX ASA CubeSuite Update Manager detai Monday January xx xxxx XXXXXX VX XX XX AM CubeSuite Utilities Vx xx xx deta eee Ao EEE R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 32 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS b Confirm whether you want to delete download files and delete them A Message dialog box asks whether you want to delete download files Figure 2 36 Message Dialog Box Question Q01 30001 Do you want to delete files corresponding to the selected updates If you click the Yes button the download files are deleted 2 4 6 Restoring hidden updates In the menu area of the CubeSuite Update Manager window select Restore hidden updates to display the Restore hidden updates page From this page you can display the updates that were hidden on the Select updates page Figure 2 37 Restore hidden updates Page CubeSuite Update Manager Select updates 3 3 All Restore hidden updates I ms Update Download and install You can r
66. Editor nDl Editor C IronPython Console Plug in Itis a console where the IronPython commands and the CubeSuite enhanced featui C Pin Configurator Plug in Plug in to define the device pin configuration C Program Analyzer Plug in Plug in to analyze program C Stack Usage Tracer Utility to display and adjust stack usage of each functions 2 C Tool Interface Protocol TIP Plug in Plug in that acts as an interface between tools TIP C Update Manager Plug in Plug in to communicate with CubeSuite Update Manager Function buttons The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open From the Tool menu select Plug in Setting R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 239 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Description of each area 1 Tab selection area By selecting a tab the plug ins displayed in the plug in list area are switched This dialog box has the following tabs Basic Function tab Additional Function tab 2 Plug in list area Select the plug ins read when this product is started with check boxes For details of displayed items setting method see the description of each tab Function buttons Button Function OK Applies all setting and closes this dialog box Cancel Cancels the designated condition and closes the dialog box Help Displa
67. Emly Applicaton OCAX Project name l ProjectB Place D work H EW RxConvertT est ProjectB v Browse Backup the project composition after before conversion Cancel Help After setting the microcontroller to be used for the conversion target project and project type name and place of creation settings click the OK button Cautions 1 ton Confirm that the microcontroller of each project is selected before clicking the OK but R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Feb 01 2013 2tENESAS Page 60 of 491 CubeSuite V2 00 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 The CPU option and section start option are not changed in accordance with the selected device If the device that differs from the HEW project is selected confirm change the CPU option and section start option after conversion Remarks 1 When only one project exists in a HEW project a subproject is not displayed 2 Select session is displayed only when multiple sessions exist in a project 3 If you select Backup the project composition files after conversion immediately after the con version the project source files and complete project are packed up and saved 4 See Project Convert Setting dialog box for details about each setting item c Convert the CubeSuite project The HEW project is converted to the CubeSuite project When opening from a HEW workspace file the project is converted in accordance with the following rules The HEW wo
68. Function tab 241 PM project 67 Print Preview window 196 Progress Status dialog box 204 Project tab 155 project 37 Project Convert Setting dialog box 133 Project Tree panel 138 Property panel 150 Build Options tab 160 Microcontroller Information tab 158 Project tab 155 Subproject tab 156 Python Console panel 291 Q Quick Find tab 180 Quick Replace tab 187 R Rapid build 328 Rearrange Commands dialog box 256 Rebuild 325 Rename Toolbar dialog box 253 Replace in Files tab 190 Restore hidden updates page 103 S Save As dialog box 280 Save Option Setting File dialog box 285 Save Project As dialog box 278 Save Settings dialog box 194 save the project file 76 Select External Text Editor dialog box 289 Select Program dialog box 287 Select Script File dialog box 293 Select updates page 96 Source Convert Setting dialog box 131 Start panel 123 Subproject tab 156 subproject 39 T tag jump 165 Task Tray 109 Text Edit dialog box 173 Toolbars tab 247 U Update in progress dialog box 106 Update Manager Options dialog box 107 User Setting dialog box 245 R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Feb 01 2013 2tENESAS Page 486 of 491 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX H INDEX Commands tab 249 Toolbars tab 247 Vv Version
69. Hex file hex CC RX CA850 CX NC30 Localised sup port Hex file Hex file hex hxb hxf CA78KOR CA78KO Hex file S record file mot CC RX NC30 Localised support S record file Jump table file jmp CC RX Jump table file Symbol address file fsy CC RX Symbol address file Text file txt Text format Note This file type is only shown for microcontrollers with a memory bank c When the target project type is a debug dedicated project All files All formats Project File mtpj Project file Project File for CubeSuite cspj Project file for CubeSuite Workspace File for HEW hws Workspace file for HEW Project File for HEW hwp Project file for HEW Workspace File for PM prw Workspace file for PM Project File for PM prj Project file for PM C source file c C language source file Header file h inc Header file Assemble file asm s Assembler source file Text file txt Text format Function buttons Button Function When this dialog box is opened by Open File from the File menu Opens the specified file When this dialog box is opened by Open with Encoding from the File menu Opens the Encoding dialog box Cancel Closes this dialog box R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Feb 01 2013 2tENESAS Page 273 of
70. Integrated Development Environment User s Manual Build 2 When running a build of the active project Select the debug dedicated project and then select Build active project from the context menu R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 324 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX F USING AN EXTERNAL BUILD TOOL Figure F 29 Build active project Item g E SubProject_DebugOnly aa J UPD703131A Micr re E Build SubProject_DebugOnly E A Pin Configurator Desi t Rebuild SubProject_DebugOnly A None Build Tool p Clean SubProject_DebugOnly 850 Simulator Debug a Fie Open Folder with Explorer lt E ray Download files Add 3 Re gA Remove form Project t Shift Del Uy aj Rename F2 Property L F 5 2 Run a rebuild The command specified with the Commands executed in the project cleaning property in the Build category in the Property panel is executed see 2 Setting the command when running a clean and then the command specified with the Commands executed in the project building property in the category same as above is executed see 1 Setting the command when running a build This allows you to run a build of all build target files The commands being specified in the entire project main project and subprojects or active project see F 4 3 Set the target project for a build can be executed Remark If there are files being edited with the Editor panel when runn
71. Project components are displayed in tree view with the following given node When each component the node or file is selected the detailed information property is displayed in the Property panel You can change the settings Node Explanation Project name Project The project s name Subsequently called Project node Microcontroller name Microcontroller The microcontroller used in the project Hereafter referred to as Microcontroller node Design Tool name Design Tool The design tool pin configurator code generator etc Hereafter referred to as Design Tool node used Note that Code Generator Design Tool node is not shown when the project type is a debug dedicated project Build tool name Build tool The build tool compiler assembler etc used Hereafter referred to as Build Tool node When the project type is a debug dedicated project None is shown as build tool name Debug tool name Debug tool The debug tool in circuit emulator simulator etc used Hereafter referred to as Debug Tool node Program Analyzer Analyze Tool The analyze tool used Hereafter referred to as Analyze Tool node Note that this node is not shown when the project type is a debug dedicated project File Files registered to the project are displayed directly below Hereafter referred to as File node the File node Download files This is a node for adding download files to the project Here
72. Punctuation Close Punctuation Initial quote Punctuation Final quote Punctuation Other Symbol Math Symbol Currency Symbol Modifier Symbol Other Separator Space Separator Line R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 303 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX E REGULAR EXPRESSIONS SYNTAX Unicode General Categories Description Separator Paragraph Other Control Other Format Other Surrogate Other Private Use Other Not Assigned Additional special categories are supported that represent a set of Unicode character categories as shown in the fol lowing table Table E 4 List of Set of Unicode Character Categories Category Description All control characters Cc Cf Cs Co and Cn All letters Lu LI Lt Lm and Lo All diacritic marks Mm Mc and Me N All numbers Nd NI and No All punctuation Pc Pd Ps Pe Pi Pf and Po All symbols Sm Sc Sk and So All separators Zs Zl and Zp E 4 Quantifiers Quantifiers add optional quantity data to a regular expression A quantifier expression applies to the character group or character class that immediately precedes it The following table describes the metacharacters that affect matching quantity Table E 5 List of Quantifiers Quantifier Description Specifies zero or more matches for example w or abc Same as 0
73. R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 475 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX G Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS debugger Memory NoVerify This property switches the write time verification setting Except simulator Specification format debugger Memory NoVerify noverify Setting s noverify Set whether to verify during writes True Verify during writes False Do not verify during writes Reference Set value Caution If a PM workspace is converted to a CubeSuite project then there will be no debugging tool in the main project For this reason None will be returned if the main project is the active project Detailed description This property switches the write time verification setting Example of use gt gt gt print debugger Memory NoVerify False gt gt gt debugger Memory NoVerify True gt gt gt print debugger Memory NoVerify True gt gt gt R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 476 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX G Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS debugger Opiton Coverage debugger Option OpenBreak debugger Option ReuseCoverageData debugger Option Timer debugger Option Trace debugger Option UseTraceData This property sets or reference the options of the debug tool Specification format debugger Opiton Coverage coverage debugger Option OpenBreak openBreak debugger Option ReuseCoverageData reuse
74. RIGO0V4 RI600PX Project for RIGOOPX RI850V4 Project for RI850V4 RI850MP Project for RI850MP RI78V4 Project for RI78V4 Detailed description This property refers the kind of the active project Example of use gt gt gt print project Kind Application gt gt gt R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 467 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX G Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS project Name This property refers the active project file name without path Specification format project Name Setting s None Reference Active project file name without path Detailed description This property refers the active project file name without path Example of use gt gt gt print project Name test mtpj R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 468 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX G Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS project Nickname This property refers the nickname of the microcontroller of the active project Specification format project Nickname Setting s None Reference Nickname of the microcontroller of the active project Detailed description This property refers the nickname of the microcontroller of the active project Example of use gt gt gt print project Nickname RL78 G13 ROM 64KB R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 469 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2
75. SP1 Windows XP SP3 Server 2003 SP2 2 0 50727 3634 Application Information Package Version VIREN NH KK KEK REKX Version VR RELKELRK KH REX REX a 4 Assembly Version HORKAREL HK Sales Area HRRRRRRKK Product License HERERRRKK Execution Place C Program Files Renesas Electronics CubeSuite Build Tool Plug in Information 850 Build tool C4850 Plug in Version VLMELKK RE KK REX KER Assembly Version HNH KWN DLL File Name Function buttons _ The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Edit menu Detail Version Information dialog box dedicated items Context menu Function buttons How to open From the Help menu select Detail Verison Information Click the Detail Verison Information button in the Message dialog box R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 261 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Description of each area 1 Information text area Show the detail version information of this product and the present project information The necessary information is as follows Information Contents System Information OS Version Language NET Framework Version Windows information Application Information Package Version Version Assembly Version Sales AreaNote 1 Product License Additional I
76. The file is added directly below this node The added file can be opened with the application corresponds to the file extension Add New Category Adds a new Category node directly below this node This allows the category name to be changed Up to 200 characters can be specified The default category name is New category You can also add a Category node with the same name as the existing Category node This menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation and when categories are nested 20 levels Open Folder with Explorer Opens a shortcut to the folder that has been set for the selected category in the Explorer This menu item will be invalid if a shortcut to the folder has not been made Windows Explorer Menu Shows the Windows Explorer menu for a shortcut to the folder that has been set for the selected category This menu item will be invalid if a shortcut to the folder has not been made Remove from Project Removes the selected Category node from the project Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Copy Copies the selected Category node to the clipboard When the category name is in editing the characters of the selection are copied to the clipboard Inserts the contents of the clipboard directly below this node However this menu is disabled when the contents of the clipboard exist in the same project When the categor
77. This function displays the current CPU status Example of use gt gt gt debugger GetCpuStatus Stop gt gt gt R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 392 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX G Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS debugger GeitleStatus This function displays the current IE status Specification format debugger GetIeStatus Argument s None Return value Current IE status string IE Status Description Break Break in effect Coverage Coverage running Timer Timer running Tracer Trace running Step Step executing Run User program running RunOrStep User program running or step executing Caution If a PM workspace is converted to a CubeSuite project then there will be no debugging tool in the main project For this reason None will be returned if the main project is the active project In addition None will be returned before the debugging tool is connected Detailed description This function displays the current IE status Example of use gt gt gt debugger GetIeStatus Run R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 393 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX G Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS debugger GetPC This function displays the PC value Specification format debugger GetPC Argumeni s None Return value PC value numeric value Detailed descript
78. This function downloads a hex file in within 64 KB format Specification format debugger Download Hex64Kb fileName offset 0 append False flashErase False Argumeni s Argument Description fileName Specify a download file offset Specify an offset default 0 append Specify whether to make an additional download True Perform additional download False Perform overwrite download default flashErase Specify whether to initialize a flash memory before download True Initialize a flash memory before download False Do not initialize a flash memory before download default Caution If two or more parameters are specified then three parameters must be specified It is not possible to specify only fileName and offset Return value If a binary file was downloaded successfully True If there was an error when downloading a binary file False Detailed description When using the memory bank this function downloads hex files in within 64 KB format Example of use gt gt gt debugger Download Hex64Kb C test testModule hex True gt gt gt R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 381 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX G Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS debugger Download HexBank This function downloads a hex file in memory bank format Specification format debugger Download HexBank fileName offset 0 append False flashErase Fals
79. True If a build was completed successfully True If a build failed or was canceled False When waitBuild is set to False If a build successfully started execution True If a build failed to start execution False Detailed description This function runs a build of a project If a subproject is added to the project a build of the subproject is run If rebuild is set to True then a rebuild of a project is run If waitBuild is set to False then a prompt is returned without waiting to complete a build Regardless of whether a build is successful the build BuildCompleted event is issued when a build completes Example of use gt gt gt build All True gt gt gt R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 356 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX G Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS build ChangeBuildMode This function changes the build mode Specification format build ChangeBuildMode buildmode Argumeni s buildmode Specify the build mode to be changed to with a string Return value If the build mode was changed successfully True If there was an error when changing the build mode False Detailed description This function changes the build modes of the main project and subprojects to the build mode specified in build mode If buildmode does not exist in the project a new build mode is created based on DefaultBuild and then the build mode is changed
80. Tuesday February 22 2011 1 19 43 PM 2 _ allMessages Rapid Build The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area File menu Output panel dedicated items Edit menu Output panel dedicated items Context menu How to open From the View menu select Output Description of each area 1 Message area Displays messages and the search results output from each tool The All Messages tab consolidates and displays all output messages The message colors differ as follows depends on the type of the output message the character color background color is set in General Font and Color category in Option dialog box Normal message Character color Information on something Background color R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 164 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Message type Example Default Description Character color Blue Warning Warning for the operation Normal color Background color Error message Character color Red AaBbCc Fatal error or operation disabled because of an error in operation Background color Light gray This area has the following functions a Tag jump When the output message is double clicked or the Enter key is pressed with the caret over the message Editor panel appears and the destination line number of the file is displaye
81. When the dialog box is opened from the Project menu CubeSuite High performance Embedded Workshop PM project or the Open Existing CubeSuite High perfor mance Embedded Workshop PM Project area on the Start panel Opens the Project Convert Setting dialog box When the dialog box is opened from the Create Project dialog box Specifies the selected project file to Project to be passed in the caller dialog box R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 269 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 270 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Open File dialog box This dialog box is used to open a file Figure A 75 Open File Dialog Box Open File 1 Look in sample N DefaultBuild E sample mtpj My Recent Documents omputer 3 2 gt File name i a 4 MN k iles of type Project File mtpi Function buttons The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open From the File menu select Open File or Open with Encoding Description of each area 1 Look in area Select the folder that the file you want to open exists When you first open this dialog box the folder is set to C Documents and Settings user name My Documents The second and subsequent times this de
82. a nested collapsed section Toggle All Outlining Toggles the collapsed state of all outlining nodes setting them all to the same expanded or collapsed state If there is a mixture of collapsed and expanded nodes all nodes will be expanded Stop Outlining Stops code outlining and remove all outlining information from source files Start Automatic Outlining Starts automatic code outlining and automatically displayed in supported source files Advanced Displays a cascading menu for performing an advanced operation for the Editor panel Increase Line Indent Increases the indentation of the current cursor line by one tab Decrease Line Indent Decreases the indentation of the current cursor line by one tab Uncomment Lines Removes the first set of line comment delimiters from the start of the current cur sor line appropriate to the current language e g C This operation will only be available when the language of the current source file has line comment delimiters specified e g C Comment Lines Places line comment delimiters at the start of the current cursor line appropriate to the current language e g C This operation will only be available when the language of the current source file has line comment delimiters specified e g C Convert Tabs to Spaces Converts all tabs on the current cursor line into spaces Convert Spaces to Tabs Converts each set of con
83. a project are saved If other project is not opened the setting of save is ignored Example of use gt gt gt project Open r C test test mtpj True gt gt gt R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 354 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX G Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS G3 4 CubeSuite Python function for build tool Below is a list of CubeSuite Python functions for the build tool Table G 4 CubeSuite Python Function For build Tool Function Name Function Description build All This function runs a build build ChangeBuildMode This function changes the build mode build Clean This function runs a clean build File This function runs a build of a specified file build Update This function updates the dependencies for the build tool R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 355 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX G Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS This function runs a build Specification format build All rebuild False waitBuild True Argumeni s Argument Description rebuild Specify whether to run a rebuild of a project True Run a rebuild of a project False Run a build of a project default waitBuild Specify whether to wait until completing a build True Wait until completing a build default False Return a prompt without waiting to complete a build Return value When waitBuild is set to
84. and Replace Displays the Find In Files result with the Find and Replace dialog box All Messages Shows all the messages above by order of output Tab is not automatically switched when a new message is output on the non selected tab If this is the case is added to the tab informing a new message is output R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Feb 01 2013 7tENESAS Page 165 of 491 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE File menu Output panel dedicated items The following items are exclusive for File menu in the Output panel other items are common to all the panels Output Save tab name Saves the contents on the currently selecting tab in the previously saved text file txt see c Save of log When this menu is selected for the first time after launching the program the operation is equivalent to when selecting Save tab name As Note that this operation is invalid while building Save Output tab name As Opens the Save As dialog box to save the contents on the currently selecting tab in the designated text file txt see c Save of log Note that this operation is invalid while user program is executed Edit menu Output panel dedicated items The following items are exclusive to Edit menu in the Output panel other items are all invalid Copy Copies the selected characters to the clip board Select All Selects all the messages dis
85. and file name combined can be specified in the File name area and File loca tion area When the input violates any restriction the following messages will be shown on the File name area in the tooltip Message Description The file name including the path is too long Make it within 259 characters The file name with the path is more than 259 characters The specified path contains a folder that does not exist The path contains a folder that does not exist The file name or path name is invalid The following characters cannot be used lt gt Function buttons The file name with the invalid path is designated The following characters cannot be used for the file name and folder name lt gt Button Function OK Creates the file with the entered file name adds it to the project and opens with the Editor panel And then closes this dialog box Cancel Does not create a file and closes this dialog box Help Displays the help of this dialog box R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 170 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Add Folder and File dialog box This dialog box is used to add existing files and folder hierarchies to the project The folder is added as a category Figure A 29 Add Folder and File Dialog Box Add Folder and File File type Two or more selections C source file
86. and then select Open from the context menu Select a file and then press the Enter key The files that can be opened with the Editor panel are shown below Preprocessor expanded output file i NC30 Localised support C source file c C source file cpp cc cp CC RX Header file h inc Header file hpp CC RX Assembler source file src CC RX Assembler source file s CC RX CA850 CX Assembler source file asm CX CA78KOR CA78K0 Assembler source file a30 NC30 Localised support Link directive file dir dr CA850 CX CA78KOR CA78KO Link order specification file mtls Section file sf CA850 Symbol information file sfg CX Variable and function information file vfi CA78KOR Variable information file vfi CA78KO Function information file fin CA78KO Map file map Map file lbp CC RX NC30 Localised support Symbol table file sym CA78KOR CA78K0 Hex file hex Hex file hxb hxf CA78KOR CA78K0 Assemble list file Ist CC RX NC30 Localised support S record file mot CC RX NC30 Localised support Jump table file jmp CC RX Symbol address file fsy CC RX Cross reference file cref CC RX NC30 Localised support Link subcommand file clnk CC RX NC30 Localised support Python script file py Text file txt Rema
87. are automatically added to the project tree default In a debug dedicated project when downloading a load module file into the debug tool source files are not automatically added to the project tree Caution This function is only valid when a load module file has been added to the Download files node of the project tree When a load module file has been added in the Download File Settings tab on the Property panel of the debug tool source files are not added to the project tree 8 Buttons Initialize Settings Returns all currently displayed setting to their default values Function buttons Button Function Initialize All Settings Restores all settings on this dialog box to their default values Note however that newly added items in the General External Tools category will not be removed OK Applies all setting and closes this dialog box Cancel Ignores the setting and closes this dialog box Apply Applies all setting does not close this dialog box Help Displays the help of this dialog box R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 228 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE General Python Console category Use this category to configure general setting relating to the Python console Figure A 55 Option Dialog Box General Python Console Category 1 General E Startup and Exit General Python Console E Disp
88. automatically diverted except for a debug dedicated project 2 When the build tool for the project to be created does not support a node of the source project the node will be displayed as a normal Category node on the project tree e g Startup node or Down load files node etc Function buttons Button Function Create Creates a project according to the designated condition and closes the dialog box When the Pass the file composition of an existing project to the new project check box is checked creates a project by diverting the file composition of the project main or sub project designated in Project to be passed If the build tool of the source project is CA850 and the build tool of the project to create is CX opens the Source Convert Setting dialog box CX to select whether to convert the source files and the like Cancels the designated condition and closes the dialog box Displays the help of this dialog box R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 stENESAS Page 130 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Source Convert Setting dialog box CX This dialog box configures the composition files of the source project the source files and the like to convert them for the build tool of the project to be created Caution This dialog box is only displayed if the build tool of the source project is CA850 and that of the project to be created is CX Figure A 17 Source Conve
89. be specified Option Description psAscript file name This is the Python Console plugin option After loading the project file in CubeSuite run the code in script file name If an unnecessary parameter is specified and the script file cannot be loaded then an error will be displayed and the script file will not be executed A sample script file is shown below debugger Connect debugger Download LoadModule r C project test DefaultBuild test out debugger Register GetValue pc breakpoint BreakCondition breakpoint Address func debugger Breakpoint Set breakpoint debugger Go GoOption WaitBreak debugger Register GetValue pc R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 90 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE This section describes the windows panels and dialog boxes related to installation updates license settings and starting CubeSuite A 1 Description Below is a list of the windows panels and dialog boxes related to installation updates license settings and starting CubeSuite Table A 1 Window Panel Dialog Box List Window Panel Dialog Box Name Function Description CubeSuite Update Manager window This window displays the status of and controls the update function Checking for Updates dialog box This dialog box appears while the application is checking for updates Upda
90. box Cancel Ignores the setting and closes this dialog box Apply Applies all setting does not close this dialog box Help Displays the help of this dialog box R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 211 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE General Display category Use this category to configure general settings relating to program messages Figure A 48 Option Dialog Box General Display Category E I General k ET Startup and Exit General Display G G Extemal Text Editor Puen n OA Fort and Cole oeae aeaa ia Warring and enor 2 SHS 00 Toolbar display type leon only 3 Build Debug taal Python Console Y Show function key bar 4 G Text Editor PY Show window contents while resizing 5 Update others gt Tab width 6 z j Select the file opened with text editor in project tree 7 C Show overlay icons of Windows Explorer in project tree 8 gt Location of a close button for a splitted panel Right edge of the tab area You need to restart for the changes to take effect o H Function buttons Initialize All Settings Cancel Apply Help The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open From the Tool menu select Options Description of each area 1 Message dialog box
91. box Tutorial Opens the tutorial for this product Browse Renesas Electronics Opens our microcontroller website in the web browser Microcontrollers Web Detail Version Information Shows the Detail Version Information dialog box Check for Updates Opens the CubeSuite Update Manager window and begin checking for updates About Product name Opens the Version Information dialog box 2 Toolbar The toolbar shows common command buttons See the CubeSuite Integrated Development Environment User s Manual Build CubeSuite Integrated Development Environment User s Manual Debug and CubeSuite Integrated Development Environment User s Manual Analysis for buttons relating to building debugging and analysis Buttons on the toolbar can be customized in User Setting dialog box You can also create a new toolbar in the same dialog box R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 120 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE a Start amp Save In the Start amp Save the button group concerning the start button the file operation and the edit is displayed Opens the Siart panel B Opens the Open File dialog box for opening files and projects Saves the file that is currently in focus Saves all files being updated in the Editor panel and the project Cuts the selection and copy it into the clipboard Copies the selection into the clipboard
92. build 324 F 5 2 Runarebuild 325 F 5 3 Runaclean 326 F 5 4 Runa rapid build 328 F 5 5 Runa batch build 329 F 5 6 Stop running a build 330 F 5 7 Save the build results to a file 330 APPENDIX G Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS 331 G 1 Overview 331 G 2 Related File 331 G 3 CubeSuite Python Function Class Property Event 332 G 3 1 CubeSuite Python function for basic operation 333 G 3 2 CubeSuite Python function common 341 G 3 3 CubeSuite Python function for project 343 G 3 4 CubeSuite Python function for build tool 355 G 3 5 CubeSuite Python function for debug tool 361 G 3 6 CubeSuite Python class 438 G 3 7 CubeSuite Python property common 455 G 3 8 CubeSuite Python property for project 464 G 3 9 CubeSuite Python property for build tool 471 G 3 10 CubeSuite Python property for debug tool 474 G 3 11 CubeSuite Python event 481 G 4 Cautions for Python Console 484 APPENDIX H INDEX 485 CubeSuite V2 00 00 CHAPTER 1 GENERAL CHAPTER 1 GENERAL This chapter describes the role of the CubeSuite integrated development environment for developing applications and systems for the microcontrollers RX V850 R8C Localised support RL78 78KOR and 78K0 and provides an outline of its features Remark Localised support Localised support refers to specific regions support only CubeSuite for R8C including NC30
93. debugger Download Coverage C test testModule csrcv True gt gt gt R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 379 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX G Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS debugger Download Hex This function downloads a hex file Specification format debugger Download Hex fileName offset 0 append False flashErase False Argumeni s Argument Description fileName Specify a download file offset Specify an offset default 0 append Specify whether to make an additional download True Perform additional download False Perform overwrite download default flashErase Specify whether to initialize a flash memory before download True Initialize a flash memory before download False Do not initialize a flash memory before download default Caution If two or more parameters are specified then three parameters must be specified It is not possible to specify only fileName and offset Return value If a binary file was downloaded successfully True If there was an error when downloading a binary file False Detailed description This function downloads data in hex format Example of use gt gt gt debugger Download Hex C test testModule hex True gt gt gt R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 380 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX G Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS debugger Download Hex64Kb
94. default Clicking on the same header again sorts the entries in the reverse order Function buttons Button Function Closes this dialog box and runs builds of the selected projects in the respective build modes The execution result of the builds is displayed on the Output panel After the builds are complete the build mode configuration restores to the one before this dialog box was opened If any project is not selected this button will be disabled Rebuild Closes this dialog box and runs rebuilds of the selected projects in the respective build modes The execution result of the rebuilds is displayed on the Output panel After the rebuilds are complete the build mode configuration restores to the one before this dialog box was opened If any project is not selected this button will be disabled Closes this dialog box and deletes the files which are built in the respective build modes set for the selected projects The execution result of the cleans is displayed on the Output panel After the cleans are complete the build mode configuration restores to the one before this dialog box was opened If any project is not selected this button will be disabled Closes this dialog box Displays the help of this dialog box R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 203 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Progress Status dialog box This dialog box is used to dis
95. designated application Open Folder with Explorer Opens the folder that contains the selected file with Explorer Windows Explorer Menu Displays the Windows Explorer menu corresponding to the selected file Add Shows the cascading menu to add files and Category nodes to the project Add File Opens the Add Existing File dialog box to add the selected file to the project The file is added to the same level as the selected file Add New File Opens the Add File dialog box to create a file with the selected file type and add to the file to the project The file is added to the same level as the selected file The added file can be opened with the application corresponds to the file extension Add New Category Adds a new Category node at the same level as the selected file You can rename the category Up to 200 characters can be specified The default category name is New category You can also add a Category node with the same name as the existing Category node This menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation and when categories are nested 20 levels Remove from Project Removes the selected file from the project The file itself is not deleted from the file system Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Feb 01 2013 7tENESAS Page 14
96. dialog box is opened from the Editor panel Figure A 34 Find and Replace Dialog Box Find and Replace 1 Quick Find Findin Files Quick Replace Replace in Files Search text Search location Current document main c Function butions The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open From the Edit menu select Find From the Edit menu select Replace Description of each area 1 Tab selection area Find replace is switched when a tab is selected This dialog box has the following tabs Quick Find tab Find in Files tab Quick Replace tab Replace in Files tab 2 Search replace criteria setting area Detailed criteria for searching replacing is set Please see the description of the relevant tabs for details of the contents how to set Function buttons Buttons for execute find replace Please see the description of the relevant buttons for details R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 179 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Quick Find tab This tab finds the designated characters and moves the caret to the searched position with the position being selected Remarks 1 This tab will be disabled if you call the Find and Replace dialog box from a panel other than the Output panel or Editor panel 2 The gt button in Sear
97. display level Select the Message dialog box display level verbosity from the following drop down list Regardless of this setting all messages are displayed in the Output panel Information warning and error Displays all messages in a Message dialog box Warning and error Displays warning and error messages in a Message dialog box default Error only Only displays error messages in a Message dialog box Fatal error only Only displays fatal error messages in a Message dialog box R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 212 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 2 Toolbar display type Use this area to select the format in which to display toolbars on each panel via the following drop down list Icon only Displays icons only default Icon and label Displays both icons and labels text 3 Show function key commands Displays the Function Key bar in the Main window default Fl Does not display the Function Key bar in the Main window 4 Show window contents while resizing Resizes the window while displaying areas that were not visible before Fl Resizes the window without displaying areas that were not visible before default 5 Tab width Specify the number of tab columns Either enter a number between 1 and 16 directly via the keyboard or specify a number via the buttons The default is 8 6 Select the file opened with tex
98. displays a list of valid and registered licenses 3 License Information area When a license is selected in the License area this area displays details about the selected license R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 110 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Function buttons Button Function Add Adds the entered license Remove Deletes the selected license Close Closes the License Manager R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 111 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE This is the start up window that opens when CubeSuite is launched In this window you can control the user program execution and open panels Figure A 14 Main Window CubeSuite Start 1 _ Eie Edt view Project Buld Debug Tool Window Help 2 Sse 0 Be XB oo Ae Aw RBA DD 1 Project Tree ax Start 2a Learn About CubeSuite We recommend reading the tutorial to find out what can be done in CubeSuite The tutorial contains the information on how to effectively use CubeSuite Create New Project A new project can be created A new project can also be created by reusing the file configuration registered to an existing project Open Existing Project Loads the project of CubeSuite Can also be opened directly from the following link Recent Project Nothing Fa rite Projec Nothing Open Existing CubeSuite H
99. fee VE50ESAW3 Product Name uPD70F 3746 PD70F 374311 44pi Internal ROM size KBytes 1024 s rate iin j Hid Intemal RAM size Bytes 61440 PPAF in E F uPD70F3746 144pin Se VE50ES iy V850ES HF3 i V850ES HG3 i V850ES HI3 cH he VS50ESAIG3H He V850ES AIG3 U He V850ESIH3 H cH he V850ES JH3 U cH VB50ESAIC3 H a VORNES HEH E E7 amp P After selecting the new microcontroller click the OK button R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 74 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Remark The OK button becomes valid when the selected microcontroller differs from the current microcontrol ler Figure 2 79 Change Microcontroller Dialog Box After Selecting New Microcontroller Change Microcontroller Change microcontroller to a VE50ES G3 Product Name uPD 70F 3742 PD 7OF3739 1 O0pi Internal ROM size KBytes 1024 s pei i Internal RAM size Bytes 61440 uPD70F3742 100pin I cH he VB50ES HES cH he V850ES HF3 He V850ES HG3 Hh VB50ES HJ3 He V850ESAIG3H He VS50ES AIG3 U cH he V850ESAH3 H cH he V850ES H3 U oe VORNES IC 3 Change the microcontroller The current microcontroller is changed to the selected microcontroller Remarks 1 The microcontroller can only be changed to another from the same family RX V850 R8C Localised support RL78 78KOR and 78K0 that is compatible with the same build tools 2 When the microcontroller is changed it mus
100. files See CubeSuite Integrated Development Environment User s Manual Coding for details about this panel Figure A 25 Editor Panel 0 Be Columns 10 12 13 Abstract 14 This function implements main function 15 16 Parameters 17 None 18 19 Returns 20 M KN n S 23 24 void main void 25 E 26 E Start user code Do not edit comment generated here 27 28 int local_a local_b local_c 29 int result 30 unsigned long i 31 29 lt gt R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 163 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Output panel The message that is output from the build tool debug tool each plug in or the result of the Find In Files with the Find and Replace dialog box is displayed Messages are shown individually on the tab categorized by the output tool The All Messages tab consolidates and displays all output messages Remark This panel can be zoomed in and out by 100 in the tool bar or by moving the mouse wheel forward or backward while holding down the Ctrl key Figure A 26 Output Panel Start build all Tuesday February 22 2011 1 19 43 PM Start build sample DefaultBuild gt cxref exe gt n src main c gt DefaultBuild sample out 1 gt DefaultBuild sample hex Build ended Error 0 Warning 0 Ended Success l1 Projects Failed 0 Projects
101. in the Trace panel IECUBE IECUBE2 Simu lator R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Feb 01 2013 Font color White Background color LightGray 2tENESAS Locations that the value have been got from the debug tool is not correct in the Memory panel Page 218 of 491 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Example Description Coverage 100 AaBbCe Font color Default color The line for which code coverage is at 100 is displayed in this color in the Edi tor panel and Disassemble panel Background color LightGreen Coverage 1 Font color Default color The line for which code coverage is at 1 99 to 99 is displayed in this color in the Background color LightPink eka sana Editor panel and Disassemble panel Coverage 0 Font color Default color The line for which code coverage is at 0 not yet executed is displayed in this color in the Editor panel and Disassem ble panel Background color LightGray Invalid Font color Gray Non memory mapped areas in the Mem ory panel and filenames in the Project Tree panel that do not actually exist are displayed in this color Background color Default color Note The Default text and background colors depend on the Windows settings of the host computer Here we use the Windows defaults which are black text and white background b Use default color Displays items selected via the Setting plac
102. install Download only Option Review update history Restore hidden updates Change settings Help Exit Vax xx wx 2000 R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Feb 01 2013 Legend Download F lhnstal Successful Suspended Failed success 1 E CubeSuite Vx xx xx suspended 1 ESCubeSuite Update Manager Vx xx xx MO0120001 Installation is suspended because CubeSuite Update Manager is running It will be resumed next time you start the tool Failed 1 E CubeSuite Utilities Vx xx xx E0120004 Installation was aborted xox Renesas Electronics Corporation Click the Exit to complete updating 2tENESAS Page 27 of 491 CubeSuite V2 00 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Remarks 1 The icons below are displayed in the head of update titles Updates are downloaded Updates are installed 2 The results of the download and or installation are displayed via Displays number of successful updates and update titles Displays number of canceled updates update titles and messages Displays number of failed updates update titles and messages 2 4 2 The auto update feature This section describes the auto update The auto update feature performs some of the tasks of the manual update feature automatically when a CubeSuite project is opened 1 Auto checking function This function performs the check for updates when a CubeSuite project is opened This function is executed when in the O
103. is always disabled Rename You can rename the selected file The actual file is also renamed When the selected file is added to other project that file name is also changed Change Extension Opens a message dialog box to confirm whether to change the file extension Clicking on the Yes button in the dialog box will open the Character String Input dia log box in which the extension of the selected file can be changed When multiple files are selected they are changed at one time Note that this menu item is disabled if the name of the selected file cannot be changed or the file cannot be removed from the project or the build tool is in operation Property Displays the selected file s property on the Property panel 8 When a file excluding a Python cosole script file is selected Only menu items that are displayed when a file for a debug dedicated project see APPENDIX F USING AN EXTERNAL BUILD TOOL is selected are shown here See the CubeSuite Integrated Development Environment User s Manual Build for the information about a file for a project other than a debug dedicated project Open Open with Internal Editor Open with Selected Application Opens the selected file with the application corresponds to the file extension see f Running the editor Opens the selected file with the Editor panel Opens the Open with Program dialog box to open the selected file with the
104. is shipped and supported to the following regions only Renesas Electronics Hong Kong Limited Renesas Electronics China Co Ltd Renesas Electronics Shanghai Co Ltd 1 1 Introduction CubeSuite is an integrated development environment IDE Note for the microcontrollers By integrating the necessary tools for each development phase it is possible to perform all phases in software develop ment using just this product without the need to use many different tools separately Emphasis is placed on making the tools work together improving development efficiency in many different situations As an example the output from the design phase is automatically reflected in the debug phase CubeSuite also has an update feature to automatically obtain this product upgrades via the network making it simple to maintain the environment required for software development free downloadable tools excluded Note An integrated development environment is a development environment integrating the necessary tools for all phases of software development including preparation design implementation and debugging into a single platform framework Remark In addition to CubeSuite emulators and on chip debugging emulators emulators for microcontrollers with on chip debugging facilities built in are provided as well as a real time OS package for developing sys tems using real time OS making a wide range of development possible R20UT2444EJ
105. le een ek eet kf ja 3 gt Select session SessionRX600_E1_E20_SYSTEM New project 4 gt Kind of project Empty Application CC RX Project name Project Place D work HEW RXConvertTest Project v 5 gt y Backup the project composition after before conversion Function buttons Cancel Help The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open From the Project menu select Open Project to open the Open Project dialog box And then select a CubeSuite HEW PM project or workspace and click the Open button Open Existing CubeSuite High performance Embedded Workshop PM Project area on the Start panel click the GO button to open the Open Project dialog box And then select a CubeSuite HEW PM project or workspace and click the Open button R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 133 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Description of each area 1 Project This area displays the conversion target project configuration tree Select the project for carrying out the conver sion settings Description node When you make the selection the area on the right shows a summary of operations in this dialog box Main project node Indicates that this is the main project for the conversion target project When selected the area on the right shows the main project setting items
106. may take a few minutes to a few dozen minutes 2 Place D Documents and Settings xxxxxx My Documents 3 Top folder of pack target _D work sample Function buton The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open On the Project Tree panel select the Project node and then select Save Project and Development Tools as Pack age from the context menu Description of each area 1 Pack type selection area Select the pack type Pack project and tools Packs the project and this product default Pack project only Packs the project only 2 Place area Specify the location in which to save the project and this product Enter the absolute path directly or click the Browse button and select the location via the Browse For Folder dialog box R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 205 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE a Button Browse Browse For Folder dialog box appears When a folder is selected the path is shown in the text box Remarks 1 Up to 247 characters can be entered in Place area When the input violates any restriction the following messages are shown Message Description The folder name including the path is too long Make it within 247 characters The folder name is more than 247 characters The folder name is invali
107. of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 10 Acceletate the Startup Time of CubeSuite Use the following method to accelerate the startup time of CubeSuite Use rapid start Use acceleration utility 2 10 1 Use rapid start The rapid start function makes CubeSuite permanently resident to accelerate the startup time You can enable or disable the rapid start in the General Startup and Exit category in the Option dialog box with option Reduce startup time by enabling rapid startup Default enabled When the rapid start is enabled after login to Windows CubeSuite is in the standby state and the icon appears in the task tray Figure 2 94 Context Menu of Rapid Start Icon 1 Displaying the main window To release CubeSuite from the standby state and display the Main window select Start in the context menu of the icon or double click the icon Click the button on the Main window to return CubeSuite to the standby state an icon is displayed in the task tray during standby 2 Exiting CubeSuite To exit CubeSuite select Exit in the context menu R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 84 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 10 2 Use acceleration utility This product provides a utility to acceletate the startup time of CubeSuite when the rapid start is not used Run AccelerationUtility exe located in the same folder as the CubeSuite exec
108. of the temporary folder WinDir Replaces with the absolute path of the Windows system folder When python is described in the first line the contents from the second line to the last line are regarded as the script of the Python console and then executed when running a build The placeholders can be described in the scriput Default Commands executed in the project building 0 How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the but ton For the subproperty you can enter directly in the text box Restriction Up to 1023 characters Up to 64 commands can be specified Commands executed in Specify the commands to be executed when running a clean see F 5 3 Run a clean of the the project cleaning debug dedicated project The following placeholders are supported ActiveProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the active project folder ActiveProjectName Replaces with the active project name BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name MainProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the main project folder MainProjectName Replaces with the main project name MicomToolPath Replaces with the absolute path of the install folder of this product ProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the project folder ProjectName Replaces with the project name TempDir Replaces with the absolute path of the temporary folder WinDir Replaces with the abso
109. order to open an existing CubeSuite project file with cspj extension HEW workspace file with hws extension HEW project file with hwp exten sion PM workspace file with prw extension PM project file with prj extension 5 Open Sample Project area a Open Sample Project Load a sample project file with mtpj extension provided by CubeSuite Select the Microcontroller tab then select a sample project from the list Next click the GO button to open the Browse For Folder dialog box and specify a folder to which to copy the sample project After copying the sample to the specified folder the sample project is loaded 6 Button Minimizes the area Only the title text and minimize buttons will be shown Restores a minimized area R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 124 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Create Project dialog box This dialog box is used to create new projects or subprojects Caution A subproject cannot be added to another subproject Function buttons Figure A 16 Create Project Dialog Box Create Project Microcontroller Using microcontroller aa cn tre Update VE50ES M3 Product Name uPD 70F 3746 PD 7OF 374311 44pi Internal ROM size KBytes 1024 a ptim 4 i 4 pak Internal RAM size Bytes 61440 J wPD70F3745 1 44pin cH he VE50ES HES cH he VE50ES HF3 He VE850ES HG3 oo i ocorre aun
110. patents copyrights or other intellectual property rights of Renesas Electronics or others You should not alter modify copy or otherwise misappropriate any Renesas Electronics product whether in whole or in part Renesas Electronics assumes no responsibility for any losses incurred by you or third parties arising from such alteration modification copy or otherwise misappropriation of Renesas Electronics product Renesas Electronics products are classified according to the following two quality grades Standard and High Quality The recommended applications for each Renesas Electronics product depends on the product s quality grade as indicated below Standard Computers office equipment communications equipment test and measurement equipment audio and visual equipment home electronic appliances machine tools personal electronic equipment and industrial robots etc High Quality Transportation equipment automobiles trains ships etc traffic control systems anti disaster systems anti crime systems and safety equipment etc Renesas Electronics products are neither intended nor authorized for use in products or systems that may pose a direct threat to human life or bodily injury artificial life support devices or systems surgical implantations etc or may cause serious property damages nuclear reactor control systems military equipment etc You must check the quality grade of each Renesas Electro
111. path registered as a bookmark Caution If the Editor panel is closed bookmarks registered on the panel will be removed R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 176 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Function buttons Button Function Moves a caret to the selected position for the bookmark However this button is disabled when no bookmark is selected two or more bookmarks are selected or no bookmark is registered Removes a selected bookmark When two or more bookmarks are selected all of those selected are removed However this button is disabled when no bookmark is selected or no bookmark is registered Remove All Removes all the registered bookmarks This button is disabled when no bookmark is registered Moves a caret to the position of the bookmark next to the selected bookmark This button is disabled in the following cases A bookmark shown in the last line has been selected No bookmark is selected Two or more bookmarks are selected No bookmark is registered Only one bookmark is registered Previous Moves a caret to the position of the bookmark previous to the selected bookmark This button is disabled in the following cases A bookmark shown in the first line has been selected No bookmark is selected Two or more bookmarks are selected No bookmark is registered Only one bookmark is registered Displays the help for thi
112. rapid start is enabled Remark The plug ins other than the build tool debug tool and Editor panel are disabled by default the disabled plug ins are displayed in the Output panel Enable desired plug ins on the Additional Function tab in the Plug in Manager dialog box opened by selecting Tool menu gt gt Plug in Setting To reflect the new settings restart CubeSuite R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 36 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 6 Create a Project A project is managed by CubeSuite as the unit for application system development CubeSuite saves settings information used in the project such as the microcontroller build tool and source files to the project file mtpj and references it 1 Project tree organization and detailed settings The project s settings are made on the Project Tree panel Figure 2 42 Project Tree Panel Project Tree E E sample Project uPD70F3746 Microcontroller B A Pin Configurator Design Tool A Device Pin List a Device Top View Code Generator Design Tool E System External Bus w Port we INT amp Serial w A D w D A k Timer Watchdog Timer w RTC w Clock Output Buzzer Output w DMA w LVI A CA850 Build Tool S 850 Simulator Debug Tool Program Analyzer Analyze Tool S E File E all Build tool generated files out sample out hex sample hex 8 Startup s start s ej main c
113. selected by default is determined by the project temporary file project name tps corresponding to the project However if there is no project temporary file the build mode will be DefaultBuild If the build target file changed by Configurations etc in the HEW project files these projects cannot be converted 5 When the link order has been specified in the HEW project that setting is maintained RX Since the available settings for the link order differ with the build mode the order is converted accord ing to the build mode When the link order has not been specified in the HEW project linkage proceeds in alphabetical order 6 When files are classified into folders in the tree view of a HEW project the folders are replaced with the CubeSuite category after the project has been converted If nesting is to a depth of 20 or more folders categories the 20th stage and deeper stages are ignored Files in such folders are added to the 20th category 7 Conversion of projects that were created in HEW V 4 07 or a later version is supported The setting of the build tool in use is converted as shown below HEW CubeSuite SHC C Ver 7 0 or higher All build tools default the latest CC RX that has been installed H8C C Ver 6 0 00 or higher All build tools default the latest CA78KOR that has been installed NC30 V 5 20 Release 1 or higher All build tools default the latest CA78KOR that has been installed NC
114. subproject with the same ID has already been registered A subproject with the same ID has already been regis tered The subproject name is invalid A subproject with the same name cannot be made in the location where the main project exists In the specified location there is already a main project with the same name excluding extension 3 When the input for Place violates any restriction the following messages are shown in the tooltip Message Description The folder name including the path is too long Make it within 247 characters The folder name is more than 247 characters The file name including the path is too long Make it within 259 characters The file name with the path is more than 259 characters The location where the project is to be cre ated does not exist The folder creation was canceled or failed so that a nonexistent folder has been specified The location for project creation is invalid Enter characters that can be used as a path name The file name with the invalid path is designated The characters lt gt cannot be used for the folder name 4 When the project name and the path name is too long to be shown in each text area is dis played The absolute path pops up when the mouse cursor is hovered over P gt 5 Pass project area Set this area when reusing the file composition of the existing project main or subproject
115. the Tool menu select Options Description of each area 1 Open the One point Advice dialog box at CubeSuite startup Shows the FormOnePoint dialog box on startup default Does not show the FormOnePoint dialog box on startup 2 Open the Splash window at CubeSuite startup Shows the Splash window on startup default Does not show the Splash window on startup R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 210 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 3 Load the last project at CubeSuite startup Automatically loads the last project on startup default Does not automatically load the last project on startup 4 Reduce startup time by enabling rapid startup Reduces startup time by enabling rapid startup default Disables the rapid start feature Remark See 2 10 1 Use rapid start for details about the rapid start Caution This item is only enabled when this product is installed using the installer It is disabled when a packaged item is being used 5 Buttons Initialize Settings Returns all currently displayed setting to their default values Function buttons Button Function Initialize All Settings Restores all settings on this dialog box to their default values Note however that newly added items in the General External Tools category will not be removed OK Applies all setting and closes this dialog
116. the DefaultBuild If project file name is omitted then an error will be displayed and processing will end R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 87 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Option Description bcbA build mode name Perform a clean and then execute a build Launch without displaying the Main window build all the projects included in spec ified project file name with the build mode specified by build mode name and then exit If a project does not have the build mode specified by build mode name then the build mode is copied based on the DefaultBuild and the build is performed If the build mode specified by build mode name is not defined in the project speci fied by project file name then an error will be displayed and processing will end If build mode name is omitted then the build will use the DefaultBuild If project file name is omitted then an error will be displayed and processing will end bcA build mode name Perform a clean Launch without displaying the Main window build all the projects included in spec ified project file name with the build mode specified by build mode name and then exit If a project does not have the build mode specified by build mode name then the build mode is copied based on the DefaultBuild and the build is performed If the build mode specified by build mode name is not defined in the project speci fied by project fil
117. the active project False Detailed description This function changes the project specified in projectName to the active project The project file specified in projectName must be included the currently opened project Example of use gt gt gt project Close C project sample sub1 subproject mtpj True gt gt gt R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 344 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX G Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS project Close This function closes a project Specification format project Close save False Argumeni s Specify whether to save all files being edited and a project True Save all editing files and a project False Do not save all editing files and a project default Return value If the project was closed successfully True If there was an error when closing the project False Detailed description This function closes a currently opened project If save is set to True then all files being edited and a project are saved Example of use gt gt gt project Close True gt gt gt R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 345 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX G Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS project Create This function creates a new project Specification format project Create fileName micomType deviceName projectKind ProjectKind Application compiler Compiler Auto su
118. the file composition of an existing project to the new project Set the items in the order below and click the Create button 1 Select the microcontroller type Select V850 on Microcontroller 2 Select the microcontroller Select the microcontroller to use in the project on Using microcontroller 3 Select the project type Under Kind of project select Application CX or Library CX in accordance with the source project R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 52 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 4 Specify the project name and location to create the project file Specify the name of the project and the location to create the project file in Project name and Place If you don t create a folder with the project name under the specified location clear the Make the project folder check box 5 Specify the reuse of a CA850 project Check Pass the file composition of an existing project to the new project and specify the location of the project filename to reuse in Project to be passed Caution We recommend using the same project folder as the source project in order to avoid breaking the relationship between the project folder and source files If the project folder is different from that of the source project the following message dialog box will appear if you click the Create button To continue the process click the Yes button Figure 2 60 Message Dialog Bo
119. the main project is the active project 2 When you remove a subproject that set as the active project from a project the main project will be the active project Caution When you run a build using the toolbar button the build applies to the whole project To build only the active project run the build from the context menu of the active project R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 322 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX F USING AN EXTERNAL BUILD TOOL F 5 Run a Build This section explains operations related to running a build for a debug dedicated project 1 Build types The types of operations related to builds which can be linked to an external build tool in a debug dedicated project are as follows Table F 1 Build Types Type Description Executes the command specified with the Commands executed in the project building property in the Build category in the Property panel Note Build can run a build of only updated files gt See F 5 1 Runa build Rebuild Executes the command specified with the Commands executed in the project cleaning property in the Build category in the Property panel and then executes the command specified with the Commands executed in the project building property in the category same as above Rebuild can run a build of all build target files YO gt See F 5 2 Runa rebuild Executes the command specified with the Commands executed in the pro
120. their configuration can be changed Microcontroller name Displays microco Default ntrollers to use in the project or the subproject Microcontrollers used in the main project or the subproject How to change Changes not allowed Nickname Displays the nick name of the microcontroller to use Default The nickname of the microcontroller to use How to change Changes not allowed File version Displays the devi ce file version of the microcontroller to use Default The device file version of the microcontroller to use How to change Changes not allowed Bank size KBytes Displays the bank size of the microcontroller being used in Kbytes as a decimal number Note that this pro perty is only shown for microcontrollers with a memory bank Default The bank size recorded in your microcontroller s device file How to change Changes not allowed Internal ROM size KBytes Displays internal ROM size KBytes of the microcontroller to use in decimal number Default Internal ROM size of the microcontroller to use How to change Changes not allowed Internal RAM size Bytes 3 Notes Displays internal RAM size KBytes of the microcontroller to use in decimal number Default Internal RAM size of the microcontroller to use How to change Changes not allowed The detailed information on records is displayed
121. to 10 items for the input history are recorded in the drop down list 4 Option area The following options can be designated as search criterias This area is shown when the Option button is clicked not shown by default a Search criteria Select one of the following items from the drop down list Finds the characters designated in Search text R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 181 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Wild card Finds using the wildcard designated in Search text Note Regular Expressions Finds using the regular expressions designated in Search text Note This item is enabled only when the Editor panel is focused b File type This item is disabled c Match case Finds the designated characters in case sensitive Finds the designated characters in not case sensitive default d Match whole word Finds a designated exact word Finds at least one of the words default e Open file before replacing This item is disabled Function buttons Button Function Option Switches between display hide the Option area in this tab Find Previous Finds from the current caret position to the top of the file with the designated criteria Selects the characters that are searched and moves the caret Find Next Finds from the current caret position to the end of the file with the designated criteria Selects t
122. value Converted address numerical value Detailed description This function converts the address expression specified by expression into the address Caution If a scriptis specified to execute in the CubeSuite exe startup options then the symbol conver sion function will not be available until the debugging tool is connected In other words this function cannot be used so execute it after connection Example of use gt gt gt debugger Address main 0x4088 gt gt gt debugger Address main 1 0x4089 gt gt gt R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 363 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX G Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS debugger Assemble Disassemble This function performs disassembly Specification format debugger Assemble Disassemble address number 1 code True Argumeni s Argument Description address Specify the address at which to start disassembly number Specify the number of lines to display default 1 code Specify whether to display instruction codes True Display instruction codes default False Do not display instruction codes Return value List of result of disassembly see the Disassemblelnfo property for detail Detailed description This function performs disassembly from the address specified by address If number is specified the specified number of lines are displayed If code is set to False
123. when performing build related operations see F 5 Runa Build on CubeSuite The command settings are made with the Build category on the Build Options tab in the Property panel after select ing the Build Tool node of the target debug dedicated project main project or subproject on the project tree Figure F 13 Property Panel Build Options Tab Build Category Property a None Property E Build Mode Commands excecuted in the project building Commands excecuted in the project building 0 Commands excecuted in the project cleaning Commands excecuted in the project cleaning 0 Build mode Selects the build mode name to be used during build Below are how to set the commands Setting the command when running a build Setting the command when running a clean 1 Setting the command when running a build Set the command to be executed when running a build see F 5 1 Run a build in the Commands executed in the project building property In this property set the command to execute the required build processing e g make Figure F 14 Commands executed in the project building Property If you click the button the Text Edit dialog box will open R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 316 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX F USING AN EXTERNAL BUILD TOOL Figure F 15 Text Edit Dialog Box Text Edit Placeholder Placeholder Value Description ActiveProjectDir
124. whole word Open file before replacing The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open From the Edit menu select Find From the Edit menu select Replace Description of each area 1 Search text Designate characters to find You can directly enter the characters into the text box maximum characters 1024 or select from the input history in the drop down list maximum numbers of the history 10 If this dialog box is opened from the panel with the character being selected the selected characters are shown by default Words variable function at the caret position are shown by default You can select the following wildcard by using the gt button This is available when Wild card is selected in Search criteria Any single digit Zero or more of any character Any single character Any one character not in the set Any one character in the set R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 187 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE You can select the following regular expressions by using the gt button This is available when Regular Expres sion is selected in Search criteria End of line Group capture Zero or more One or more Any single character Any one character not in the set Any one character not in the s
125. with CubeSuite and then select a work space file hws or project file hwp When opening from a HEW workspace file hws When opening from a HEW project file hwp 1 When opening from a HEW workspace file hws a Select the project for conversion settings When a HEW workspace file is selected the Project Convert Setting dialog box will open Figure 2 66 Project Convert Setting Dialog Box Project Convert Setting Description You can convert your project for the CubeSuite E GR Project R ProjectB Select the project s from the left list box and change the settings to conversion as necessary Select several projects with Ctrl button you can change those projects settings at once When you press the OK button without changing any settings the new projects are made in the same place as the selected projects and the old projects are backuped in _org attachment folder Notice If you open a High performance Embedded Workshop project please be sure to select the device for each project The Project area shows the configuration of conversion target projects as a tree select the project for carrying out the conversion settings b Set the conversion target project When you select the project the area on the right shows the conversion target project setting items R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 59 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 67 Pro
126. 0 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 16 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 8 Check the installation targets and installation The settings made in the Development Tools Selection window or Select Components window are appeared Figure 2 10 Installation Settings Confirmation Window Installer step 6 8 Installation Settings Confirmation Setup is now ready to install CubeSuite on your computer If the newer version is already installed the older version may not be installed Tools for R8C microcontrollers Tools for RL78 and 78K microcontrollers Tools for RX microcontrollers Tools for 850 microcontrollers USB Driver for Renesas E Series 1 00 00 Install location C Program Files Renesas Electronics Click Next button to start installation CubeSuite m Check the information and click the Next button Caution If a emulator USB driver is installed on Windows Vista Windows 7 or Windows 8 the warning dialog box may appear 9 Confirm the installation progress A progress bar displays the progress of the installation The installation progress of each tool appear in the Install Status area Figure 2 11 Installation Execution Window Installer step 7 8 Installation Execution Install Status CubeSuite Vx xx xx Installing Installation completed successfully R8C Compiler NC30 V x xx Release xx Installing Installation completed successfully
127. 00 00 APPENDIX G Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS project Path This property refers the active project file name with path Specification format project Path Setting s None Reference Active project file name with path Detailed description This property refers the active project file name with path Example of use gt gt gt print project Path C project test mtpj R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 470 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX G Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS G3 9 CubeSuite Python property for build tool Below is a list of CubeSuite Python properties for the build tool Table G 9 CubeSuite Python Property For Build Tool Property Name Function Description build IsBuilding This property confirms whether a build is running build Link LibraryFile This property sets or refers library files of the active project R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 471 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX G Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS build IsBuilding This property confirms whether a build is running Specification format build IsBuilding Setting s None Reference If a build is running True If a build is not run False Detailed description This property confirms whether a build is running Example of use gt gt gt print build IsBuilding False gt gt gt R20UT2444EJ
128. 00 2tENESAS Page 280 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 4 Save as type area a In the Editor panel The following file types are displayed depend on the file type of the currently editing file Remark The following strings are displayed only for the files registered in the project tree R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Feb 01 2013 Preprocessor expanded output file i NC30 Localised support Preprocessor expanded output file C source file c C language source file C source file cpp cc cp CC RX C language source file Header file h hpp inc CC RX Header file Header file h inc CA850 CX NC30 Localised sup port CA78KOR CA78K0 Header file Assembler source file src s CC RX Assembler source file Assemble file s CA850 CX Assembler source file Assemble file asm CX CA78KOR CA78K0 Assembler source file Assemble file a30 NC30 Localised support Assembler source file Assemble file asm s Note 1 Assembler source file Link directive file dir dr CA850 CX Link directive file Link directive file dr dir CA78KOR CA78KO Link directive file Link order specification file mtls Link order specification file Section file sf CA850 Section file Symbol information file sfg CX Symbol information file
129. 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Rearrange Commands dialog box This dialog box allows you to change the arrangement including addition and deletion of menu items and buttons in the Main window Figure A 68 Rearrange Commands Dialog Box Rearrange Commands Choose a menu or toolbar to rearrange O Toolbar Commands J Open Open with Encoding 2 _ Add Move Down Modify Selection Close Project Close lt Object gt Save Project lt Save Project As Function buttons The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open In the Commands tab of the User Setting dialog box click the Rearrange Commands button Description of each area 1 Choose a menu or toolbar to rearrange area This area allows you to specify the item whose position you want to change First select the Menu Bar if you want to change the menu item or Toolbar if you want to change the toolbar but ton using the option button and then select the category to be changed from the drop down list R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 256 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 2 Commands area This area displays a list of commands belonging to the category selected in the Choose a menu or toolbar to rear range area which will be displayed in the Main window You can cha
130. 0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 472 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX G Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS build Link LibraryFile This property sets or refers library files of the active project Specification format build Link LibraryFile filelist Setting s Setting Description Set the library files of the active project as a list of strings Reference List of library files Detailed description This property sets or refers library files of the active project Add or change for the referred list to change the setting Example of use gt gt gt libl build Link LibraryFile Refer the current setting and add a library file testl lib test2 lib gt gt gt libl append test3 1lib gt gt gt build Link LibraryFile libl gt gt gt print build Link LibraryFile testl lib test2 lib test3 lib i gt gt gt lib2 test1l lib test2 1lib Set multiple library files gt gt gt build Link LibraryFile 11ib2 gt gt gt print build Link LibraryFile test1 lib test2 1lib R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 473 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX G Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS G3 10 CubeSuite Python property for debug tool Below is a list of CubeSuite Python properties for the debug tool Table G 10 CubeSuite Python Property For Debug Tool Property Name Function Description debugger ADConvertDatalnExecut
131. 0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 8 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 CHAPTER 1 GENERAL 1 2 Features CubeSuite s features are shown below 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Project management Manage project information including source file structure build options and settings for connecting to the debug tool Design The pin assignment function makes it possible to output reports called device pin list and device top view as files by inputting the pin configuration status of the microcontroller The code generation function can output source code device driver programs corresponding to peripheral func tions provided by the microcontroller e g systems ports and interrupt by selecting and entering the information required for control in the CubeSuite panels Coding A tree view of the files included in the project appears in a CubeSuite panel and the files can be edited by linking an editor to CubeSuite Build You can configure optimization and other build options in the CubeSuite panels enabling you to create efficient load module files and a library file Remark It is also possible to link to an external build tool and use it instead of the build tool provided by CubeSuite see APPENDIX F USING AN EXTERNAL BUILD TOOL Debug You can display your debugging tool s connection settings and debugging information in CubeSuite panels There are also many methods for executing programs enablin
132. 0x1000 0x2000 True True gt gt gt R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 416 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX G Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS debugger Upload Coverage This function saves the coverage data IECUBE IECUBE2 Simulator Specification format debugger Upload Coverage fileName force False Argumeni s Argument Description fileName Specify a file name force Specify whether to overwrite True Overwrite False Do not overwrite default Return value If the memory data was uploaded successfully True If there was an error when uploading the memory data False Detailed description This function saves the coverage data to a file Example of use gt gt gt debugger Upload Coverage C test coverageData csrcv True gt gt gt R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 417 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX G Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS debugger Upload Iintel This function saves the memory data in Intel format Specification format debugger Upload Intel fileName address1 address2 force False Argumeni s Argument Description fileName Specify a file name address1 Specify an upload start address address2 Specify an upload end address force Specify whether to overwrite True Overwrite False Do not overwrite default Return value If the me
133. 1 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX F USING AN EXTERNAL BUILD TOOL Figure F 28 Build Execution Results Rapid Build EOF All Messages Build Tool Rapid Build Remark The text in the Rapid Build tab becomes dimmed F 5 1 Run a build The command specified with the Commands executed in the project building property in the Build category in the Property panel is executed see 1 Setting the command when running a build This allows you to run a build of only updated files The commands being specified in the entire project main project and subprojects or active project see F 4 3 Set the target project for a build can be executed Remark _ If there are files being edited with the Editor panel when running a build then all these files are saved 1 When running a build of the entire project The commands being specified in all the debug dedicated projects that belong to the project are executed Click the button on the toolbar Remarks 1 Builds are run in the order of subproject main project Subprojects are built in the order that they are displayed on the project tree You can change the display order of the subprojects by dragging the subproject to be moved and dropping it on the desired location 2 Ifa project other than a debug dedicated project is included in your projects then builds will be run for that project using the build tool provided by CubeSuite see the CubeSuite
134. 2013 2tENESAS Page 314 of 491 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX F USING AN EXTERNAL BUILD TOOL Remarks 1 By dragging a file and dropping it onto the Editor panel you can open files other than those listed above in the Editor panel 2 When the environment is set to use an external text editor on the Option dialog box the file is opened with the external text editor that has been set Other files are opened with the applications associated by the host OS F 3 3 Remove an added file from a project To remove a file s that has been added to the debug dedicated project by using the method above select the file s on the project tree and then select Remove from Project from the context menu Figure F 12 Remove from Project Item a File a Fall Download files out aout S fmain cy x _ Open ES Open with Internal Editor E Open with Selected Application BE Open Folder with Explorer E Windows Explorer Menu Add gt El Remove from Project Shift Del t Copy Ctrl C iy Pas aP Rename F2 E Property R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 315 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX F USING AN EXTERNAL BUILD TOOL F 4 Make Settings for Build Operations Configure CubeSuite to execute builds linked to an external build tool e g a compiler assembler other than the build tool provided by CubeSuite F 4 1 Set the commands You can link to an external build tool by executing the command set here
135. 215 General External Tools category 222 General Font and Color category 217 General Python Console category 229 General Startup and Exit category 210 General Text Editor category 231 General Update category 235 Go to Line dialog box 178 H HEW project 59 History page 102 L License Manager window 110 R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Feb 01 2013 2tENESAS Page 485 of 491 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX H INDEX M Main window 112 Make settings for build operations 316 Microcontroller Information tab 158 N New Toolbar dialog box 251 0 One Point Advice dialog box 264 Open File dialog box 271 Open Option Setting File dialog box 283 Open Project dialog box 268 Option dialog box 208 General Build Debug category 226 General Display category 212 General External Text Editor category 215 General External Tools category 222 General Font and Color category 217 General Python Console category 229 General Startup and Exit category 210 General Text Editor category 231 General Update category 235 Other User Information category 237 Other Windows dialog box 266 Other User Information category 237 Output panel 164 P Pack Settings dialog box 205 Plug in Manager dialog box 239 Additional Function tab 243 Basic
136. 3 debugger XRunBreak Delete debugger XRunBreak Set 1 TimeType Ms True Example of use gt gt gt Hook E TestFile TestScript testScriptFile2 py R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 338 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX G Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS This function saves all editing files and projects Specification format Argumeni s None Return value If all editing files and projects were saved successfully True If there was an error when saving all editing files and projects False Detailed description This function saves all editing files and projects Example of use gt gt gt Save True gt gt gt R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 339 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX G Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS This function runs a script file Specification format Source scriptFile Argumeni s scriptFile Specify the script file to run Return value None Detailed description This function runs the script file specified by scriptFile This function operates the same as execfile of IronPython Example of use gt gt gt Source testScriptFile2 py gt gt gt Source E TestFile TestScript testScriptFile py gt gt gt R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 340 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX G Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS G
137. 3 See APPENDIX F USING AN EXTERNAL BUILD TOOL for details on a debug dedicated project This area has the following functions a b c d e Import project files If you drag the project file from the windows explorer and drop in this area you can open the project in Main Window Add subprojects You can add subprojects by one of the following procedure lt 1 gt Add an existing subproject Select Project node or Subproject node Then select Add gt gt Add Subproject in File or Project menu Add Existing Subproject dialog box appears Select subproject files to add Select Add gt gt Add Subproject in the context menu of Project node or Subproject node Add Existing Subproject dialog box appears Select subproject files to add lt 2 gt Add new subproject Select Project node or Subproject node Then select Add gt gt Add New Subproject in File or Project menu Create Project dialog box appears Create a new subproject file Select Add gt gt Add New Subproject in the context menu of Project node or Subproject node Create Project dialog box appears Create a new subproject file Remove a subproject from a project You can remove a subproject from a project by one of the following procedure Select the subproject that you want to delete then select Remove from Project in Project menu Select the subproject that you want to delete then select Remove from Projec
138. 3 2 CubeSuite Python function common Below is a list of CubeSuite Python functions common Table G 2 CubeSuite Python Function Common common OutputPanel This function displays the string on the Output panel R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 341 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX G Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS common OutputPanel This function displays the string on the Output panel Specification format common OutputPanel output messageType MessageType Information Argumeni s Argument Description output Specify the string displayed on the Output panel messageType Specify the type of messages to be colored in the Output panel The colors are in accord with the settings for the General Font and Color category in the Option dialog box Type Description MessageType Error MessageType Information Standard default MessageType Warning Warning Return value If the string was displayed on the Output panel successfully True If there was an error when displaying the string on the Output panel False Detailed description This function displays the string specified by output on the Output panel Example of use gt gt gt common OutputPanel An error occured MessageType Error True gt gt gt R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 342 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX G Python CONSOLE Pyth
139. 308 V 5 20 Release 1 or higher The latest CC RX that has been installed NC100 V 1 01 Release 00 or higher The latest CC RX that has been installed CCRX V 1 00 Release 00 or higher All build tools default the latest CC RX that has been installed 8 The conversion result is output to a file as project convert information The project convert information file name is ProjectConvertinformation_projectname txt The project convert information file is output for each converted project Subproject The project convert information file is output to the project folder of the project Subproject The project convert information file is displayed the File node of the project Subproject on the Project Tree panel 9 The project which used the Custom Build Phase cannot be converted 10 The target for conversion is only the HEW project file of the Renesas Electronics compiler The output format of the project convert information file is shown below R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 64 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 1 lt Options not to use Build mode gt Tool name of HEW Tab name of build tool property in CubeSuite Option Tool name of HEW Tab name of build tool property in CubeSuite file name Option 2 lt Options to change Build mode gt Tool name of HEW Tab name of build tool property in CubeSuitet Option of HEW project gt Option of CubeSuite project Tool name
140. 491 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Add Existing Subproject dialog box This dialog box is used to select subprojects for adding existing subprojects to projects Figure A 76 Add Existing Subproject Dialog Box Add Existing Subproject 1 4 Look in sub N DefaultBuild 4 E sub mtsp My Recent Documents 3 2 gt File name 3 z 4 My tieto iles of type Subproject File mtsp Function buttons The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open From the File or Project menu select Add gt gt Add Subproject On the Project Tree panel select the Project node or Subproject node and then select Add gt gt Add Subproject from the context menu Description of each area 1 Look in area Select the folder that the subproject file of the subproject to add exists The project folder is selected by default 2 List of files area File list that matches to the selections in Look in and Files of type is shown 3 File name area Specify the subproject file name of the subproject to add R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 274 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 4 Files of type area The following file types file type are displayed Subproject File mtsp Subproject file Function buttons Open Adds t
141. 68 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX G Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS debugger Breakpoint Information This function displays break point information Specification format debugger Breakpoint Information Argumeni s None Return value List of break point information see the Breakpointinfo property for detail Detailed description This function displays the break point settings in the following format break name is PythonBreakxxxx xxxx 4 digit number break event number break name state address location Example of use gt gt gt debugger Breakpoint Information 1 PythonBreak0001 Enable 0x000002dc 2 Break0001 Enable test1l c sub1 3 PythonBreak0002 Enable 0x000002ec 4 Break0002 Enable test1 c sub1 10 gt gt gt R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 369 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX G Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS debugger Breakpoint Set This function configures a break point Specification format debugger Breakpoint Set BreakCondition Argumeni s Argument Description BreakCondition Specify a break condition See the BreakCondition property for details about creating break conditions Return value Set break event number numerical value Detailed description This function sets a break point according to the specifications in BreakCondition Example of use gt gt gt Condition
142. 6KB R5F1006AA Total 2Update s xxxKB Update Download and install Download only CubeSuitet Option CubeSuite Vxx xx xx Review update history Download size xxxKB Restore hidden updates This is update for CubeSuite Change settings Detail Update Manager CubeSuite Update Manager Vxx xx xx Exit Download size xxxKB Help This is update for CubeSuite Update Manager wou Renesas Electronics Corporation Check the information and click the Download button R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 26 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 6 Confirm the download progress Update items are downloaded A progress bar on the Update in progress dialog box displays the download progress The download progress of each tool appear in the Update status area Figure 2 26 Updaie in progress Dialog Box Update in progress Downloading updates Update status Downloading CubeSuite Vx xx xx 29 complete Downloading 1 2 COO Remark See 2 4 5 Displaying the update history for instructions on installing download update items later 7 Display results of download and installation When all update tasks are finished the results of the update execution will appear on the Finish page Figure 2 27 Finish Page CubeSuite Update Manager Select updates E All Finish RL78 G13 16KB RS5F1006AA Finish updating CubeSuite Update Download and
143. 7 of 491 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Copy Copies the selected file to the clipboard When the file name is in editing the selected characters are copied to the clipboard Paste This menu is always disabled Rename You can rename the selected file The actual file is also renamed When the selected file is added to other project that file name is also changed Change Extension Opens a message dialog box to confirm whether to change the file extension Clicking on the Yes button in the dialog box will open the Character String Input dia log box in which the extension of the selected file can be changed When multiple files are selected they are changed at one time Note that this menu item is disabled if the name of the selected file cannot be changed or the file cannot be removed from the project or the build tool is in operation Property Displays the selected file s property on the Property panel 9 When a Category node is selected Shows the cascading menu to add files and Category nodes to the project Add File Opens the Add Existing File dialog box to add the selected file to the project The file is added directly below this node The added file can be opened with the application corresponds to the file extension Add New File Opens the Add File dialog box to create a file with the selected file type and add to the file to the project
144. 8KOR IRamWriteProtect Wrote to IRAM guard pe O lt fee a oO ayoyZ ANOUN Joye nwis aon OANSIUI Joyejnwis Joyejnwy za z a1oyOANOIUI L aop OONSIUl Joyejnwis area with address Note 3 lllegalOpcodeTrap Break due to illegal instruction exception Step Step execution breakNote 4 FetchGuard Fetch guard breakNote 4 TraceStop Trace stopNote 4 ExecutionFails Execution failedNote 5 Notes 1 2 3 Break trigger String Description None Applies to all of the following MINICUBE2 E1Serial E20Serial and EZ_Emulator Applies to all of the following MINICUBE E1Jtag E20Jtag and MINICUBE2utag Performed a verification check on the IRAM guard area during break and the value was overwritten if this affects multiple addresses only the first address is shown This is only a break cause during trace This is only a break cause during a break Not displayed with V850 MINICUBE on V850E ME2 etc same core when a post execution event is used I gt x lt lt for a fo m N penosoz3 Berroza enos g Pera JOye NWIS z aop ANOUN aIONZEANOIUIY Joye NWIS No break Manual Forced break Event Break due to event Software Software break TraceFull Break due to trace full NonMap Access to non mapped area WriteProtect Write to write protected area TimerOver Execu
145. 91 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Displays the help of this dialog box R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 201 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Batch Build dialog box This dialog box is used to run builds rebuilds and cleans in batch with the build modes that the project main project and subproject has Remark The batch build order follows the project build order the order of the subprojects main project When multiple build modes are selected for a single main project or subproject after running builds of the subproject with all the selected build modes the build of the next subproject or main project is run Figure A 43 Batch Build Dialog Box Batch Build Build mode list Project Build mode Defined macros DefaultBuild C sample BuildMode2 sub DefaultBuild C sub BuildMode2 Function buttons Rebuild The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open From the Build menu select Batch Build Description of each area 1 Build mode list area This area displays the list of the combinations of the names of the main project and subprojects in the currently opened project their build modes and their macro definitions a Project This area displays the main project and subprojects in the currently opened project Select the c
146. A850 Project name project Place D work PM v Backup the project composition after before conversion OK Cancel Help After setting the microcontroller to be used for the conversion target project and project type name and place of creation settings click the OK button Remarks 1 If you select Backup the project composition files after conversion immediately after the con version the project source files and complete project are packed up and saved 2 See Project Convert Setting dialog box for details about each setting item c Convert the CubeSuite project The PM project is converted to the CubeSuite project PM projects are converted to CubeSuite projects according to the rules below A PM project is converted to a project with the same name as the original project After conversion the project file name will be project name mtpj Remark When reading a project without build tools specified build tools are set according to the microcontroller Caution Only projects that can be loaded by PM and built normally can be loaded into CubeSuite Remarks 1 The target for conversion is the file structure information of the PM project file and the build mode build options information The build mode and build options information is not the target for conversion if the build tool is different from the PM project file 2 When build options have been added from the version of the target build t
147. C O D aes Cp lt 5 D CtENESAS CubeSuite V2 00 00 Integrated Development Environment Target Device 78KO Microcontroller RL78 Family 78KOR Microcontroller R8C Family V850 Family RX Family Renesas Electronics www renesas com User s Manual Start Rev 1 00 Feb 2013 10 11 12 Notice Descriptions of circuits software and other related information in this document are provided only to illustrate the operation of semiconductor products and application examples You are fully responsible for the incorporation of these circuits software and information in the design of your equipment Renesas Electronics assumes no responsibility for any losses incurred by you or third parties arising from the use of these circuits software or information Renesas Electronics has used reasonable care in preparing the information included in this document but Renesas Electronics does not warrant that such information is error free Renesas Electronics assumes no liability whatsoever for any damages incurred by you resulting from errors in or omissions from the information included herein Renesas Electronics does not assume any liability for infringement of patents copyrights or other intellectual property rights of third parties by or arising from the use of Renesas Electronics products or technical information described in this document No license express implied or otherwise is granted hereby under any
148. C keys to forcibly terminate CubeSuite The results of execution are output to the command prompt R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Feb 01 2013 2tENESAS Page 88 of 491 CubeSuite V2 00 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 97 Command Prompt If Build Is Executed with CubeSuite exe c Command Prompt O x EB tion Build Tool Start build all lt Tuesday February 22 2011 2 35 47 PM mation Build Tool Start build lt sample DefaultBuild gt mation lBuild Tool sro main c Information Build Tool gt DefaultBuild sample out Information Build Tool gt DefaultBuild sample hex Information Build Tool Build ended Error Warning 0 gt CInformation Build Tool Ended Success 1 Projects Failed Projects gt Tuesday February 22 26 PM gt C Program Files Renesas Electronics CubeSuite gt 2 When executing CubeSuiteW exe Execute CubeSuiteW exe to launch CubeSuite displaying the Main window and with plugins loaded in the same manner as when launching it from the Start menu The format to specify on the command line is shown below CubeSuiteW exeA npAplug in name plug in name A npall A noproj A nrs A plug in optionA plug in parameter Aproject file name A One or more spaces Can be omitted Pattern in proceeding can be repeated Each option is described below Option Description Start CubeSuite with the Main window displayed in the same manne
149. C location in the Editor panel If there is no source information or source file at the PC location it is shown in a Disassemble panel If the Editor or Disassemble panel to show the location is already visible then the focus will move to that panel Forward to Next Cursor Position Goes to the move destination Back to Last Cursor Position Returns to the last location before moving to the defined location Tag Jump Jumps to the caret line in the editor indicated by the message file line and col umn R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 116 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Save or Restore Docking Layout Displays commands relating to saving and restoring the docking layout in a cas cading menu Save Layout 1 Saves the docking layout in slot 1 This layout can be restored via the Restore Layout 1 Save Layout 2 Saves the docking layout in slot 2 This layout can be restored via the Restore Layout 2 Save Layout 3 Saves the docking layout in slot 3 This layout can be restored via the Restore Layout 3 Save Layout 4 Saves the docking layout in slot 4 This layout can be restored via the Restore Layout 4 Restore Layout 1 Restores a saved docking layout This command restores the layout saved via the Save Layout 1 If no layout has been saved to this slot the layout from the first startup is restored Restore La
150. CE 3 File name area Specify the project file name that you want to open 4 Files of type area Select the type of the project file you want to open a When the dialog box is opened from Project menu Project File mtpj Project file Project File for CubeSuite cspj Project file for CubeSuite Workspace File for HEW hws Workspace file for HEW Project File for HEW hwp Project file for HEW Workspace File for PM prw Workspace file for PM Project File for PM prj Project file for PM b When the dialog box is opened from the Open Existing Project area on the Start panel Project File mtpj Project file c When the dialog box is opened from the Open Existing CubeSuite High performance Embedded Workshop PM Project area on the Start panel Project File for CubeSuite cspj Project file for CubeSuite Workspace File for HEW hws Workspace file for HEW Project File for HEW hwp Project file for HEW Workspace File for PM prw Workspace file for PM Project File for PM prj Project file for PM d When the dialog box is opened from the Create Project dialog box Project File mtpj Project file Subproject File mtsp Subproject file Function buttons Button Function When the dialog box is opened from the Project menu CubeSuite project or the Open Existing Project area on the Siart panel Opens the specified project file
151. CoverageData debugger Option Timer timer debugger Option Trace trace debugger Option UseTraceData useTraceDataType Setting s Setting Description coverage Set whether to use the coverage function IECUBE IECUBE2 Simulator True Use the coverage function False Do not use the coverage function openBreak Set whether to use the open break function True Use the open break function False Do not use the open break function reuseCoverageData Set whether to reuse the coverage result True Reuse the coverage result False Do not reuse the coverage result Set whether to use the timer function True Use the timer function False Do not use the timer function Set whether to use the trace function IECUBE IECUBE2 Simulator True Use the trace function False Do not use the trace function useTraceDataType Set which function to use the trace data in IECUBE V850 IECUBE2 The functions that can be specified are shown below Type Description UseTraceDataType RRM RRM function UseTraceDataType Trace Trace function UseTraceDataType Coverage Coverage function R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 477 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX G Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS Reference Set value Caution If a PM workspace is converted to a CubeSuite project then there will be no debugging tool in the main project For this reason None
152. D work DebugOnly Absolute path of the active project folde ActiveProjectName DebugOnly Active project name BuildModeName DefaultBuild Build mode name MainProjectDir D work DebugOnly Absolute path of the main project folder MainProjectName DebugOnly Main project name MicomT oolPath C Program Files Absolute path of the CubeSuite install lt jil gt Co ares ee In Text enter the command to be executed with one item per line The commands can be specified up to 1023 characters per line up to 64 lines Remarks 1 This property supports placeholders If a line is double clicked in Placeholder the placeholder will be reflected in Text 2 When python is described in the first line the contents from the second line to the last line are regarded as the script of the Python console and then executed when running a build The placeholders can be described in the scriput If you click the OK button the entered commands are displayed as subproperties Figure F 16 Commands executed in the project building Property After Setting Commands E Build SI eee ASTE Commands excecuted in the project buildine 1 2 Setting the command when running a clean Set the command to be executed when running a clean see F 5 3 Runa clean in the Commands executed in the project cleaning property In this property set the command to delete intermediate files generated files and the like out
153. DIX G Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS debugger Run This function resets and then run the program Specification format debugger Run runOption RunOption Normal Argumeni s Argument Description runOption Specify an option The options that can be specified are shown below Type Description RunOption WaitBreak Wait until program stops RunOption Normal Breakpoints enabled do not wait until program stops default Return value None Detailed description This function resets and then run the program If RunOption WaitBreak is specified in runOption then it will wait until the program stops Example of use gt gt gt debugger Run gt gt gt debugger Run RunOption WaitBreak R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 413 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX G Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS debugger Step This function performs step execution Specification format debugger Step stepOption StepOption Source Argumeni s Argument Description stepOption Specify the execution unit The units that can be specified are shown below Type Description StepOption Source Source line unit default StepOption Instruction Instruction unit Return value None Detailed description This function performs step execution If a function call is being performed then stop at the top of the function Example of use g
154. Data read break BreakType Write Data write break BreakType Access Data access break Detailed description BreakCondition is in class format and the break condition is set in the variable In order to create a break condition create an instance and set conditions for that instance R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 439 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX G Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS Example of use gt gt gt executeBreak BreakCondition gt gt gt executeBreak Address main gt gt gt executeBreak BreakType BreakType Software gt gt gt debugger Breakpoint Set executeBreak point in parameter gt gt gt gt gt gt dataBreak BreakCondition gt gt gt dataBreak Address chData gt gt gt dataBreak Data 0x10 gt gt gt dataBreak BreakType BreakType Access gt gt gt debugger Breakpoint Set dataBreak point in parameter ee gt gt gt executeBreak Address sub 0x10 gt gt gt debugger Breakpoint Set executeBreak point in parameter gt gt gt Create instance Specify function in which to set the break Create instance Specify function in which to set the break Reuse break condition Specify function in which to set the break R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Feb 01 2013 2tENESAS Page 440 of 491 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX G Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS Breakpointinfo This class
155. ER 2 FUNCTIONS 7 Enter your license key Registering a license will remove the following limitations Below are the maximum code sizes that can be developed RX family 128 Kbytes V850 family 256 Kbytes R8C family Localised support 64 Kbytes RL78 family 64 Kbytes The available RAM is restricted to the internal RAM 78KOR microcontroller 64 Kbytes The available RAM is restricted to the internal RAM 78KO microcontroller 64 Kbytes The available RAM is restricted to the internal RAM Remark A license can be registered in the CubeSuite Update Manager window after installing this product Figure 2 8 License Registration Window Installer step 5 8 License Registration CubeSuite License Key Registration By clicking the button to the right you can register the product license key License Manager You can also register a license key after installation CubeSuite Click the License Manager button Figure 2 9 License Manager Window A License Manager You can add and remove license of Renesas Electronics microcontroller development tools License key is case insensitive and does not contain alphabetical 0 Add this License key Licenses After you register the license in the License Manager window click the Next button in the License Registration window Caution The installer cannot be manipulated while the License Manager window is running R20UT2444EJ010
156. Explorer or the like and drop it onto the Download files node on the project tree Figure F 4 Project Tree Panel Adding a Load Module File Project Tree 2 9 8 a E DebugOnly Project F uPD7031314 Microcontroller 4 A Pin Configurator Design Tool A None Build Tool 850 Simulator Debug T7 Drop a load module file here Ej 4 Download files 2 Creating and adding an empty file Select the Download files node on the project tree and then select Add gt gt Add New File from the context menu The Add File dialog box will open Figure F 5 Add File Dialog Box Adding a Load Module File Add File File type C source file c Header file h inc Assemble file asm s Python script file py Text file txt All files All files File namg a out D work DebugOnly In the dialog box specify the file name to be created newly and the location in which it is created and then click the OK button The project tree after adding the load module file will look like the one below R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 310 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX F USING AN EXTERNAL BUILD TOOL Figure F 6 Project Tree Panel After Adding Load Module File a out Project Tree ES J DebugOnly Project F uPD7031314 Microcontroller E A Pin Configurator Design Tool A None Build Tool 850 Simulator Debug Tool
157. FUNCTIONS 12 2 1 Installing CubeSuite 12 2 2 Uninstalling CubeSuite 19 2 3 Using the License Management Feature 21 2 3 1 Show license information 21 2 3 2 Adda license 22 2 3 3 Delete a license 22 2 4 Using the Update Feature 23 2 4 1 The manual update feature 23 2 4 2 The auto update feature 28 2 4 3 Canceling an update 30 2 4 4 Resuming an update 30 2 4 5 Displaying the update history 31 2 4 6 Restoring hidden updates 33 2 5 Start CubeSuite 36 2 6 Create a Project 37 2 6 1 Start a project 40 2 6 2 Create a new project 41 2 6 3 Add anew subproject 45 2 7 Manipulate a Project 47 2 7 1 Open a project 47 2 7 2 Add an existing subproject 48 2 7 3 Project is added to the favorites menu 49 2 7 4 Remove a subproject from the project 50 2 7 5 Change the project name 50 2 7 6 Open a project folder in Explorer 51 2 7 7 Convert a CA850 project into a CX project 52 2 7 8 Convert a CubeSuite project into a CubeSuite project 56 2 7 9 Convert a HEW project into a CubeSuite project 59 2 7 10 Convert a PM project into a CubeSuite project 67 2 7 11 Change the microcontroller 74 2 8 Save the Project File 76 2 8 1 Save the project file with a different name 76 2 8 2 Save all files 77 2 8 3 Pack and save the project and this product 77 2 8 4 Close a project 81 2 9 Changing the Window Layout 82 2 9 1 Aut
158. Files of type area 3 File name area Specify the name of an option setting file R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 283 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 4 Files of type area The following file type is displayed Option Setting File mtpu Option setting file Function buttons Open Imports the specified file to the General Font and Color category of the Option dialog box Cancel Ignores the setting and closes this dialog box R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 284 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Save Option Setting File dialog box This dialog box is used to save the setting of the General Font and Color category of the Option dialog box to an option setting file Figure A 81 Save Option Setting File Dialog Box Save Option Setting File Gp Save in 3 My Documents a My Music 2 my Pictures My Recent Documents 2 T Desktop My Documents My Computer 3 ile name Font and Color mtpu 4 vip Neterork 5 Option Setting File mtpu Function buttons The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open In the General Font and Color category of the Option dialog box click the Export button Description of each area 1 Save in area Select a folder to save an
159. INICUBE2 JTAG connect lecube IECUBE lecube2 IECUBE2 E1Jtag E1 JTAG connect E1Serial E1 Serial connect E20Jtag E20 JTAG connect E20Serial E20 Serial connect EZ _ Emulator EZ Emulator Detailed description This function displays information about the debug tool Example of use gt gt gt debugType debugger DebugTool GetType Minicube2 gt gt gt if debugType DebugTool Simulator debugger DebugTool Change DebugTool Simulator R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 374 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX G Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS debugger Disconnect This function disconnects from the debug tool Specification format debugger Disconnect Argumeni s None Return value If the debug tool was disconnected successfully True If there was an error when disconnecting from the debug tool False Detailed description This function disconnects from the debug tool Example of use gt gt gt debugger Disconnect True gt gt gt R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 375 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX G Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS debugger Download Binary This function downloads a binary file Specification format debugger Download Binary fileName address append False flashErase False Argumeni s Argument Description fileNam
160. If a function call is being performed then stop after the function executes Example of use gt gt gt debugger Next gt gt gt debugger Next NextOption Instruction gt gt gt R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 408 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX G Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS debugger Register GetValue This function refer s register IO register SFR Specification format debugger Register GetValue regName Argumeni s regName Specify the register name to reference Return value Register value numeric value Detailed description This function displays the value of the register specified by regName Example of use gt gt gt debugger Register GetValue pc 0x100 gt gt gt debugger Register GetValue A RB1 0x20 gt gt gt debugger Register SetValue pc 0x200 True gt gt gt debugger Register GetValue pc 0x200 gt gt gt R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 409 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX G Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS debugger Register SetValue This function sets the value of a register IO register and SFR Specification format debugger Register SetValue regName value Argumeni s Argument Description regName Specify the register name to set value Specify the value to set Return value If the value was set successfully True If there
161. Information dialog box 259 R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 487 of 491 Feb 01 2013 Revision Record Description Summary Feb 01 2013 a First Edition issued CubeSuite V2 00 00 User s Manual Start Publication Date Rev 1 00 Feb 01 2013 Published by Renesas Electronics Corporation tENESAS SALES OFFICES Renesas Electronics Corporation http www renesas com Refer to http www renesas com for the latest and detailed information Renesas Electronics America Inc 2880 Scott Boulevard Santa Clara CA 95050 2554 U S A Tel 1 408 588 6000 Fax 1 408 588 6130 Renesas Electronics Canada Limited 01 Nicholson Road Newmarket Ontario L3Y 9C3 Canada Tel 1 905 898 5441 Fax 1 905 898 3220 Renesas Electronics Europe Limited Dukes Meadow Millboard Road Bourne End Buckinghamshire SL8 5FH U K Tel 44 1628 651 700 Fax 44 1628 651 804 Renesas Electronics Europe GmbH Arcadiastrasse 10 40472 D sseldorf Germany Tel 49 211 65030 Fax 49 211 6503 1327 Renesas Electronics China Co Ltd 7th Floor Quantum Plaza No 27 ZhiChunLu Haidian District Beijing 100083 P R China Tel 86 10 8235 1155 Fax 86 10 8235 7679 Renesas Electronics Shanghai Co Ltd Unit 204 205 AZIA Center No 1233 Lujiazui Ring Rd Pudong District Shanghai 200120 China Tel 86 21 5877 1818 Fax 86 21 6887 7858 7898 Renesas Electronics Hong Kong Limited Unit 1601 1613 16 F Tower 2
162. Instal Success Suspended Failed Asuccess 1 E CubeSuite Vx xx xx 14 suspended 1 E CubeSuite Update Manager Vx xx xx M0120001 Installation is suspended because CubeSuite Update Manager is running It will be resumed next time you start the tool Failed 1 ECubeSuite Utilities Vx xx xx E0120004 Installation was aborted The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area How to open Opens automatically when the update completes Description of each area 1 Update Results area Displays a list of update results Displays number of successful updates and update titles Displays number of canceled updates update titles and messages Displays number of failed updates update titles and messages R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 101 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE History page Use this page to display the history of updates performed and to copy or delete update files Figure A 6 History Page History Ei You can save disk space by deleting downloaded files Also you may copy the files to other PCs to update Selec at Copy De Legend Download E Instal Successi Suspended Failed Title State Date Monday January xx XXXX XXXXXX AM o e Sener Update Manager detai Monday January xx XXXX XXXXXX VX XX_XX AM Qvetai Monday January xx xxxx XX
163. NESAS Page 180 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Any single character Any one character not in the set Any one character in the set You can select the following regular expressions by using the gt button This is available when this dialog box is opened from the Editor panel and Regular Expression is selected in Search criteria End of line Group capture Zero or more One or more Any single character Any one character not in the set Any one character not in the set Escape special character b Word boundary n Line break s Whitespace Beginning of line Or Remark For details on regular expressions see APPENDIX E REGULAR EXPRESSIONS SYNTAX 2 Replace with This item is disabled 3 Search location Designate the location to find Select one of the following items from the drop down list Item Operation Selection area Finds the selection in the search enabled panel which was active the last time If this dialog box is opened from the Editor panel or if there is no characters in selection in the panel which was last active or the panel cannot be found this item will be disabled Current document Panel Name Finds in the panel which was last active and can be found If the panel which was lastly active cannot be found or the panel does not exist this item will be disabled Remark Up
164. Name Finds within the current Editor panel All open documents Finds within all the opening the Editor panel If no file is opened in the Editor panel this item is disabled Active project Finds within the text file included in the active project When File type is specified finds only the specified type Note that is the current project does not exist this item is disabled Main project and subprojects Finds within the text file included in the main project and subproject When File type is specified finds only the specified type Note that if the current project does not exist this item is disabled Folder Name Finds within the text file in the folder specified by directly entering the maximum characters 259 the path relative path is from the project folder or specified in the Browse For Folder dialog box opened by clicking the button in this area When folders are not specified the project folder name is shown in by default folder if the project does not exist the current user document folder is shown When File type is specified searches only the specified type R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 191 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Remark Up to 10 items for the input history are recorded in the drop down list 4 Option area This area is shown when the Option button is clicked not shown by default The following options can be des
165. OLE Python FUNCTIONS APPENDIX G Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS This section describes the Python Console and Python functions provided by CubeSuite G1 Overview The Python Console plug in is a console tool using the IronPython language In addition to the functions and control statements supported by the IronPython language you can also use CubeSuite Python functions added in order to control CubeSuite The functions provided by CubeSuite are shown below On the Python Console panel you can execute IronPython functions and control statements and CubeSuite Python functions see G 3 CubeSuite Python Function Class Property Event and 2 11 Execute Python Fuc tions When you start CubeSuite from the command line you can specify and execute a script file see 2 12 Manipu late CubeSuite on the Command Line When loading a project file you can run a script you have prepared in advance see G 2 Related File G2 Related File Below is a related file of CubeSuite Python functions project file name py If there is a file in the same folder as the project file and with the same name as the project file but with the py extension then that file is executed automatically when the project file is loaded download file name py If there is a file in the same folder as the download file and with the same name as the download file but with the py extension then that file is executed automatically after downlo
166. Project aus i upo70F3746 l Build sample B A Pin Configura Rebuild sample w P Code Genera 3 A CA850 Build St vaso Simulat BE By Q Program Ana E Windows Explorer Menu a A File Clean sample Open Folder with Explorer Add gt iB Set sample as Active Project Fm Save Project and Development Tools as Package Fe Paste trl ae Rename F2 Ez Property Remark After changing the project name when you save the project the actual name of the project file is also changed R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 50 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 7 6 Open a project folder in Explorer You can open the folder where the project file for a project main project or subproject is saved from the project tree in Explorer Select the Project node or Subproject node and select Open Folder with Explorer on the context menu Figure 2 58 Open Folder with Explorer ltem For a Project sample Project R uPp70F3746 E Build sample A Pin Configura Rebuild sample E Code Genera A CA850 Bull p Clean sample S gt 850 Simklat BE Open Folder with Explorer T Oo Program Ana E Windows Explorer Menu w File Add gt Fm Save Project and Development Tools as Package ste Ctrity 4 aP Rename F2 Remark When you select Open Folder with Explorer from a file s context menu the folder the file i
167. Project Tree panel is passed to the external tool TempDir The absolute path of the temporary folder is passed to the external tool WinDir The absolute path of the Windows system folder is passed to the external tool e Use Output panel Displays messages that the new external tool outputs to stdout and stderr in the Output panel Messages will be output to the Output panel s Too Name tab Tool Name is the string specified in Menu name Uses the Windows command prompt for messages that the new external tool outputs to stdout and stderr default f Input options at startup The Character String Input opens enabling you to specify startup parameters for the new external tool Does not specify startup parameters for the new external tool default g Output unicode text This item is only enabled if the Use Output panel check box is selected Displays messages that the new external tool outputs to stdout and stderr in the Output panel using the Uni code character set Displays messages that the new external tool outputs to stdout and stderr in the Output panel using the ASCII character set default h Close window when command exit This item is disabled if the Use Output panel check box is selected Closes the Windows command prompt when the new external tool exits Leaves the Windows command prompt open after the new external tool exits default
168. Python functions for the debug tool Table G 5 CubeSuite Python Function For Debug Tool Function Name Function Description debugger Address This function evaluates an address expression debugger Assemble Disassemble This function performs disassembly debugger Assemble LineAssemble This function performs line assembly debugger Breakpoint Delete This function deletes a break point debugger Breakpoint Disable This function disables a break point setting debugger Breakpoint Enable This function enables a break point setting debugger Breakpoint Information This function displays break point information debugger Breakpoint Set This function configures a break point debugger Connect This function connects to the debug tool debugger DebugTool Change This function changes the debug tool debugger DebugTool GetType This function displays information about the debug tool debugger Disconnect This function disconnects from the debug tool debugger Download Binary This function downloads a binary file debugger Download Binary64Kb This function downloads a binary file in within 64 KB format debugger Download BinaryBank This function downloads a binary file in memory bank format debugger Download Coverage This function downloads coverage data debugger Download Hex This function downloads a hex file debugger Do
169. Python properties common Table G 7 CubeSuite Python Property Common Property Name Function Description common ConsoleClear This property sets or refers whether to clear the display of the Python console when changing the active project common EnableRemotingStartup This property sets and displays the setting for enabling or disabling the function for linking to an external tool at CubeSuite startup common Output This property refers the return value or the contents of an error common ThrowExcept This property sets or refers whether to throw an exception during the Python func tion is executed common UseRemoting This property sets and displays the setting for enabling or disabling the function for linking to an external tool while Python console is operating common Version This property refers the version of CubeSuite common ViewLine This property sets or refers the number of screen lines for the Python console common ViewOutput This property sets and displays the setting for whether or not to display results of Python functions for CubeSuite and error messages in the Python console R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Feb 01 2013 2tENESAS Page 455 of 491 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX G Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS common ConsoleClear This property sets or refers whether to clear the display of the Python console when changing the active project Specificati
170. R load module file and hex file from C source files by using the build tool provided by CubeSuite The generated file will be the debug target If the build tool is NC30 Localised support sample startup programs are generated when the project is cre ated C Application CC RX Select this to generate the load module file and hex file from a C source file only a file that has a main func tion and C source files by using build tool CC RX provided by CubeSuite The generated file will be the debug target Empty Application CC RX NC30 Localised support Select this to generate the load module file by using build tool CC RX NC30 Localised support provided by CubeSuite The generated file will be the debug target Sample startup programs are not generated when the project is created Library CC RX CA850 CX NC30 Localised support CA78KOR CA78K0 Select this to generate a library file for a user library by using the build tool provided by CubeSuite Debug Only Select this to debug a load module file or hex file generated with a build tool other than the one provided by CubeSuite i e creates a debug dedicated project See APPENDIX F USING AN EXTERNAL BUILD TOOL for details on how to create and use the debug dedicated project Remark When Application CC RX is selected the following start up source files are generated in the project folder File Name Description Registration in Project Tree ProjectName c De
171. RL78 RX V850 5 78KO_KC2 L_Basic_Operation_Tutorial wGQal 78KO_KF2 Analysis_Tutorial The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area How to open On the toolbar click the start button From the menu bar select Window gt gt Start Description of each area 1 Learn About CubeSuite area a Learn About CubeSuite Click the GO button to show a tutorial aimed at improving your understanding of CubeSuite 2 Create New Project area a Create New Project Click the GO button to open the Create Project dialog box in order to create a new CubeSuite project file R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 RENESAS Feb 01 2013 Page 123 of 491 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 3 Open Existing Project area a Recently Project This area displays up to four of the most recently used project file names project names b Favorite project This area displays up to four of the project file names project names in your favorites c Open Existing Project Click the naal button to open the Open Project dialog box in order to open an existing CubeSuite project file with mtpj extension 4 Open Existing CubeSuite High performance Embedded Workshop PM Project area a Open Existing CubeSuite High performance Embedded Workshop PM Project Click the Fao button to open the Open Project dialog box in
172. Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 267 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Open Project dialog box This dialog box is used to open an existing project or select the project file to designate the project to divert when creat ing a new project Figure A 74 Open Project Dialog Box Open Project p Look in sample DefaultBuild 2 O sub My Recent E sample mtpj Documents x 4 vitet gt Files of type Project Filet mtpi J 3 k File name Function buttons The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open From the Project menu select Open Project In the Start panel click the GO button in the Open Existing Project area In the Create Project dialog box click the Browse button in Diverting project in the project file area Description of each area 1 Look in area Select the folder that the project file of the project that you want to open exists When you first copy a project the folder is set to C Documents and Settings user name My Documents The second and subsequent times this defaults to the last folder that was selected 2 List of files area File list that matches to the selections in Look in and Files of type is shown R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 268 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFEREN
173. Settings Returns all currently displayed setting to their default values R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 233 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Function buttons Button Function Initialize All Settings Restores all settings on this dialog box to their default values Note however that newly added items in the General External Tools category will not be removed Applies all setting and closes this dialog box Ignores the setting and closes this dialog box Applies all setting does not close this dialog box Displays the help of this dialog box R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Feb 01 2013 2tENESAS Page 234 of 491 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE General Update category Use this category to configure general setting relating to update Figure A 57 Option Dialog Box General Update Category E p General x G Startup and Exit General Update E Display 1 G Extemal Text Editor gt Check for updates when opening project G Font and Color 3 Build Debug 3 Toa Python Console P Update Manager Option G Text Editor cmm T Others E User Information Check at intervals of Function buttons Initialize All Settings Cancel Apply Help The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open F
174. Suite Update Manager The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area How to open From the CubeSuite Update Manager window menu area click Restore hidden updates Description of each area 1 Button Restore The selected updates become visible enabling them to be re checked and installed 2 Hidden Updates Display area Displays a list of updates that were hidden via the Select updates page R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 RENESAS Feb 01 2013 Page 103 of 491 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Error page This page appears when acquisition of update information fails Figure A 8 Error Page Error E0113000 A connection with the server could not be established Cannot find server or DNS error The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area How to open Opens automatically when acquisition of update information fails Description of each area 1 Message area Displays a message that the acquisition of update information fails 2 Button Retry Re acquires update information R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 104 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Checking for Updates dialog box This dialog box appears while the application is checking for updates Figure A 9 Checking for Updates Dialog Box 1 Checking updates 7 4 P
175. Suite Utilities Vx xx xx petai OEY 25 AER EEE Vax xx xx oa wou Renesas Electronics Corporation 1 Installing download files This section describes how to install download files a Select download files Select the check boxes of download files in the History page and click the Copy button Figure 2 33 History Page a History R a You can save disk space by deleting downloaded files Also you may copy the files to other PCs to update Select all Legend Download E Instal Success Q Suspended Failed Title State Date m i ewes Monday January xx XXXX XXXXXX O Q CubeSuite Vx xx xx AM mex aay Update Manager Odai Monday January XX XXXX XXXXXX X XX XX AM a eae Monday January xx XXXX XXXXXX CubeSuite Utilities Vx xx xx detail AM R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 31 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS b Select a copy destination folder The Browse For Folder dialog box appears Figure 2 34 Browse For Folder Dialog Box Browse For Folder Select the folder to package project and tool Desktop E B My Documents 3 My Computer E7 a My Network Places Recycle Bin Make New Folder i j Select a copy destination folder and click the OK button c Confirm the copy destination folder and install The download files are copied to the specified folder Open the folder in Explorer and install from the download files 2
176. X A WINDOW REFERENCE Project Tree panel This panel is used to display components of the microcontroller build tool and source file of the project in tree view Figure A 19 Project Tree Panel Project Tree Toolbar a Esam le Project uPD70F3746 Microcontroller a A Pin Configurator Design Tool E Device Pin List a Device Top View Pe Code Generator Design Tool System External Bus Port INT Serial 4 D D A Timer Watchdog Timer RTC Clock Output Buzzer Output DMA LVI A CA850 Build Tool 850 Simulator Debug Tool P Program Analyzer Analyze Tool 3 File B Al Build tool generated files out sample out hex sample hex a SJ Startup start s ej main c E sub Subproject B uPD70F3746 Microcontroller H A Pin Configurator Design Tool H sij Code Generator Design Tool A CA850 Build Tool 850 Simulator Debug Tool Program Analyzer Analyze Tool Lh File x w x a a a a gt t a a a a The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Toolbar Edit menu Project Tree panel dedicated items Help menu Project Tree panel dedicated items Context menu R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Feb 01 2013 2tENESAS Page 138 of 491 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE How to open From the View menu select Project Tree Description of each area 1 Project tree area
177. XTrace Dump This function dumps the trace data IECUBE IECUBE2 Simulator Specification format debugger XTrace Dump frameCount fileName append False Argumeni s Argument Description frameCount Specify the number of dumps fileName Specify the name of the file to dump to default not specified append Specify whether to append trace data to the file True Append trace data to the file False Do not append trace data to the file default Return value List of trace information see the Tracelnfo property for detail Detailed description This function dumps trace data for the number of frames specified by frameCount If fileName is specified then the trace data is written to the file If append is set to True then the trace data is appended to the file Example of use gt gt gt debugger XTrace Dump 3 1851 00h00min00s003ms696us000ns 0x000003be cmp r11 r14 1852 00h00min00s003ms700us000ns 0x000003c0 blt _func_static3 0x2c 1853 00h00min00s003ms702us000ns 0x000003c2 jarl _errfunc lp gt gt gt debugger XTrace Dump 10 C test TestTrace txt gt gt gt R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 437 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX G Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS G 3 6 CubeSuite Python class Below is a list of CubeSuite Python classes Table G 6 CubeSuite Python Class Class Name Function Description BreakConditio
178. XXXX eta AM O Q CubeSuite Vx xx xx CubeSuite Utilities Vx_xx xx The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area How to open From the CubeSuite Update Manager window menu area click Review update history Description of each area 1 Behavior Selection area Select all Selects all the check boxes in the Update History Display area Copy Copies the selected updates to the specified folder Delete Deletes the selected updates 2 Update History Display area Displays a history of updates performed In the status column of the list click Detail to display a message dialog box with a message corresponding to the results of the selected update R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 102 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Restore hidden updates page Use this page to display a list of updates hidden in the Select updates page restore the visibility of the selected updates and enable that update to be checked and installed again Figure A 7 Restore hidden updates Page Z a Restore hidden updates a Ci lt You can restore hidden updates and then check again to see which updates you still need o 4 O amp CubeSuite Vxx xxxx Download size xxx KB This is update for CubeSuite 2 4 Detail O G CubeSuite Update Manager Vxx xx xx Download size xxx KB This is update for Cube
179. aces the New External Tool string in the list b Command path Either type in the name of the executable file including absolute path for the new external tool directly via the keyboard up to 259 characters or click the button and in the Select Program dialog box specify the name of the executable file Startup folder is automatically set to the absolute path to the folder where the executable file is located c Startup options Specify the startup options for the new external tool up to 256 characters The following placeholders can be specified by the gt button If you wish to specify more than one option separate them by spaces FileName The name of the file currently selected in the Project Tree panel is passed to the external tool FilePath The absolute path of the file currently selected in the Project Tree panel is passed to the external tool FileRelativePath The absolute path from the project folder of the file currently selected in the Project Tree panel is passed to the external tool Line If the file currently selected in the Project Tree panel is being edited in the Editor panel then the line on which the caret is located is passed if the Editor panel does not have focus then 1 is passed OutputFile The program passes to the external tool the name of the module file with absolute path that is output when the project for the item currently selected in the Project Tree p
180. ackInfo Number 0 AddressInfoText None Variable Number This holds the stack number AddressInfoText This holds the stack address information as a string Detailed description StackInfo is a class and it is the structure of the return value from the debugger Where function Example of use gt gt gt info debugger Where 1 test2 c 2 testl c main 41 gt gt gt print info 0 Number 1 gt gt gt print info 0 AddressInfoText test2 c gt gt gt info debugger Where 1 test2 c Information below might be inaccurate 2 testl c main 41 gt gt gt print a 1 Number None gt gt gt print a 1 AddressInfoText Information below might be inaccurate gt gt gt R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 450 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX G Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS Tracelnfo This class holds trace information Type class TraceInfo FrameNumber None None Timestamp FetchAddress None Mnemonic None ReadAddress None ReadData None WriteAddress None WriteData None VectorAddress None VectorData None IsDma True Variable return value of the debugger XTrace Dump function Variable Description FrameNumber This holds frame number information Timestamp This holds time stamp information FetchAddress This holds fetch address information Mnemonic This h
181. active project Specification format project File Information Argumeni s None Return value List of the files registered in the active project in a full path Detailed description This function displays the list of the full path of the files registered in the active project Example of use gt gt gt project File Information c prj sre filel c c prj sre file2 c c prj sre file3 c gt gt gt R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 350 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX G Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS project File Remove This function removes a file from the active project Specification format project File Remove fileName Argumeni s Argument Description fileName Specify the full path of the file to be removed from the active project When specifying multiple files specify in the format file1 file2 Return value If a file was removed from the active project successfully True If there was an error when a file was removed from the active project False Detailed description This function removes the file specified in fileName from the active project The file is not deleted Example of use gt gt gt project File Remove C project sample src test c True gt gt gt project File Remove C project sample src testl c C project sample src test2 c True R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS P
182. active project Rebuild active project Runs a build of the active project see F 5 1 Runa build If the active project is the main project a build of its subproject is not run Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Runs a rebuild of the active project see F 5 2 Runa rebuild If the active project is the main project a rebuild of its subproject is not run Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Clean active project Runs a clean of the active project see F 5 3 Run a clean If the active project is the main project a clean of its subproject is not run Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Stop Build Cancels the build rebuild batch build and clean operation Build Mode Settings Opens the Build Mode Settings dialog box to modify and add to the build mode Batch Build Opens the Batch Build dialog box to run a batch build see F 5 5 Run a batch build Build Option List f Debug Lists the currently set build options in the Output panel See the CubeSuite Integrated Development Environment User s Manual Debug for information about debugging g Tool The Tool menu displays tool related menu commands Options Opens the Option dialog box Plug in Setting Opens the Plug in Manager dialog box Customize Opens the User Setting dialog box
183. ading R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 331 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX G Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS G3 CubeSuite Python Function Class Property Event This section describes CubeSuite Python functions classes and properties Below is a list of CubeSuite Python functions classes and properties CubeSuite Python functions have the following limitations If a parameter has a default value then the Specification format parameter is described in the form parameter name default value You can also specify parameters by value only Example lf the Specification format is function arg arg2 1 arg3 True then arg7 has no default value arg2 has a default value of 1 and arg3 has a default value of True The parameters can be specified as follows function main 1 True Parameters with default values can be omitted This is only possible however if the parameter can be determined Example lf the Specification format is function arg1 arg2 1 arg3 True gt gt gt function main It is assumed that function main 1 True gt gt gt function main 2 It is assumed that function main 2 True gt gt gt function main arg3 False It is assumed that function main 1 False gt gt gt function main False NG because it is assumed that argl False arg2 main arg3 3 You can change the order in which paramete
184. after referred to as Download files node Note that this node is shown only when the project type is a debug dedicated project Build tool generated files This node is created during a build Files created by the Hereafter referred to as Build tool generated files node build tools are displayed directly below the node except for object files Note that this node is not shown when the project type is a debug dedicated project Startup V850 RL78 78KOR 78K0 This is a node for adding other than standard startup files to Hereafter referred to as Startup node the project This node is always shown under the File node Note that this node is not shown when the project type is a debug dedicated project Category name These user defined categories are used to classify files into Hereafter referred to as Category node modules Note that this node is always shown under the files node Subproject name Subproject Subprojects added to the project Hereafter referred to as Subproject node R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 139 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Remarks 1 Only the tools corresponding to the microcontroller in use are shown 2 When more than one components are selected only the tab that is common to all the components is displayed When more than one files are selected and their common properties are different that field is left blank
185. age 106 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Update Manager Options dialog box This dialog box displays and changes the Update Manager options Figure A 11 Update Manager Options Dialog Box Update Manager Options Automatic Updates CubeSuite can check for updates regularly Category CubeSuite Device Dependent Information Flash Programming T ool ay Update Manager Notify me but do not automatically download Others them If updates are found O Download updates automatically and notify me when it s finished Do nothing Internet Connections e You can change the proxy settings used to check and download updates in the 2 JI Internet Options in Control Panel Function buttons The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open From the CubeSuite Update Manager window menu area click Change settings Description of each area 1 Automatic Updates area a Category Select the category of for which to configure the behavior for found updates b If updates are found Set the behavior for found updates Select the action to perform for the selected category Download updates automatically and notify me when it s finished If corresponding updates are found during periodic checks for updates download them without asking for confirmati
186. age 351 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX G Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS project GetDeviceNameList This function displays the list of the device names of the microcontroller Specification format project GetDeviceNameList micomType nickName Argumeni s Argument Description micomType Specify the microcontroller type of a new projrct The types that can be specified are shown below Type Description MicomType RX Project for RX MicomType V850 Project for V850 MicomType RL78 Project for RL78 MicomType KOR Project for 78KOR MicomType KO Project for 78KO nickName Specify the nickname of the microcontroller by a string default not specified Specify a character string displayed in the first layer of the Using microcontroller list in the Create Project dialog box that is used to create a new project Return value List of device names Detailed description This function displays the list of the device names of the microcontroller specified by micomType When nickName is specified only the names of the devices specified by nickName are displayed Example of use gt gt gt project GetDeviceNameList MicomType RL78 R5F10BAF R5F10AGF R5F10BAG R5F10BGG gt gt gt devlist project GetDeviceNameList MicomType RL78 RL78 F13 ROM 128KB R5F10BAG R5F10BGG R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 352 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeS
187. an additional download True Perform additional download False Perform overwrite download default flashErase Specify whether to initialize a flash memory before download True Initialize a flash memory before download False Do not initialize a flash memory before download default Caution If two or more parameters are specified then three parameters must be specified It is not possible to specify only fileName and address Return value If a binary file was downloaded successfully True If there was an error when downloading a binary file False Detailed description When using the memory bank this function downloads binary files in within 64 KB format Example of use gt gt gt debugger Download Binary64Kb C test testModule bin 0x1000 False True gt gt gt debugger Download Binary64Kb C test testModule2 bin 0x2000 True False gt gt gt R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 377 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX G Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS debugger Download BinaryBank This function downloads a binary file in memory bank format Specification format debugger Download BinaryBank fileName address append False flashErase False Argumeni s Argument Description fileName Specify a download file address Specify a download start address append Specify whether to make an additional download True Perform additiona
188. and Release Build are the build modes that PM provides by default They differ depending on whether the debug information output option is set or not Other Options is output if Tab name of build tool property in CubeSuite for Tool name does not exist R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 73 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 7 11 Change the microcontroller You can change the microcontroller to be used in the created project 1 Select the change for the microcontroller Select the Microcontroller node and select Change microcontroller on the context menu The following message dialog box will open Figure 2 77 Message Dialog Box Question Q0232002 p Requires saving the current project before changing the microcontroller oJ Continue saving and processing The project needs to be saved before making the following steps The currenr project is overwritten by clicking the OK button To continue the process click the OK button Remark When multiple Microcontroller nodes for the projects using the same microcontroller are selected the microcontroller settings can be changed at one time 2 Select the new microcontroller The Change Microcontroller dialog box will open At this time the current microcontroller is selected in the Change microcontroller to area Figure 2 78 Change Microcontroller Dialog Box Change Microcontroller Change microcontroller to
189. and their configuration can be changed Add memos to th e microcontroller information The memo is added one item in one line The added memos are displayed as subproperty Default Memo Number of items How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can use a text box directly enter the text Restriction Up to 256 characters Up to 256 characters are allowed R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Feb 01 2013 2tENESAS Page 159 of 491 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Build Options tab This tab shows the detailed information on the build tool for the debug dedicated project see APPENDIX F USING AN EXTERNAL BUILD TOOL categorized by the following and the configuration can be changed 1 Build Mode 2 Build 3 Notes Figure A 24 Property Panel Build Options Tab Property aq None Property JEJ E Build Hode Build mode DefaultBuild Build Commands excecuted in the project building Commands excecuted in the project building 0 Commands excecuted in the project cleaning Commands excecuted in the project cleaning 0 Notes Build mode Selects the build mode name to be used during build Description of each category 1 Build Mode The detailed information on the build mode is displayed and the configuration can be changed Build mode Select the build mode to be used dur
190. anel currently Select the encoding to be set from the drop down list The items of the drop down list are displayed according to the following sequence Note that the same encoding and encoding which are not supported by the current OS will not be displayed Default encoding of the current OS default Most recently used encodings maximum 4 Popular encodings for current locale e g for United States locale it will be Western European Windows Unicode UTF 8 All other encodings supported by the OS in alphabetical order 3 Debugging Use this area to configure general settings relating to debugging in the text editor a Enable line highlight for PC Shows the current PC as a full line highlight in the text editor default Does not show the current PC as a full line highlight in the text editor Shows the value of variables in a tool tip when hovering the mouse over the variable in the text editor default Does not show the value of variables in a tool tip c Enable line highlight for break coverage Shows the breakand coverage as a full line highlight in the text editor default Does not show the break and coverage as a full line highlight in the text editor Uses window recycling Does not use window recycling default Remark See CubeSuite Integrated Development Environment User s Manual Debug for details about window recycling 4 Buttons Initialize
191. anel is built if there is no selection then nothing is passed d Startup folder Specify the absolute path to the folder for launching the external tool up to 247 characters The following placeholders can be specified by the gt button If you wish to specify more than one folder separate them by spaces R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 223 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE ActiveProjectDir The absolute path of the active project folder of the item currently selected in the Project Tree panel is passed to the external tool if the active project does not exist then nothing is passed FileDir The absolute path of the folder where the file currently selected in the Project Tree panel exists is passed to the external tool MainProjectDir The absolute path of the main project folder of the item currently selected in the Project Tree panel is passed to the external tool if the main project does not exist then nothing is passed MicomToolPath The absolute path of the install folder of this product is passed to the external tool OutputDir The program passes the name of the folder with absolute path for the module that is output when the project for the item currently selected in the Project Tree panel is built if there is no selection then nothing is passed ProjectDir The absolute path of the project folder of the item currently selected in the
192. area on the right shows the conversion target project setting items R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 62 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 70 Project Convert Setting Dialog Box When Project Is Selected Project Convert Setting p Beseription Project settings EefProjects New microcontroller Microcontroller New microcontroller A S AX210 a Ae i o ERE E J R5F52105AxFF 80pin On chip size KBytes J ROFE21OSAsFK G4pin AdaitenaIniormatcn Pockage PLOPOOOIA A J R5F521054xFM 64pin AME R5F521054xFN 80pin AME R5F521054xFP 100pin JE R5F521054xLJ 100pin v J RSF521064xFF 80pin Aiii _merratnea riena Select session SessionRX600_E1_E20_ SYSTEM New project Kind of project Empty Application CC RX Project name Project Place D work HEW AxConvertT est Project v Backup the project composition after before conversion Cancel Help After setting the microcontroller to be used for the conversion target project and project type name and place of creation settings click the OK button Caution Confirm that the microcontroller is selected before clicking the OK button Remarks 1 Select session is displayed only when multiple sessions exist in a project 2 If you select Backup the project composition files after conversion immediately after the con version the project source files and complete project are packed up and saved 3 Se
193. ase Finds the designated characters in case sensitive d Match whole word Finds the designated characters in not case sensitive default Finds with a designated exact word Finds with at least one of the words default e Open file before replacing This item is disabled Function buttons Button Function Option Switches between display hide the Option area in this tab Find Previous Finds from the current caret position to the top of the file with the designated criteria Selects the characters that are found and moves the caret Find Next Finds from the current caret position to the end of the file with the designated criteria Selects the characters that are found and moves the caret te Replace and Next Replace and Previous Replaces the selected characters to the characters to be replaced then searches the next previous candidate and selects themN Cancel Ignores the setting and closes this dialog box Help Displays the help of this dialog box Note If the designated characters cannot be searched Search text was not found is displayed on the status bar of the Main window R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Feb 01 2013 2tENESAS Page 189 of 491 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Replace in Files tab In this tab batch search is done with the designated characters and then they are replaced to the chara
194. at has a main function and C source files by using build tool CC RX provided by CubeSuite The generated file will be the debug target Empty Application CC RX NC30 Localised support Select this to generate the load module file by using build tool CC RX NC30 Localised support provided by CubeSuite The generated file will be the debug target Sample startup programs are not generated when the project is created Library CC RX CA850 CX NC30 Localised support CA78KOR CA78K0 Select this to generate a library file for a user library by using the build tool provided by CubeSuite Debug Only Select this to debug a load module file or hex file generated with a build tool other than the one provided by CubeSuite i e creates a debug dedicated project See APPENDIX F USING AN EXTERNAL BUILD TOOL for details on how to create and use the debug dedicated project b Project name c Directly enter the name of the project to create The entered project name is followed by the extension mtpj and this forms the project file name Remarks 1 When the subproject is created the entered project name is followed by the extension cssp and forms the subproject name 2 When there is an existing project file with the same name in the location for creating the project file the file name has a number from 1 to 99 appended thus _n_ Place Designate the location to create the project file by directly entering it w
195. at this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Clean Actively project Cleans the active project If the active project is the main project its subproject is not cleaned Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Open Folder with Explorer Opens the folder that contains the project file of the selected project with Explorer Windows Explorer Menu Displays the Windows Explorer menu corresponding to the project file for the selected project Add Add Subproject Shows the cascading menu to add subprojects and files to the project Opens the Add Existing Subproject dialog box to add the selected subproject to a project Add New Subproject Opens the Create Project dialog box to add the created subproject to a project Add File Opens the Add Existing File dialog box to add the selected file to a project Add New File Opens the Add File dialog box to create a file with the selected file type and add toa project The added file can be opened with the application corresponds to the file extension Add New Category Adds a new Category node to the root of the File node This allows the category name to be changed The default category name is New category The new category name can be changed to the same name as the existing Category node Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Set Selected project Active P
196. ave location Se gt work L out ae eee aos CopyFiles sre i inc o i Files outside the work folder are saved to the li CopyFiles folder Note src The folder that source files are stored inc The folder that is specified as Additional include paths lib The folder that is specified as Additional library paths R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 79 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS If you click the OK button the copy process will begin The dialog box below is displayed during the copying process Figure 2 88 Copying Progress Status Packing project Y The save location folder structure is shown below Figure 2 89 Save Location Folder Structure Save location readme txt The explanation of the structure of the save location errorlog txt A record of the files that failed to cpoy Top folder name The folder that is specified as the top folder of the packing targetNote 1 I Tools The folder that this product is installed te 2 L Copy_Files The copy location folder for files not placed in the top folder of the packing targetNote 3 copylog txt A record of the copied files 4 The storage folder 1 for copied filesNote 4 2 The storage folder 2 for copied filesNote 4 Notes 1 The following files in the top folder of the packing target specified in the Pack Settings
197. b 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 4 Save as type area The following file type is displayed Project File mtpj Project file Function buttons Save Saves the project file as the designated file name Cancel Closes this dialog box R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 279 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Save As dialog box This dialog box is used to save the editing file or contents of each panel to a file with a name Figure A 79 Save As Dialog Box Save As D Save in stc My Recent Documents My Documents My Computer 3 P File name 5 4 yNetwerk PSave as type C source file c Function buttons The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open Focus the Editor panel and from the File menu select Save file name As Focus the Output panel and from the File menu select Save tab name As Focus the Python Console panel and from the File menu select Save Python Console As Description of each area 1 Save in area Select the folder to save the panel contents in the file 2 List of files area File list that matches the selections in Save in and Files of type area is shown 3 File name area Specify the file name to save R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1
198. bProject False Argumenit s Argument Description fileName Specify the full path of a new projrct file If no file extension is specified the filename is automatically supplemented If the project to be created is a main project subProject False or a subproject sub Project True the name is supplemented by mtpj or mtsp respectively When the extension is other than that specified it is replaced by the actual extension micomType Specify the microcontroller type of a new projrct The types that can be specified are shown below Type Description MicomType RX Project for RX MicomType V850 Project for V850 MicomType RL78 Project for RL78 MicomType KOR Project for 78KOR MicomType KO Project for 78KO deviceName Specify the device name of the microcontroller of a new projrct by a string projectKind Specify the type of a new projrct The types that can be specified are shown below Type Description ProjectKind Application Project for application default ProjectKind Library Project for library ProjectKind DebugOnly Debug dedicated project ProjectKind Empty Project for empty application ProjectKind CppApplication Project for C application ProjectKind RI600V4 Project for RIG00V4 ProjectKind RIG00PX Project for RIGOOPX ProjectKind RI850V4 Project for RI850V4 ProjectKind RI850MP Proje
199. bout configuration for a particular category see the section for the category in question Function buttons Button Function Initialize All Settings Restores all settings on this dialog box to their default values Note however that newly added items in the General External Tools category will not be removed OK Applies all setting and closes this dialog box Cancel Ignores the setting and closes this dialog box Apply Applies all setting does not close this dialog box Help Displays the help of this dialog box R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 209 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE General Startup and Exit category Use this category to configure general settings relating to startup and shutdown Figure A 47 Option Dialog Box General Startup and Exit Category General tes ET General Startup and Exit E Display 1 gema Tet Edo gt M Open the One point Advice dialog box at CubeSuite startup 2 5 i ey To z Open the Splash window at CubeSuite startup 3 a o jie Load the last project at CubeSuite startup 4 A ea V Reduce startup time by enabling rapid startup T Others E User Information o t J Function buttons Initialize All Settings Cancel Apply Help The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open From
200. box will open Figure F 21 Character String Input Dialog Box Character String Input String BuildMode2 In the dialog box enter the name of the build mode to be created and then click the OK button The build mode with that name will be duplicated The created build mode is added to the build modes of the main project and all the subprojects including projects other than a debug dedicated project which currently belong to the project R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 319 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX F USING AN EXTERNAL BUILD TOOL Figure F 22 Build Mode Settings Dialog Box After Adding Build Mode Build Mode Settings Selected build mode BuildMode2 Apply to all Build mode list Defar Ebi gd qBuildMode2 Duplicate Delete Rename Remarks 1 Creating a build mode is regarded a project change When closing the project you will be asked to confirm whether or not to save the build mode 2 You can change the name of the build mode by selecting the build mode from the build mode list and clicking the Rename button However you cannot change the name of DefaultBuild 2 Change the build mode Change the build mode to the newly created build mode a When changing the build mode for the main project or subprojects Select the Build tool node of the target debug dedicated project on the project tree and select the build mode to be changed to with the
201. break event number to disable Return value If a break point setting was disabled successfully True If there was an error when disabling a break point setting False Detailed description This function disables the break event specified by breakNumber If breakNumber is not specified then breaks of all break event numbers will be disabled Example of use gt gt gt debugger Breakpoint Enable 1 True gt gt gt debugger Breakpoint Disable 1 True gt gt gt debugger Breakpoint Delete 1 True gt gt gt R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 367 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX G Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS debugger Breakpoint Enable This function enables a break point setting Specification format debugger Breakpoint Enable breakNumber Argumeni s Specify the break event number to enable Return value If a break point setting was enabled successfully True If there was an error when enabling a break point setting False Detailed description This function enables the break event specified by breakNumber If breakNumber is not specified then breaks of all break event numbers will be enabled Example of use gt gt gt debugger Breakpoint Enable 1 True gt gt gt debugger Breakpoint Disable 1 True gt gt gt debugger Breakpoint Delete 1 True gt gt gt R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 3
202. bug dedicated project 1 Debug Tool node Connect Settings tab Debug Tool Settings tab Flash Self Emulation Settings tab IECUBE DataFlash Emulation Settings tab IECUBE RL78 IECUBE 78KOR IECUBE V850 Download File Settings tab Flash Options Settings tab V850E2 Hook Transaction Settings tab See the CubeSuite Integrated Development Environment User s Manual Debug for details about this tab Analyze Tool node Settings tab See the CubeSuite Integrated Development Environment User s Manual Analysis for details about this tab Build Settings tab for C source file C source file CC RX assembler source file object module file link directive file CA850 CX CA78KOR CA78K0 symbol information file CX and library file Individual Compile Options tab for C source file CA850 CX NC30 Localised support CA78KOR CA78kK0 Individual Compile Options C tab for C source file CC RX Individual Compile Options C tab for C source file CC RX Individual Assemble Options tab for assembler source 2 File Information tab See the CubeSuite Integrated Development Environment User s Manual Build for details about this tab R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 152 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Category node Category information tab See the CubeSuite Integrated Development Environme
203. by a sequence of the digits 0 to 9 and the letters a to f As for capital letter small letter of the alphabet it is pretermission R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 300 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX D INPUT CONVENTIONS D 2 Displaying Icons at Locations of Input Errors In some of the panels and dialog boxes provided by CubeSuite the icon will appear at a point where incorect characters are entered or a required item is missing Remark Placing the cursor over the icon will pop up the information that indicates the characters to be entered tips to fix the error Figure D 1 Sample Icons Shown at Locations of Input Errors Path Edit Path One path per one line Fa D include 7 I The specified path contains a Folder that does not exist Browse C Subfolders are automatically included Co exe C R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 301 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX E REGULAR EXPRESSIONS SYNTAX APPENDIX E REGULAR EXPRESSIONS SYNTAX This section provides detailed explanations of the regular expressions used for the Find and Replace dialog box The regular expressions supported in CubeSuite are based on the Microsoft NET regular expressions syntax Remark Whitespace characters are ignored in all regular expression strings Whitespace characters can be specified in the search string by using the s character E 1 Character Escapes The f
204. c Header file h inc Assemble file asm s Object module file obj 0 Python script file py Text file txt 2 Subfolder level to search Function buttons The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open Drag the folder from Explorer or the like and drop it on the Project Tree panel Description of each area 1 File type area Select the type of the file to be added to the project You can select multiple file types by left clicking while holding down the Ctrl or Shift key If nothing is selected it is assumed that all types are selected The file types to be displayed are as follows C source file c Header file h inc Assemble file asm s Object module file obj o Python script file py Text file txt R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 171 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 2 Subfolder level to search area Directly enter the number of levels of the subfolder to be added to the project 1 is displayed by default Remark Up to 10 decimal number can be specified When the input violates any restriction the following messages will be shown in the tooltip Message Description Fewer than 0 or more than 10 values cannot be specified More than 10 subfolder levels have been speci fied Specify i
205. category to configure general settings relating to the text editor Figure A 56 Option Dialog Box General Text Editor Category _ General E Startup and Exit G Display 1 GI Extemal Text Editor p Spack G Font and Color ir G External Tools Enable auto indentation _ Use spaces as tabs G Build Debug C Show whitespace marks E Python Console 2 MEWS T ext Editor General Updat al a m Up E Enable syntax coloring v Enable smart editing i E User Information Enable code outlining V Enable file encoding auto detection Externally modified files Prompt to reload the file v Default file encoding Westem European Windows x 3 Debugging Enable line highlight for PC V Enable tool tip watch Enable line highlight for break coverage C Use window recycling m i Function buttons Initialize All Settings Cancel Apply Help The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open From the Tool menu select Options Description of each area 1 Spacing Use this area to configure the spacing related settings in the text editor a Enable auto indentation Code is intelligently indented depending on the code being typed in the text editor E g Inside a function or not or coding a loop default Code is not indented depending on the code being typed in the text editor
206. ch text will be displayed only if this dialog box is opened from the Editor panel Figure A 35 Find and Replace Dialog Box Quick Find Tab Find and Replace i Quick Find Findin Files Quick Replace Replace in Files 1 Search text 3 Search location Current document main c o Option Search criteria Normal 4 4 C Match case C Match whole word Open file before replacing Function buttons The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open From the Edit menu select Find From the Edit menu select Replace Description of each area 1 Search text Designate characters to find You can directly enter the characters into the text box maximum characters 1024 or select from the input history in the drop down list maximum numbers of the history 10 If this dialog box is opened from the panel with the character being selected the selected characters are shown by default If this dialog box is opened from the Editor panel words variable function at the caret position are shown by default You can select the following wildcard by using the gt button This is available when this dialog box is opened from the Editor panel and Wild card is selected in Search criteria Any single digit Zero or more of any character R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tE
207. characters can be specified The default category name is New category You can also add a Category node with the same name as the existing Category node This menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation and when categories are nested 20 levels Open Folder with Explorer This menu is always disabled Windows Explorer Menu This menu is always disabled Remove from Project This menu is always disabled Copy This menu is always disabled Paste Inserts the contents of the clipboard directly below this node However this menu is disabled when the contents of the clipboard exist in the same project Rename This menu is always disabled Property Displays this node s property on the Property panel 7 When a Python console script file is selected Open Execute in Python Console Opens the Python Console panel to execute the selected Python script file Opens the selected file with the application corresponds to the file extension see f Running the editor Open with Internal Editor Opens the selected file with the Editor panel Open with Selected Application Opens the Open with Program dialog box to open the selected file with the designated application Open Folder with Explorer Opens the folder that contains the selected file with Explorer Windows Explorer Menu Displays the Windows Ex
208. ck box if you wish to backup the entire source project and its source files as a single bundle b Place Specify the location in which to save the entire source project and its source files Enter the absolute path directly or click the Browse button and select the location via the Browse For Folder dialog box By default project folder of project being created_backup is displayed If there is already a folder with the same name a number 2 3 will be added to the folder name This field is enabled only when the Backup the project composition files before conversion check box is checked c Button Browse Browse For Folder dialog box appears When a folder is selected the path is shown in the text box Remarks 1 Up to 247 characters can be entered in Place When the input violates any restriction the following messages are shown Message Description The folder name including the path is too long The folder name is more than 247 characters Make it within 247 characters The folder name is invalid The following charac The folder name with the invalid path is designated ters cannot be used lt gt The characters lt gt cannot be used for the file name and folder name The folder name is invalid Specify a folder other A folder inside the source project folder is specified than the diverted project folder 2 When the path name is too long t
209. ct for RI850MP ProjectKind RI78V4 Project for RI78V4 R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Feb 01 2013 7tENESAS Page 346 of 491 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX G Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS Argument Description compiler Specify the compiler to be used If the compiler is not specified it is selected automatically depending on the microcontrol ler type Type Description Compiler Auto The compiler to be used is selected in accord with the specification for micomType default Compiler CC_RX CC RX If this argument is not specified when micomType is set to MicomType RX CC RX is selected automati cally Compiler CA850 CA850 If this argument is not specified when micomType is set to MicomType V850 and deviceName is set to V850E or V850ES CA850 is selected automati cally Compiler CX CX If this argument is not specified when micomType is set to MicomType V850 and deviceName is set to V850E2 CX is selected automatically Compiler CA78KOR CA78KOR If this argument is not specified when micomType is set to MicomType KOR or MicomType RL78 CA78KOR is selected automatically Compiler CA78KO CA78KO If this argument is not specified when micomType is set to MicomType K0 CA78KO is selected automat ically subProject Specify whether to create a main project or a subproject False Create a main projet default True Create a s
210. ct name area Shows the current version of CubeSuite 2 Product License area This displays license information corresponding to the license key R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Feb 01 2013 2tENESAS Page 259 of 491 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 3 Installed product area List each module name and its version used in CubeSuite Module Name Shows the module name Version Shows the current version of the module Explanation Shows the brief description of the module Function buttons Button Function Copy All Text Copies all the characters displayed to the clip board OK Closes this dialog box Help Displays the help of this dialog box R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 260 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Detail Version Information dialog box This dialog box is used to displays detail version information of this product and the present project information Figure A 71 Detail Version Information Dialog Box Detail Version Information The information of project files the information of source files are output Remove these information if there is a confidential problem System Information OS Version Microsoft Windows xP Professional Version 5 1 Build 2600 Service Pack 3 Language English United States NET Framework Version Microsoft NET Framework 2 0 Service Pack 2 KB2604092 NET 3 5
211. ct node is selected a Microcontroller Select a microcontroller type to use in the new project You can select the item below RX V850 R8C Localised support RL78 78KOR R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 134 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 78KO b New microcontroller area Select a microcontroller to use in the new project lt 1 gt Microcontroller search box You can search a microcontroller selected in the list of microcontrollers simply lt 2 gt List of microcontrollers Select a microcontroller The microcontrollers that correspond to the microcontroller type selected in Microcontroller are listed and categorized by their nicknames The following information on the selected microcontroller that is used in the project is shown in the box at right Product Name On chip ROM size Kbytes RX Internal ROM size Kbytes V850 R8C Localised support RL78 78KOR 78K0 On chip RAM size Bytes RX Internal RAM size Bytes V850 R8C Localised support RL78 78KOR 78K0 Additional InformationN te Note Other information appears only when present lt 3 gt Button Displays the CubeSuite Update Manager window When the microcontroller to be used does not appear in the list you can search for the microcontroller via the net work Caution This button is only enabled when this product is installed using the installer It is dis abl
212. cted the following start up source files are generated in the project folder File Name Description Registration in Project Tree ProjectName c Defines the main function dbsct c For setting up standard sections hwsetup c For initializing hardware intprg c Defines interrupt functions iodefine h Defines I O registers lowlvl src Defines low level I O functions source file for assembler lowsrc c Defines low level I O functions lowsrc h Prototypes for low level I O functions R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 127 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE File Name Description Registration in Project Tree resetprg c Defines initialization for C language sbrk c Defines the function for allocating the heap memory sbrk h Defines the heap size stacksct h Defines pragma for the stack typedefine h Defines typedefine for the types used in sbrk c etc vect h Prototypes for interrupt vector functions vecttbl c Defines the interrupt vector table The files marked with OK in the Registration in Project Tree column are also registered in the project tree When necessary also register the files marked with in the project tree 4 Project Creation area Set the project to create a Project name Directly enter the name of the project to create The entered project name is followed by the extension mtpj and this forms the
213. cted characters to the clip board Paste Inserts the contents of the clipboard into the caret position Select All Selects allcharacters displayed on this panel Abort Forces the currently running command to stop Clear Clears all output results Python Initialize Initializes Python Select Script File R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Feb 01 2013 Opens the Select Script File dialog box to execute the selected Python script file tENESAS Page 292 of 491 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Select Script File dialog box This dialog box is used to select the script file for the Python Figure A 85 Select Script File Dialog Box Select Script File D Look in sample DefaultBuild 4 3 testScriptFile py My Recent Documents 3 2 PFile name i a 4 Ap tietork iles of type Python Script filef py Function buttons The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open On the Python Console panel select Select Script File from the context menu Description of each area 1 Look in area Select the folder that the script file exists When you first select a folder the folder is set to C Documents and Settings user name My Documents The second and subsequent times this defaults to the last folder that was selected 2 List of
214. cters to be replaced in batch Remarks 1 This tab will be disabled if you call the Find and Replace dialog box from a panel other than the Editor panel 2 The gt button in Search text will be displayed only if this dialog box is opened from the Editor panel Figure A 38 Find and Replace Dialog Box Replace in Files Tab Find and Replace AD Quick Find Find in Files Quick Replace Replace in File 0 Search text 2 Replace with 3 Search location Current document main c Option Search criteria Normal 4 4 C Match case Match whole word C Open file before replacing Function buttons The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open From the Edit menu select Find From the Edit menu select Replace Description of each area 1 Search text Designate characters to find You can directly enter the characters into the text box maximum characters 1024 or select from the input history in the drop down list maximum numbers of the history 10 If this dialog box is opened from the panel with the character being selected the selected characters are shown by default If this dialog box is opened from the Editor words variable function at the caret position are shown by default You can select the following wildcard by using the gt butto
215. ctronics Corporation Product License MRRRRRRRE Module Name Version Integrated Development Environment Framework Vx xx 8x KX KKK KKH Debug Tool Common Interface VRE RE KK REX RKKH Device Information Common Interface VR RK RE KK REX RXKH 850 Build tool CA850 Plug in V RK RR KK REX RXKH C4850 WHER 2 78KO Build tool C478K0 Plug in VR KHORK KE KKK KKK RL78 78K0R Build tool C478K0R Plug in VRK RE KK REX KEKE RX Build tool CC RX Plug in VRELRE KK REX RXKH V850E 2 Build tool CX Plug in VE RK RR KK REX RXKH R8C Build tool NC30 Plug in V RK RR KK KKK RXKH 78K0 Emulator Plug in VRKLRE KK REX RXKH RL 8 78K0R Emulator Plug in VRE RR KK REX KEKH RL78 78K0R Simulator Plug in VRK RE KK REX KKH Explanation Main window of the integrated dev Common interface libraries to use d Common library for getting a devic Build tool plug in to use CA850 co Build tool Build tool plug in to use CA78KO c Build tool plug in to use CA78KOR Build tool plug in to use CC RX co Build tool plug in to use CX compil Build tool plug in to use NC30 com Debug tool plug in to use 78K0 Em Debug tool plug in to use RL78 78 Debug tool plug in to use RL78 78 Copy All Text The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open From the Help menu select About Product name Description of each area 1 Produ
216. current project or file If they are not saved confirm the user whether to save them R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 117 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 Favorite Projects APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Shows the cascading menu to open and add to your favorite project 1 path Opens the project added by 1 Register to Favorite Project in Favorite Projects If no project is added 1 Favorite Project is shown 2 path Opens the project added by 2 Register to Favorite Project in Favorite Projects If no project is added 2 Favorite Project is shown 3 path Opens the project added by 3 Register to Favorite Project in Favorite Projects If no project is added 3 Favorite Project is shown 4 path Opens the project added by 4 Register to Favorite Project in Favorite Projects If no project is added 4 Favorite Project is shown 1 Register to Favorite Project The current project path is added to 1 path in Favorite Projects 2 Register to Favorite Project The current project path is added to 2 path in Favorite Projects 3 Register to Favorite Project The current project path is added to 3 path in Favorite Projects 4 Register to Favorite Project The current project path is added to 4 path in Favorite Projects aoa Shows the cascading menu to add a project to a subproject Add Subproject Opens the Add Existing Subproject dia
217. d You can jump to the line of the source file that generated the error from the error message output when build ing b Display of help Displays the help with regard to the displayed message or the message at the current caret by selecting Help for Message in the context menu or pressing F1 key while the caret is in the line where the warning message or the error message is displayed c Save of log The contents displayed on the currently selected tab can be saved in a text file txt by selecting Save Output tab name As from File menu and opens the Save As dialog box messages on the tab that is not selected will not be saved 2 Tab selection area Select tabs that messages are output from Tabs that are displayed are as follows Tab Name Description Build Tool Displays the messages output by the build tool when a build rebuild or batch build is executed Caution Rapid Build Displays the messages output by the build tool when a rapid build is executed Debug Tool Displays the message output from the debug tool Code Generator Displays the messages output by the code generator Program Analyzer Displays the message output from the analyze tool Find References Displays a list of locations of references to functions variables output by the ana lyze tool See the CubeSuite Integrated Development Environment User s Manual Anal ysis for details about this tab Find
218. d The following charac ters cannot be used lt gt The folder name with the invalid path is designated The characters lt gt cannot be used for the file name and folder name The folder name is invalid Specify a folder other than the project folder A folder inside the project folder is specified The folder that you will save the project is the same to the project folder Set another place The target project folder for packing is in the folder specified as the location to save the project Exam ple A project folder is specified as the top folder of the packing target and a folder above the project folder is specified as the location to save the project folder When the path name is too long to be shown in the text area is displayed The absolute path pops up when the mouse cursor is hovered over gt 3 Top folder of pack target area Specify the top folder of the packing target Enter the absolute path directly or click the Browse button and select the location via the Browse For Folder dialog box a Button Browse Browse For Folder dialog box appears When a folder is selected the path is shown in the text box Remarks 1 R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Feb 01 2013 Up to 247 characters can be entered in Top folder of pack target area When the input violates any restriction the following messages are shown Messa
219. d TektronixldTag This function saves the memory data in ID tagged Techtronics format Specification format debugger Upload TektronixIdTag fileName addressi1 address2 force False Argumeni s Argument Description fileName Specify a file name address1 Specify an upload start address address2 Specify an upload end address force Specify whether to overwrite True Overwrite False Do not overwrite default Return value If the memory data was uploaded successfully True If there was an error when uploading the memory data False Detailed description This function saves the memory data from address1 to address2 in D tagged Techtronics format Example of use gt gt gt debugger Upload TektronixIdTag C test testIdTagTektronix hex 0x1000 0x2000 True True gt gt gt R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 423 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX G Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS debugger Watch GetValue This function refers a variable value Specification format debugger Watch GetValue variableName encode Encoding Default watchOption WatchOption Auto Argumeni s Argument Description Specify the variable name register name or I O register name SFR register name to ref variableName erence encode watchOption Return value Specify the encoding to use when displaying strings By default
220. d closes this dialog box The new toolbar appears in the list on the User Setting dialog box s Toolbars tab with its check box selected Cancel Ignores the setting and closes this dialog box R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 252 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Rename Toolbar dialog box This dialog box is used to edit the name of a toolbar created by the user Figure A 66 Rename Toolbar Dialog Box Rename Toolbar Toolbar name 1 1 ItraToolbar1 Function buttons 4 The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open Inthe Toolbars tab of the User Setting dialog box select the name of a user toolbar and then click the Rename button Description of each area 1 Toolbar name Edit the toolbar name directly via the keyboard By default the name of the currently selected toolbar is shown Function buttons OK Changes the selected toolbar to the specified name and closes this dialog box Cancel Ignores the setting and closes this dialog box R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 253 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Customize Keyboard dialog box This dialog box is used to assign shortcut keys to the various commands Figure A 67 Customize Keyboard Dialog Box Customize Keyboard Specify a Com
221. d from the file system Save Project and Development Tools as Package R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Feb 01 2013 Saves a set of the project and this product by copying them in a folder 2tENESAS Page 118 of 491 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE e Build The Build menu shows menu items for the build process Note that only menu items that are displayed when the target project type is a debug dedicated project see APPENDIX F USING AN EXTERNAL BUILD TOOL are shown here See the CubeSuite Integrated Development Environment User s Manual Build for the information about building for a project other than a debug dedicated project Build Project Runs a build of the project see F 5 1 Runa build A build of a subproject is also run when it is added in the project Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Rebuild Project Runs a rebuild of the project see F 5 2 Runa rebuild A rebuild of a subproject is also run when it is added in the project Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Clean Project Runs a clean of the project see F 5 3 Run a clean A clean of a subproject is also run when it is added in the project Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Rapid build Toggles the rapid build function see F 5 4 Runa rapid build between enabled default and disabled Build
222. d install progress Update items are downloaded and then the are installed A progress bar on the Update in progress dialog box dis plays the download and install progress The download and install progress of each tool appear in the Update status area Figure 2 23 Update in progress Dialog Box Downloading Update in progress Downloading updates Update status Downloading CubeSuite Vx xx xx 29 complete Downloading 172 COO J R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 25 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 24 Update in progress Dialog Box Installing Update in progress Installing updates Update status Complete downloading CubeSuite Vxx xx xx Downloading CubeSuite Update Manager Vxx xx xx Complete downloading CubeSuite Update Manager Vxx xx xx Installing CubeSuite Vax xx xx CubeSuite Vix xx xx is installed Installing CubeSuite Update Manager Vixx xx xx Installing 2 2 Cancel Cautions 1 You must have administrator privileges to perform installation 2 If a emulator USB driver is installed on Windows Vista Windows 7 or Windows 8 the warn ing dialog box may appear Go to 7 5 Download only Update items selected on the Select updates page appears on the Download only page Figure 2 25 Download only Page CubeSuite Update Manager Select updates l7 9 q All Download only ny ty RL78 G13 1
223. d size xxxKB This is update for CubeSuite Update Manager R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 34 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 40 Select updates Page Q T QJ Select updates It s strongly recommended that you apply the updates to keep software up to date EXDownload and install EXDownload only Total OUpdate s OKB Select all CubeSuite O amp CubeSuite Vxx xxxx Download size xxxKB This is update for CubeSuite Detail R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 35 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 5 Start CubeSuite When CubeSuite is installed and started for the first time select Windows Start menu gt gt Programs gt gt Renesas Electronics CubeSuite gt gt CubeSuite Remark In Windows 8 double click on CubeSuite on the start screen The following Main window will be opened Figure 2 41 Main Window Start Panel CubeSuite Start File Edit view Project Build Debug Tool Window Help sot A M E Xf eB 7 UA BO Project Tree ax E stat 9 3 8 Learn About CubeSuite We recommend reading the tutorial to find out what can be done in CubeSuite ele The tutorial contains the information on how to effectively use CubeSuite Create New Project Anew project can be created new project can also be created by reusing the file configuration registered to an existing p
224. d successfully True If there was an error when uploading the memory data False Detailed description This function saves the memory data from address1 to address2 in D tagged Motorola format Example of use gt gt gt debugger Upload MotorolaldTag C test testIdTagMotorola hex 0x1000 0x2000 True True gt gt gt R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 421 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX G Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS debugger Upload Tektronix This function saves the memory data in Techtronics format Specification format debugger Upload Tektronix fileName addressi1 address2 force False Argumeni s Argument Description fileName Specify a file name address1 Specify an upload start address address2 Specify an upload end address force Specify whether to overwrite True Overwrite False Do not overwrite default Return value If the memory data was uploaded successfully True If there was an error when uploading the memory data False Detailed description This function saves the memory data from address1 to address2 in Techtronics format Example of use gt gt gt debugger Upload Tektronix C test testTektronix hex 0x1000 0x2000 True True gt gt gt R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 422 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX G Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS debugger Uploa
225. data has been used up TraceMode FullStop Stop writing trace data after all trace data has been used up TraceMode NonStop Continue writing trace data even if all trace data has been used up Reference Set value Caution If a PM workspace is converted to a CubeSuite project then there will be no debugging tool in the main project For this reason None will be returned if the main project is the active project Detailed description This property sets or reference the tracing options of the debug tool R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 479 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX G Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS Example of use gt gt gt print debugger XTrace Addup False gt gt gt debugger XTrace Addup True gt gt gt print debugger XTrace Addup True gt gt gt R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 480 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX G Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS G3 11 CubeSuite Python event Below is a list of CubeSuite Python events Table G 11 CubeSuite Python Event build BuildCompleted This event informs that a build has been completed R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 481 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX G Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS build BuildCompleted This event informs that a build has been completed Handler format build BuildCompleted sender e Handl
226. ded to the end 3 Fora plug in not read in this is shown as 4 This is only shown when projects are opened when there is subproject line them up R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Feb 01 2013 stENESAS Page 262 of 491 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 5 These are not shown when the project type is a debug dedicated project 6 This is only shown when this dialog box is opened by the Detail Version Information button in Message dialog box Edit menu Detail Version Information dialog box dedicated items Copy Copies the selected characters in the detail version information area to the clip board Select All Context menu Copy Selects all the characters in the detail version information area Copies the selected characters in the detail version information area to the clip board Select All Function buttons Selects all the characters in the detail version information area Button Function Copy All Text Copies all the characters displayed in the detail version information area to the clip board OK Closes this dialog box Help Displays the help of this dialog box R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Feb 01 2013 2tENESAS Page 263 of 491 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE One Point Advice dialog box This dialog box is used to display tips for using CubeSuite Figure A 72 One Point Advice Dialog Box id Do you know
227. dency files in project tree 4 gt O Output quality report file when build is successful 5 gt Enable Break Sound 6 gt Observe downloaded load module files changing 7 B V Add source files automatically for the Debug Only project only 8 i gt Initialize Settings Function buttons Cancel Apply Help The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open From the Tool menu select Options Description of each area 1 Enable Rapid Build Enables the rapid build Nte feature default Does not use the rapid build feature Note This feature automatically begins a build when the source file being edited is saved Enabling this feature makes it possible to perform builds while editing source files If this feature is used we recommend saving frequently after editing source files For details on the rapid build feature see the following When the target project type is other than a debug dedicated project CubeSuite Integrated Development Environment User s Manual Build When the target project type is a debug dedicated project F 5 4 Run a rapid build R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 226 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 2 Observe registered files changing Start s a rapid build when a source file registered in the project is edited or saved by an external t
228. dialog box are stored All files in the project folder All files in the folders specified in the Additional include paths and Additional library paths properties of the build tool and the C source file or assembler source file that is the build target Files added to the project 2 If you save the project only in the Pack Settings dialog box this folder is not created 3 Files that are not in the top folder of the packing target are stored in folders for each identical path 4 The digits in the folder name are adjusted by the required number of folders For example for 2 digits the name is 01 02 and so on Cautions 1 Information on the start menu is not a subject of the save When using the save location tools follow the content of readme txt in the save folder 2 Information on the tool installation is not a subject of the save To uninstall the save location tools delete the entire save folder 3 Custom settings made in the Option dialog box and User Setting dialog box are not saved When you use tools from the saved file the environment will be configured to the default set tings 4 Tools in the save folder cannot be updated R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 80 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 5 Files not placed inside the top folder of the packing target that is specified in the Pack Settings dialog box are copied to the Copy_files folder when saving so when using the sa
229. dialog box will open Figure F 9 Add File Dialog Box Adding a File Add File File type C source file c Header file h inc Assemble file asm s Python script file py Text file txt All files Empty C source file main c File Jocat ns D work DebuaOny B ier In the dialog box specify the file name to be created newly and the location in which it is created and then click the OK button The project tree after adding the file and folder will look like the one below Note that the location of the file added below the File node depends on the current settings of Toolbar in the Project Tree panel Figure F 10 Project Tree Panel After Adding File main c Project Tree EJ E Er DebugOnly Project J uPD7031314 Microcontroller w A Pin Configurator Design Tool A None Build Tool 2 850 Simulator Debug Tool g File Fl Download files R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 313 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX F USING AN EXTERNAL BUILD TOOL Figure F 11 Project Tree Panel After Adding Folder src Project Tree By double clicking the added file name file directly DebugOnly Project F uPD7031314 Microcontroller E A Pin Configurator Design Tool A None Build Tool 850 Simulator Debug Tool E g File ral Download files out a out on the project tree you can open the Edi
230. down list R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 184 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 4 Option area This area is shown when the Option button is clicked not shown by default The following options can be designated as search criteria a Search criteria Select one of the following items from the drop down list Item Operation Normal Finds the characters designated in Search text Wild card Finds using the wildcard designated in Search text Note Regular Expressions Finds using the regular expressions designated in Search text Note This item is enabled only when the Editor panel is focused b File type Specify File types to search Select one of the following items from the drop down list Item Operation Source files Extensions Files to find are limited to the source files txt Files to find are limited to the text files kk Finds all the files Note Show extensions of the source file added to the Project Tree panel Note that the searches can be operated by limiting the search criteria by directly entering the file name in the text box maximum characters 1024 If this is the case the wildcard can be used and multiple file names can be specified by separating them with Remark Up to 10 items for the input history are recorded in the drop down list c Match case Finds the designated characters i
231. e Argumeni s Argument Description fileName Specify a download file offset Specify an offset default 0 append Specify whether to make an additional download True Perform additional download False Perform overwrite download default flashErase Specify whether to initialize a flash memory before download True Initialize a flash memory before download False Do not initialize a flash memory before download default Caution If two or more parameters are specified then three parameters must be specified It is not possible to specify only fileName and offset Return value If a binary file was downloaded successfully True If there was an error when downloading a binary file False Detailed description When using the memory bank this function downloads hex files in memory bank format Example of use gt gt gt debugger Download HexBank C test testModule hex True gt gt gt debugger Download HexBank C test testModule2 hex 0x1000 True False gt gt gt R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 382 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX G Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS debugger Download HexldTag This function downloads a hex file with ID tag Specification format debugger Download HexIdTag fileName offset 0 append False flashErase False Argumeni s Argument Description fileName Specify a download file offse
232. e Project Convert Setting dialog box for details about each setting item c Convert the CubeSuite project The HEW project is converted to the CubeSuite project When opening from a HEW project file the project is converted in accordance with the following rules A HEW project is converted to a project with the same name as the original project After conversion the project file name will be project name mtpj Remarks 1 The target for conversion is the file structure information of the HEW project file configurations build options file exclusion and link order information The configurations and build options information is not the target for conversion if the build tool is dif ferent from the HEW project file 2 When build options have been added from the version of the target build tools in the HEW project to the version of the build tools after conversion the added options are set to the build tools default values after conversion 3 The project files after conversion are created in the folder specified in the Project Convert Setting dialog box 4 Configurations of the HEW project are replaced with build modes of CubeSuite after conversion Any characters that are not allowed in a CubeSuite folder name however lt gt will be ay 29 8 R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 63 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS replaced by underscores _ The build mode
233. e area using the standard text color Displays items selected via the Setting place area with a user defined text color The Font color button is enabled c Use default background color Displays items selected via the Setting place area using the standard background color Displays items selected via the Setting place area with a user defined background color The Background Color button is enabled d Buttons Font Color The Edit Colors Dialog Box opens Specify the text color of the item selected via the Setting place area Note however that this button will be disabled if the Use default color check box is selected Background Color The Edit Colors Dialog Box opens Specify the background color of the item selected via the Setting place area Note however that this button will be disabled if the Use default background color check box is selected Reset Selected Item Colors Resets the color information for the item selected via the Setting place area to the defaults R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 219 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Figure A 51 Edit Colors Dialog Box Edit Colors Custom colors p op ip ep ep ip i ep pp Define Custom Colors gt gt 2 Display example area Display sample text using the color and font settings from the Color options area By default the string AaBbCc is show
234. e Dependent Information me when it s finished Flash Programming Tool Update Manager O Notify me but do not automatically download Others them Do nothing Internet Connections You can change the proxy settings used to check and download updates in the 1 Internet Options in Control Panel Remarks 1 During the download the icon appears in the Task Tray 2 If the check does not find any updates the auto download function exits 3 The update notification function After downloading the target update in 2 the update notification feature displays an icon ae notifying of the update in the Task Tray If any of the updates that were found for the first time during this auto check the i icon appears This function is executed without performing the download when in the Update Manager Options dialog box Notify me but do not automatically download them is selected This can be specified for each category Figure 2 30 Update Manager Options Dialog Box Update Manager Options Automatic Updates CubeSuite can check for updates regularly Category If updates are found CubeSuites r O Device Dependent Information Flash Programming Tool Update Manager Others Download updates automatically and notify me when it s finished Notify me but do not automatically download them Do nothing Internet Connections e You can change the proxy settings used to check and download update
235. e Specify a download file address Specify a download start address append Specify whether to make an additional download True Perform additional download False Perform overwrite download default flashErase Specify whether to initialize a flash memory before download True Initialize a flash memory before download False Do not initialize a flash memory before download default Caution If two or more parameters are specified then three parameters must be specified It is not possible to specify only fileName and address Return value If a binary file was downloaded successfully True If there was an error when downloading a binary file False Detailed description This function downloads data in binary format Example of use gt gt gt debugger Download Binary C test testModule bin 0x1000 False True gt gt gt debugger Download Binary C test testModule2 bin 0x2000 True False gt gt gt R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 376 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX G Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS debugger Download Binary64Kb This function downloads a binary file in within 64 KB format Specification format debugger Download Binary64Kb fileName address append False flashErase False Argumeni s Argument Description fileName Specify a download file address Specify a download start address append Specify whether to make
236. e as CA850 but the parameter does not exist in CX so it is changed to other one and the like the information is output for each build mode in the format shown below Command name Tab name of build tool property Option of CA850 project gt Option of CX project This item is output only when the corresponding option exists CA850 options are converted into CX options which have the same function The option that has the same function and different name is not output Build modes are output in the following order DefaultBuild user created build mode DefaultBuild is the build mode that CubeSuite provides by default See CubeSuite Integrated Development Environment User s Manual Build for detail about a build mode R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 55 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 7 8 Convert a CubeSuite project into a CubeSuite project You can convert a CubeSuite project into a CubeSuite project Select Open Project from the Project menu with CubeSuite and then select a project file cspj 1 Select the settings for conversion When a CubeSuite project file is selected the following message dialog box will open Figure 2 62 Message Dialog Box Question Q0 268001 p Open the CubeSuite project without changing the settings IF you select No open a dialog to change other device or other compiler If you select the Yes button the C
237. e con version the project source files and complete project are packed up and saved However the main project is selected this item will be invalid 3 See Project Convert Setting dialog box for details about each setting item c Convert the CubeSuite project The PM project is converted to the CubeSuite project PM projects are converted to CubeSuite projects according to the rules below The PM workspace is not converted PM project groups are divided into projects with the same name as the project group After conversion the project file name will be project group name mitpj PM projects are converted to subprojects with the same name as the original project After conversion the subproject file name will be project name cssp After conversion the first subproject shown in the Project Tree will be the active project After conversion the link order in PM is not held Figure 2 74 PM Project Conversion Image PM workspace before conversion CubeSuite project after conversion Workspace WS Project PG1 Open this project a p proj Project group PG1 Active project Subproject P11 _ Project P11 a L Subproject P12 L Project P12 This project is Project PG2 Me registered in recently Project group PG2 L Subproject P21 used projects L Project P21 Remarks 1 After conversion CubeSuite opens the project that was converted from the PM
238. e displayed in this color in the Output panel and file names with warnings are displayed in this color in the Project Tree panel Background color Default color R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 217 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 AaBbCc Example Font color APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Red Background color LightGray Description Error messages are displayed in this color in the Output panel and file names with errors are displayed in this color in the Project Tree panel Reserved word AaBbCc Font color Brown Background color Default color The reserved words of your compiler assembler are displayed in this color in the Editor panel Comment AaBbCc Font color Green Background color Default color Comments in the case of a C source file are displayed in this color in the Editor panel String literal Font color Gray Background color Default color String literals are displayed in this color in the Editor panel Control code Font color Teal Background color Default color Control characters are displayed in this color in the Output panel Highlight AaBbCc Font color White Background color Magenta Highlighted areas in plug in products and the like are displayed in this color Changed value Font color Tan Background color Cream Values c
239. e like and drop it onto the File node on the project tree Figure F 7 Project Tree Panel Adding a File Project Tree UR DebugOnly Project F uPD7031314 Microcontroller A Pin Configurator Design Tool A None Build Tool X Simulator Debug Tool Drop a file s here File j Download files out aout b Add a folder Drag a folder s from Explorer or the like and drop it onto the File node on the project tree The Add Folder and File dialog box will open Figure F 8 Add Folder and File Dialog Box Add Folder and File File type Two or more selections C source file c Header file h inc Assemble file asm s Object module file obj o Python script file py Text file txt Subfolder level to search In the dialog box select the types of the files to be added and specify the number of levels of the subfolder to be added to the debug dedicated project At this time you can select multiple file types by left clicking while holding down the Ctrl or Shift key If nothing is selected it is assumed that all types are selected And then click the OK button R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 312 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX F USING AN EXTERNAL BUILD TOOL 2 Creating and adding an empty file Select the File node on the project tree and then select Add gt gt Add New File from the context menu The Add File
240. e name then an error will be displayed and processing will end If build mode name is omitted then the build will use the DefaultBuild If project file name is omitted then an error will be displayed and processing will end npAplug in name plug in name Start CubeSuite without displaying the Main window and without loading the specified plugins in the Plugins folder In plug in name specify the name of the folder in which each DLL file is saved Note that folder names are case insensitive You can specify multiple plugin names by separating them with commas You can also specify the np option itself multiple times Each DLL will not be loaded If the plugin specified by this option does not exist it will be ignored If project file name is omitted then an error will be displayed and processing will end Start CubeSuite without displaying the Main window and without loading any of the specified plugins in the Plugins folder If this is specified together with the np option then this option will take prece dence If project file name is omitted then an error will be displayed and processing will end plug in optionA plug in parameter Specify an option for the plug in see 3 Plug in Options project file name Start CubeSuite without displaying the Main window with the specified project file loaded Remark While CubeSuite is running press the Ctrl
241. e shows how to define named and numbered replacement patterns Table E 8 List of Substitutions Character Description Substitutes the last substring matched by group number 1 decimal The second group is number 2 2 and so on For example the replacement pattern a 1b inserts the string a followed by the substring matched by the first capturing group if any followed by the string b Substitutes a copy of the entire match itself Substitutes a copy of the entire match itself R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 stENESAS Page 305 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX E REGULAR EXPRESSIONS SYNTAX Substitutes a single literal Remarks 1 The character is not recognized as a metacharacter within a replacement pattern 2 patterns are not recognized within regular expression matching patterns Within regular expressions designates the end of the string E 8 Other Constructs The following table describes other regular expression constructs Table E 9 List of Other Constructs Constructs Description Encapsulates a fixed string of characters Provides a call to a lexical macro The use of a WordMacro which is similar to w would appear as Word Macro Inline comment inserted within a regular expression The comment terminates at the first closing parenthesis character Provides an alternation construct that matches any one of the terms separated by the vertical bar charac
242. eSuite V2 00 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 Check the environment required for installation The following must be installed to allow operation of this product the window shows any that are not yet installed Microsoft NET Framework 4 Microsoft Visual C 2010 SP1 runtime libraries Remark If all of the above are installed this window does not appear Figure 2 2 Confirm Settings Window Installer preparation 1 2 Confirm Settings NET Framework and Visual C runtime libraries are required to run CubeSuitet cuesuites Install following item s Microsoft Visual C 2010 SP1 Redistributable Package x86 Microsoft NET Framework 4 Click Next button to start installation CubeSuite z Check the information then click the Next button 3 Check the progress of installation of required software Follow the installation wizard to install the software The installation progress appear in the Install Status area in this windows Remark If the required software is already all installed this window does not appear Figure 2 3 Install Window Installer preparation 2 2 Install Install Status Microsoft Visual C 2010 SP1 Redistributable Package x86 Installing CubeSuite After all required software is installed click the Next button Check the information then click the Next button R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 13 of 491 Feb 01 2013 Cub
243. eSuite V2 00 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Remark __ If this software installation fails or a restart is required a message to this effect appears and the instal lation cannot be continued the Next button is disabled If a restart is required restart Windows then begin the setup again from the Begin CubeSuite Setup button in the Preparing to Install page of step 1 above 4 Confirm the product information etc Product information etc appears Figure 2 4 Initial Window Renesas Electronics Microcontroller Development Tools Installer step 1 8 CubeSuite Shae dl te Welcome to the Renesas Electronics Microcontroller development tools setup program CubeSuite Vxxx kx Xxx 208x 20xx 20x Renesas Electronics Corporation Note Please end all Windows programs before executing this setup program CubeSuite ack Ceca Check the information then click the Next button 5 Confirm the software license agreement The installer asks if you agree to the SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT Figure 2 5 Software License Agreement Window Installer step 2 8 Software License Agreement THE END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT Please read the following end user license agreement EN CubeSuite sor ware LUCENSE AGREEMENT THIS SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT made and entered into by and between Renesas Electronics Corporation a Japanese corporation having its principal place of business at 2 6 2 Q Ote mac
244. ebugTool E1 Serial E1 Serial connect DebugTool E20Jtag E20 JTAG connect DebugTool E20Serial E20 Serial connect DebugTool EZ_Emulator EZ Emulator Return value If the debug tool was changed successfully True If there was an error when changing the debug tool False Detailed description This function changes the debug tool to the one specified by Debug Tool However the debug tool that can be changed differs depending on the using device Select Debug Tool on the project tree and select Using Debug Tool on the context menu And then confirm the debug tool that can be changed Caution Itis possible to specify non selectable emulators Only specify emulators that can be selected in CubeSuite s debugging tool R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 372 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX G Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS Example of use gt gt gt debugger DebugTool Change DebugTool Simulator True gt gt gt R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 373 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX G Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS debugger DebugTool GetType This function displays information about the debug tool Specification format debugger DebugTool GetType Argumeni s None Return value Debug tool type Type Description Simulator Simulator Minicube MINICUBE Minicube2 MINICUBE2 Serial connect Minicube2Jtag M
245. ed in text format Text file txt Text format Function buttons Save Saves the file as the designated file name Cancel Closes this dialog box R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 282 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Open Option Setting File dialog box This dialog box is used to select an option setting file to import to the General Font and Color category of the Option dialog box Figure A 80 Open Option Setting File Dialog Box Open Option Setting File y Look in O My Documents a My Music 2 my Pictures My Recent Documents 2 T Desktop My Documents My Computer a ae 3 File name Font and Color mtpu 4 vty Network Files of type Option Setting File mtpu Function buttons The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open In the General External Tools category of the Option dialog box click the Import button Description of each area 1 Look in area Select the folder that the option setting file exists When you first select a folder the folder is set to C Documents and Settings user name My Documents The second and subsequent times this defaults to the last folder that was selected 2 List of files area This area displays a list of files matching the conditions selected in Look in area and
246. ed project is included in your projects then builds rebuilds cleans will be run for that project using the build tool provided by CubeSuite see the CubeSuite Integrated Development Environment User s Manual Build R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 329 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX F USING AN EXTERNAL BUILD TOOL F 5 6 Stop running a build To stop running a build rebuild or batch build click the button on the toolbar Remark See the sections below for a build rebuild and batch build Build F 5 1 Runa build Rebuild F 5 2 Runa rebuild Batch build F 5 5 Runa batch build F 5 7 Save the build results to a file You can save the execution results of the build standard output and standard error from the external build tool used that displayed on the Output panel as a text file Select the Build Tool tab on the panel and then select Save Output Build Tool As from the File menu The Save As dialog box will open Figure F 35 Save As Dialog Box Save As Save in 850_DebuOnly D temp My Recent O WORK Documents File name Output Build Tool txt Mo Matierle Save as type Text File Ext J In the dialog box specify a text file name to be saved and the location in which the file is saved and then click the Save button R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 330 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX G Python CONS
247. ed when a packaged item is being used Remark When the selection violates any restriction the following messages are shown Select the device Because no device is selected for example a device category is selected it is not possible to determine the project type 3 Select session Select the session used in the new project from the drop down list Only the sessions in the HEW project that are linked to the target will appear in the drop down list Remark This item is displayed only when the HEW project is converted and there are multiple sessions in it R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 135 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 4 New project area Set the project to create a Kind of project Select the project type to create on Kind of project Remark This item will be invalid when a PM workspace is converted and the main project node is selected You can select the item below Application CC RX CA850 CX NC30 Localised support CA78KOR CA78K0 Select this to generate the ROMization module file CA850 CA78KOR load module file and hex file from C source files by using the build tool provided by CubeSuite The generated file will be the debug target If the build tool is NC30 Localised support sample startup programs are generated when the project is created C Application CC RX Select this to generate the load module file and hex file from a C source file only a file th
248. elect the item below RX V850 R8C Localised support RL78 78KOR 78KO 2 Using microcontroller area Select a microcontroller to use in the project a Microcontroller search box You can search a microcontroller selected in the list of microcontrollers simply b List of microcontrollers Select a microcontroller The microcontrollers that correspond to the microcontroller type selected in Microconiroller are listed and cat egorized by their nicknames The following information on the selected microcontroller that is used in the project is shown in the box at right Product Name On chip ROM size Kbytes RX Internal ROM size Kbytes V850 R8C Localised support RL78 78KOR 78K0 On chip RAM size Bytes RX Internal RAM size Bytes V850 R8C Localised support RL78 78KOR 78K0 Additional InformationNete Note Other information appears only when present R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 126 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE c Button Displays the CubeSuite Update Manager window When the microcontroller to be used does not appear in the list you can search for the microcontroller via the net work Caution This button is only enabled when this product is installed using the installer It is disabled when a packaged item is being used 3 Kind of project Select the project type to create on Kind of project You can select t
249. elected updates and starts the download process Figure A 4 Download only Page Download only 2 Total 1Update s xxx KB m4 CubeSuitet CubeSuite Vxx_xx_xx 2 Download size xxx KB This is update for CubeSuite Detail The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area How to open From the CubeSuite Update Manager window menu area click Download only From the Select updates page main area click Download only Description of each area 1 Button Download Begins the download This button is disabled if no updates are selected 2 Update Selection area Displays a list of items to update The following information is displayed for each update Category Displays the category of the update Updates with the same category are displayed together Title Displays the title of the update Download size Displays the download size of the update Summary Displays a summary of the update information Detail This appears if there is detailed information about the update Selecting it will display details in a browser R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 100 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Finish page This page displays lists of successful canceled and failed updates Figure A 5 Finish Page gt a Finish R 5 Finish updating CubeSuite Legend Download E
250. emal RAM size Bytes 61440 E vPD70F3745 1 44pin ie EEE We VE5DES HES h VE50ES HF3 Ht VE50ES HG3 Lo i sO v Kind of project pplication CA850 Project name Place C Documents and Settings xxxxxx My Documents Make the project folder C Pass the file composition of an existing project to the new project Set the items in the order below 1 Select the microcontroller type Select the microcontroller type to use in the project on Microcontroller You can select the item below RX V850 R8C Localised support RL78 78KOR 78KO 2 Select the microcontroller Select the microcontroller to use in the project on the Using microcontroller area If your microcontroller is not in the Using microcontroller area click the Update button You can open the CubeSuite Update Manager window and check for microcontroller information updates via the network Caution The Updaite button is only enabled when this product is installed using the installer It is dis abled when a packaged item is being used R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 41 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 3 Select the project type Select the project type to create on Kind of project You can select the item below Application CC RX CA850 CX NC30 Localised support CA78KOR CA78K0 Select this to generate the ROMization module file CA850 CA78KO
251. ens the Add File dialog box create a file with the selected type and add it to the project A file extension is assigned to the new file and it is opened by the application Closes the currently open project Close Project If the currently open project or its files have been modified then the program will ask if you would like to save your changes Close File Closes the Editor panel currently in focus If the file has been modified then the program will ask if you would like to save your changes Saves the settings of the currently open project to a project file Save Project Save Project As Opens the Save Project As dialog box in order to save the settings of the cur rently open project to a project file with a different name Saves the file that is currently in focus Save Target Target Save Option Opens the Save Settings dialog box to set the encoding and newline code to use for the file being edited in the Editor panel Save Target As Opens the Save As dialog box in order to save the contents of the file currently in focus with a different name Save All Saves all files being updated in the Editor panel and the project Page Setup Opens the Page Setup dialog box provided by Windows for printing R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 113 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX
252. enu item displays the selected menu item button by text only the icon will not be displayed Image and Text Checking this menu item displays the selected menu item button by both text and icon Begin a Group Inserts separator just before the selected menu item button Recently Used This item is not supported in this version Figure A 69 Add Command Dialog Box Add Command Choose the command to add and click OK Categories Commands File View Build Debug Project ProjectTree Output Edit All Commands a A Exit J View J Project Tree Property z R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Feb 01 2013 2tENESAS Page 257 of 491 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Function buttons Button Function Restores the arrangement of menu items or toolbar buttons belonging to the category currently selected in the Choose a menu or toolbar to rearrange area to its default state Finishes the arrangement of commands and closes this dialog box R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 258 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 Version Information dialog box APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE This dialog box is used to displays versions of CubeSuite and each plug in product Function buttons Figure A 70 Version Information Dialog Box Version Information EN CubeSuite CubeSuite Vicoooao xx xxx xxxx 20xx 20xx Renesas Ele
253. er there are suspended installations If there are suspended installations then if a related tool is running a Message dialog box appears After closing the tool click the Retry button If a related tool is not running a Message dialog box appears Click the Yes button Update Manager will perform the update After the update is performed the CubeSuite Update Manager window closes and the tool that was shut down is restarted R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 30 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 4 5 Displaying the update history In the menu area of the CubeSuite Update Manager window select Review update history The History page appears From this page you can install download files including uploading to another PC or delete them Figure 2 32 History Page CubeSuite Update Manager Select updates ED i lt qo All WY History v I RL78 G13 16KB gt lt R5F1006AA You can save disk space by deleting downloaded files Also you may copy the files to other PCs Update to update Download and install G Delet orbal Select all Copy Delete Option Legend Download Instal Success Suspended Failed Review update history Restore hidden updates Change settings Help oes CubeSuite Update Manager Ode Title State Date O CubeSuite Vx xxxx a January XX XXXX XXXXXX e Monday January xx XXXX XXXXXX AM Exit Cube
254. er argument s Argument Description sender The sender of the build event are passed e The parameters at the end of build execution are passed Return value None Detailed description This event informs that a build has been completed Example of use gt gt gt def buildCompleted sender e print Error 0 format e Error print BuildError e HasBuildError ToString print BuildWarning e HasBuildWarning ToString print BuildCancelled e Cancelled ToString gt gt gt build BuildCompleted buildCompleted Event connection gt gt gt build All True Error None BuildError False BuildWarning False BuildCancelled False True gt gt gt gt gt gt build File C sample src test1l c Error None BuildError False BuildWarning False BuildCancelled False True i gt gt gt R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 482 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX G Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS gt gt gt build Clean Error None BuildError False BuildWarning False BuildCancelled False True gt gt gt R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 483 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX G Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS G4 Cautions for Python Console 1 Caution for Japanese input The Japanese input feature cannot be activated from the Python Console To enter Japanese text write
255. er part of CubeSuite Places in the upper part of the target panel Places in the left part of the target panel R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 stENESAS Page 82 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Right of Places in the right part of the target panel Below Places in the bottom part of the target panel Center of Places in the target panel as a tab You can also double click the title bar of the window or right click and select Floating This docks the window at its former docking position You can adjust the size of windows docked to the main window by clicking and dragging the splitters 2 9 4 Displaying multiple panels Click on a panel you wish to view and drag it over another panel you wish to view simultaneously As described in 2 9 3 Docking windows a docking indicator appears Move the mouse pointer to J3 and release the mouse over the location where you wish to Ha place the panel left right top or bottom 2 9 5 Resetting the window layout From the Main window s View menu select Reset Layout The window layout is returned to its initial state Figure 2 93 Reset Layout Item View Project Tree Property Output gt 8 21 Pin Configurator gt Code Generator Preview paur Program Analyzer gt PythonConsole A Iag Jump Shift F12 e or Restore Docking Layout Rw Reset Layout R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 83
256. ess of the map area AccessSize This holds the access size of the map area MapTypeName This holds the type name of the map area Detailed description MapInfo is a class and it is the structure of the return value from the debugger Map Information function Example of use gt gt gt info debugger Map Information Execute Map Information function 0x00000000 O0x0003FF 32 Internal ROM area 0x00040000 0x00048F 8 Non map area 0x00049000 0x001003 8 Emulation ROM area 0x00100400 Ox03FF8F 8 Non map area Ox03FF9000 O0xX03FFEF 32 Internal RAM area Ox03FFF000 Ox03FFFF 8 I O register area gt gt gt print info 0 StartAddress 0 gt gt gt print EndAddress 262143 gt gt gt print AccessSize 32 gt gt gt print info 0 MapTypeName Internal ROM area info 5 StartAddress gt gt gt print 67104768 R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Feb 01 2013 Page 448 of 491 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX G Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS gt gt gt print info 5 EndAddress 67108863 gt gt gt print info 5 AccessSize 8 gt gt gt print info 5 MapTypeName I O register area gt gt gt R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 449 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX G Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS This class holds stack information return value of the debugger Where function Type class St
257. essage appears suggesting you update to the latest version If a restart is required a message to this effect also appears R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 18 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 2 Uninstalling CubeSuite You can uninstall CubeSuite using the CubeSuite Uninstaller 1 Launch CubeSuite Uninstaller From the Windows the Start menu select Programs gt gt Renesas Electronics CubeSuite gt gt Uninstaller The CubeSuite Uninstaller window is launched Remark In Windows 8 double click on Uninstaller on the start screen Figure 2 13 CubeSuite Uninstaller Window Renesas Electronics CubeSuite Uninstaller Please select the items to be uninstalled Product M CubeSuite CA78KO Vx xx CubeSuite CA78KOR Vx xx MV CubeSuite CA850 Vx xx V CubeSuite CC AX Vx xx xx V CubeSuite CX Vx xx CubeSuite Code Generator for V850 CubeSuite Devinfo_RL78_78K LTA CiiheSiiites Nevlnfn Pd CubeSuite Code Generator for RL78_78K Click the Select all button to select all the check boxes Click the Unselect all button to clear all the check boxes Click the Uninstall button 2 Confirm the uninstallation progress A progress bar displays the progress of the uninstallation The uninstallation progress of each tool appear in the progress details area Uninstall Abort Uninstallation CubeSui
258. estore hidden updates and then check again to see which updates you still need Download only Option Review update history Restore hidden updates Change settings so update for CubeSuite D S CubeSuite Vxx xx xx Download size xxxKB Help O amp CubeSuite Update Manager Vxx xx xx Exit Download size xxxKB This is update for CubeSuite Update Manager Vraa xx 2x 0c wou Renesas Electronics Corporation R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 33 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 1 Select updates Select the check boxes of updates in the Restore hidden updates page and click the Restore button Figure 2 38 Restore hidden updates Page Restore hidden updates k q lt q You can restore hidden updates and then check again to see which updates you still need E CubeSuite Vxx xx xx Download size xxx KB This is update for CubeSuite Detail O CubeSuite Update Manager Vxx xx xx Download size xxxKB This is update for CubeSuite Update Manager 2 Confirm that hidden updates are restored Confirm that the selected updates become unvisible on the Restore hidden updates page and become visible on the Select updates page Figure 2 39 Restore hidden updates Page r N Restore hidden updates b a EN lt j You can restore hidden updates and then check again to see which updates you still need CubeSuite Update Manager Vxx xx xx Downloa
259. et value Specify the value to set memoryOption Specify the unit to set The units that can be specified are shown below Type Description MemoryOption Byte Byte unit 8 bits default MemoryOption HalfWord Half word unit 16 bits RX V850 MemoryOption Word Word unit RL78 78K 16 bits RX V850 32 bits Return value If the memory was written successfully True If there was an error when writing the memory False Detailed description This function sets the value at the address specified by address according to memoryOption Example of use gt gt gt debugger Memory Read 0x100 0x10 gt gt gt debugger Memory Write 0x100 OxFF True gt gt gt debugger Memory Read 0x100 OxFF gt gt gt debugger Memory Write 0x100 OxFE MemoryOption HalfWord Flase gt gt gt R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 407 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX G Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS debugger Next This function performs procedure step execution Specification format debugger Next nextOption NextOption Source Argumeni s nextOption Specify the execution unit The units that can be specified are shown below Type Description NextOption Source Source line unit default NextOption Instruction Instruction unit Return value None Detailed description This function performs procedure step execution
260. et Escape special character b Word boundary n Line break s Whitespace Beginning of line Or Remark For details on regular expressions see APPENDIX E REGULAR EXPRESSIONS SYNTAX 2 Replace with Designate characters to be replaced You can directly enter the characters into the text box maximum characters 1024 or select from the input history in the drop down list maximum numbers of the history 10 3 Search location The following item will appear in the drop down list Current document Panel Name Finds in the panel which was last active and can be found If the panel which was lastly active cannot be found or the panel does not exist this item will be disabled Remark Up to 10 items for the input history are recorded in the drop down list 4 Option area This area is shown when the Option button is clicked not shown by default The following options can be designated as search criteria a Search criteria Select one of the following items from the drop down list Item Operation Normal Finds the characters designated in Search text Wild card Finds using the wildcard designated in Search text Regular Expressions Finds using the regular expressions designated in Search text b File type This item is disabled R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 188 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE c Match c
261. ether to throw an exception during the Python function is executed To use the try except statement set bool to True Example of use gt gt gt print common ThrowExcept False gt gt gt common ThrowExcept True R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 459 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX G Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS common UseRemoting This property sets and displays the setting for enabling or disabling the function for linking to an external tool while Python console is operating Specification format common UseRemoting bool Setting s Setting Description bool Set whether to enable or disable the function for linking to an external tool while Python console is operating True Enable the function for linking to an external tool default False Disable the function for linking to an external tool This will be True if the common EnableRemotingStartup property is set to True on star tup and False otherwise Reference Current set value Detailed description This property sets and displays the setting for enabling or disabling the function for linking to an external tool while Python console is operating Example of use s gt gt gt print common UseRemoting False gt gt gt common UseRemoting True R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 460 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX G Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS
262. ettings and closes this dialog box Displays the help of this dialog box R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 195 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Print Preview window This window is used to preview the file currently being displayed in the Editor panel before printing Remark This window can be zoomed in and out by moving the mouse wheel forward or backward while holding down the Ctrl key Figure A 40 Print Preview Window D Print Preview Toolbar be 2 S FQ g 58 C CubeSuite NewProject main c 75 void main void Start user code Do not edit comment generated here TMPO_Start 0 TMP1_Start 0 AD_Start raii 1U funci func2 End user code Do not edit comment generated here The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Toolbar Context menu How to open Focus the Editor panel and then select Print Preview from the File menu Description of each area 1 Preview area This window displays a form showing a preview of how and what is printed The file name fully qualified path and the page number are displayed at the page header and page footer The display differs according to whether the debug tool is or is not connected and when it is connected to whether the display is in normal display mode or mixed display mode Note however that co
263. ext editor or the like Does not start a rapid build when a source file registered in the project is edited or saved by an external text editor or the like default Remark This item is only enabled if the Enable Rapid Build check box is selected Cautions 1 The rapid build will not finish if this item is selected and the files to be built have been reg istered for automatic editing or overwriting e g by commands executed before or after the build If the rapid build does not finish unselect this item and stop the rapid build 2 If this item is selected a file that is registered in the project but does not exist a file grayed out will not be observed even if it is registered again by the Explorer etc To observe the file reload the project file or select this item again after unselecting this item and closing this dialog box 3 Show dependency files in project tree Displays the file group on which the source file depends on the project tree Does not display the file group on which the source file depends on the project tree default 4 Output quality report file when build is successful Output the quality report file when a build is successful Does not output the quality report file when a build is successful default Remarks 1 The quality report file is not output when a rapid build is executed a debug dedicated project is built and compiling or assembling is executed in file unit
264. f the Option dialog box click the button in the new registration area Description of each area 1 Look in area Select the location folder of the executable for the external tool to register from the drop down list 2 List of files area This area displays a list of files matching the conditions selected in Look in area and Files of type area 3 File name area Specify the name of the executable file for the external tool to register R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 287 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 4 Files of type area Select the type of the executable file for the external tool to register from the following drop down list Program files exe Executable format default All files All formats Function buttons Open Specifies the selected file in the Option dialog box Cancel Ignores the setting and closes this dialog box R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 288 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Select External Text Editor dialog box This dialog box is used to select the executable file of an external text editor Figure A 83 Select External Text Editor Dialog Box Select External Text Editor 1 4 Look in wyi Documents S My Music 2 Emy Pictures My Recent Emy videos Documents sample al l Desktop 7 My Documents 93 My Computer
265. faults to the last folder that was selected 2 List of files area File list that matches to the selections in Look in and Files of type is shown 3 File name area Specify the file name that you want to open R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 271 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 4 Files of type area Select the type of the file you want to open a When no project is opened All files All formats Project File mtpj Project file Project File for CubeSuite cspj Project file for CubeSuite Workspace File for HEW hws Workspace file for HEW Project File for HEW hwp Project file for HEW Workspace File for PM prw Workspace file for PM Project File for PM prj Project file for PM Text file txt All files Text format b When the target project type is other than a debug dedicated project All formats Project File mtpj Project file Project File for CubeSuite cspj Project file for CubeSuite Workspace File for HEW hws Workspace file for HEW Project File for HEW hwp Project file for HEW Workspace File for PM prw Workspace file for PM Project File for PM prj Project file for PM C source file c C language source file C source file cpp cc cp CC RX C language source file
266. file is read default F Disables automatic determination of the encoding when a file is read e Externally modified files This item allows you to specify the action to be taken for source files that are modified externally to the Cube Suite Prompt to reload the file When a file open in the text editor is modified externally to the CubeSuite a message dialog box will be displayed which asks you whether you wish to reload the file or not default If you click the Yes button on the message dialog box this will reload the file from disk losing all current changes to that file in the text editor If you click the No button on the message dialog box this will ignore the external changes and any existing modifications to that file in the text editor will remain Always reload the file This will automatically reload the file when it is modified externally Never reload the file This will ignore any externally modified changes to source files and will not reload the file R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 232 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE f Default file encoding This option is for the default file encoding that should be used when creating a new file in the Editor panel and automatic determination of encoding is disabled In addition this encoding is used when the file being opened has a file encoding that cannot be detected or is not supported in the Editor p
267. files area This area displays a list of files matching the conditions selected in Look in area and Files of type area 3 File name area Specify the name of the script file R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 293 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 4 Files of type area The following file type is displayed Python Script File py Python script file Function buttons Open Executes the specified script file Cancel Ignores the setting and closes this dialog box R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 294 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE CubeSuite Uninstaller window This window is used to specify one or more installed CubeSuite products to uninstall at once Figure A 86 CubeSuite Uninstaller Window Renesas Electronics CubeSuite Uninstaller Please select the items to be uninstalled Select all Unselect all oduct CubeSuite CA78KO Vinx CubeSuite CA78KOR Vi xx z Function buttons CubeSuite C4850 Vx xx CubeSuite CC AX Vx xx xx CubeSuite CX Vx xx CubeSuite Code Generator for RL 8_78K CubeSuite Code Generator for 850 CubeSuite Devinfo_RL78_78k CubeSuites Newinfa RY p JRIRIRIEIERIKRIRIKE CubeSuite The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open
268. fines the main function dbsct c For setting up standard sections hwsetup c For initializing hardware intprg c Defines interrupt functions iodefine h Defines I O registers lowlvl src Defines low level I O functions source file for assembler lowsrc c Defines low level I O functions lowsrc h Prototypes for low level I O functions resetprg c Defines initialization for C language sbrk c Defines the function for allocating the heap memory sbrk h Defines the heap size stacksct h Defines pragma for the stack typedefine h Defines typedefine for the types used in sbrk c etc vect h Prototypes for interrupt vector functions vecttbl c Defines the interrupt vector table R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 42 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS The files marked with OK in the Registration in Project Tree column are also registered in the project tree When necessary also register the files marked with in the project tree 4 Specify the project name and location to create the project file Specify the name of the project and the location to create the project file in Project name and Place If you don t create a folder with the project name under the specified location clear the Make the project folder check box Caution When directly entering the location to create the project file enter it as an absolute path 5 Specify
269. fully CubeSuite Device Information for 850 Uninstalling Uninstallation completed successfully CubeSuite NC30 Vx xx xx Uninstalling Uninstallation completed successfully All installations were completed successfully CubeSuite Click the Exit button to complete the uninstallation Caution If all products are uninstalled the CubeSuite Uninstaller will be also uninstalled automatically R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 20 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 3 Using the License Management Feature The license management feature registers and manages newly acquired licenses for CubeSuite and related tools on the host machine by starting the License Manager window using the method below Upon installation in the License registration window click the License Manager button From the Windows the Start menu select Programs gt gt Renesas Electronics CubeSuite gt gt License Manager Remark In Windows 8 double click on License Manager on the start screen The following functionality will be restricted if a license is not registered Below are the maximum code sizes that can be developed RX family 128 Kbytes V850 family 256 Kbytes R8C family Localised support 64 Kbytes RL78 family 64 Kbytes 78KOR microcontroller 64 Kbytes 78K0 microcontroller 64 Kbytes 2 3 1 Show license information When the License Manager window starts
270. function checks the connection status of the debug tool Example of use gt gt gt if debugger IsConnected True print OK True OK R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 397 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX G Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS debugger IsRunning This function checks the execution status of the user program Specification format debugger IsRunning Argumeni s None Return value If the user program is running True If the user program is not running False Detailed description This function checks the execution status of the user program Example of use gt gt gt if debugger IsRunning True print OK True OK R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 398 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX G Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS debugger Jump File debugger Jump Address This function displays each panel Specification format debugger Jump File fileName lineNumber 1 debugger Jump Address jumpType adddress 0 Argument s Argument Description fileName Specify the name of the file to display lineNumber Specify the line to display default 1 jumpType Specify the type of panel to display The panel types that can be specified are shown below Type Description JumpType Source Editor panel JumpType Assemble Disassemble panel JumpType Memory Memory panel
271. g a Debug dedicated Project Creating a debug dedicated project See F 2 Create a Debug dedicated Project Settings of the downloadfile See F 3 Add a File to a Project Executing builds linked Yes to an external build tool y No Settings of commands See F 4 Make Settings for Build Operations y Running a build L See F 5 Run a Build Yy v See the CubeSuite Integrated Development Debug phase Environment User s Manual Debug Caution The design tool code generator and the analyze tool are not available for a debug dedicated project R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 307 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX F USING AN EXTERNAL BUILD TOOL F 2 Create a Debug dedicated Project The creation of a debug dedicated project is performed with the Create Project dialog box that is opened by selecting Create New Project from the Project menu or Add gt gt Add New Subproject from the context menu after selecting the Project node on the project tree as well as the method of creating a project described in 2 6 2 Create a new project or 2 6 3 Add anew subproject To create a debug dedicated project however specify Debug Only with the Kind of project item on the Create Project dialog box Figure F 2 Create Project Dialog Box Creating a Debug dedicated Project
272. g absolute path for the external text editor directly via the keyboard up to 259 characters or click the Browse button and in the Select External Text Editor dialog box specify the name of the executable file This item is only enabled if the Use external text editor check box is selected R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 215 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 3 Startup options Specify the startup options without the line number for the external text editor up to 256 characters This item is only enabled if the Use external text editor check box is selected The following placeholders can be specified by the gt button If you wish to specify more than one option separate them by spaces FileName Passes the name of the file to display to the external text editor FilePath Passes the absolute path of the file to display to the external text editor FileRelativePath Passes the absolute path of the file from the project folder to display to the external text editor Line Passes the caret position line number to the external text editor 4 Startup options with line number Specify the startup options with the line number for the external text editor up to 256 characters This item is only enabled if the Use external text editor check box is selected The following placeholders can be specified by the gt button If you wish to specify
273. g box Applies all setting does not close this dialog box Displays the help of this dialog box R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Feb 01 2013 2tENESAS Page 214 of 491 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE General External Text Editor category Use this category to configure general settings relating to the external text editor Figure A 49 Option Dialog Box General External Text Editor Category General a E Startup and Exit General External Text Editor E Display 1 m T Editor Use external text editor ont and Color 2 j a extemal Tools P External text editor path a Eo ee CAWINDOWS system32 notepad exe Python Console 3 Feror Startup options Update FilePath 4 eHpiormpatan Startup options with line number FilePath FilePath File Path ZLine Line Number 5 p V Open in intemal editor during debug o t Function buttons Initialize All Settings Cancel Apply Help The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open From the Tool menu select Options Description of each area 1 Use external text editor Uses an external text editor as the text editor Uses the Editor panel as the text editor default 2 External text editor path Either type in the name of the executable file includin
274. g you to debug your programs efficiently Analysis You can analyze information while the program is executing and display information about the functions and vari ables Updates Communicate with the update server to get the latest version of this product R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 9 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 CHAPTER 1 GENERAL 1 3 System Configuration Below is shown an example of the system configuration Figure 1 1 System Configuration Host machine CubeSuite Design tools Build tools etc Supported target environments Simulator Supported target environments Emulator Y Target system Remark The emulator that can be connected differs depending on the microcontroller used in the project See CubeSuite Integrated Development Environment User s Manual Debug for details R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 10 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 CHAPTER 1 GENERAL 1 4 Operating Environment Below are the system requirements for this product 1 Hardware environment Processor At least 1 GHz support for hyper threading multi core CPU Main memory Atleast 1 GB 2 GB or higher for Windows 64 bit OS 2 GB or higher recommended Display Resolution at least 1 204 x 768 at least 65 536 colors Interface USB 2 0 2 Software environment Windows XP Only 32 bit OS Wind
275. gStartup False gt gt gt common EnableRemotingStartup True R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 457 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX G Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS common Output This property refers the execution result or the contents of an error Specification format common Output Setting s None Reference Execution result or an error message of the CubeSuite Python function strings Caution Error messages can only be referred to when the common ThrowExcept property is set not to throw an exception False Remark The reference content is retained until the next CubeSuite Python function call Detailed description This property refers the execution result or the contents of an error Example of use gt gt gt debugger Memory Read data 0x0 gt gt gt print common Output 0 R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 458 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX G Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS common ThrowExcept This property sets or refers whether to throw an exception during the Python function is executed Specification format common ThrowExcept bool Setting s Set whether to throw an exception during the Python function is executed True Throw an exception False Do not throw an exception default Reference Current set value Detailed description This property sets or refers wh
276. ge Description The folder name including the path is too long Make it within 247 characters The folder name is more than 247 characters The folder name is invalid The following charac ters cannot be used lt gt The folder name with the invalid path is designated The characters lt gt cannot be used for the file name and folder name Specify a folder that contains the project folder 2tENESAS A folder that does not contain the project folder is specified Page 206 of 491 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 2 When the path name is too long to be shown in the text area gt is displayed The absolute path pops up when the mouse cursor is hovered over gt Function buttons Button Function OK Closes this dialog box and packs and saves the project and this product to the designated condition Cancel Cancels the designated condition and closes the dialog box Help Displays the help of this dialog box R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Feb 01 2013 tENESAS Page 207 of 491 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Option dialog box This dialog box is used to configure the CubeSuite environment All settings made via this dialog box are saved as preferences for the current user Figure A 46 Option Dialog Box U ee 3 Startup and Exit 1 G Display G External Text Editor G Font and C
277. gger XRunBreak Set 10 TimeType S True gt gt gt info debugger XRunBreak Refer 10Second Periodic gt gt gt print info Value 10 gt gt gt print info TimeType S gt gt gt print info IsPeriodic True gt gt gt R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 453 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX G Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS XTimelnfo This class holds timer information return value of the debugger XTime function Type class XTimelInfo Value 0 IsCpuClock IsOverFlow Variable Variable Description Value This holds the timer measurement IsCpuClock This holds whether this is a CPU clock measurement or not True This is a CPU clock measurement False Otherwise IsOverFlow This holds whether an overflow has occurred or not True An overflow has occurred False An overflow has not occurred Detailed description XTimelnfo is a class and it is the structure of the return value from the debugger XTime function Example of use gt gt gt info debugger XTime 9820214200nsec gt gt gt print info Value 9820214200 gt gt gt print info IsCpuClock False gt gt gt print info IsOverFlow False gt gt gt R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 454 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX G Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS G 3 7 CubeSuite Python property common Below is a list of CubeSuite
278. gory The Commands executed in the project cleaning property in the Build category Description of each area 1 Text Edit texts in multiple lines By default the current value of the area that this dialog box is called from is reflected in this area Remark When the input violates any restriction the following message will be shown in the tooltip R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 173 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Message Description More than maximum number of restriction in the prop The numbers of input characters exceeds the erty that called this dialog box characters cannot be maximum number of restriction in the property that specified The current number of characters is dis called this dialog box played between brackets at the beginning of the line in excess of the limit 2 Placeholder The list of placeholders which can be specified for the area that this dialog box is called from is displayed ascend ing order Double click a row to surround the placeholder with percentage signs and display it in Text a Placeholder This area displays the placeholder b Value The string is displayed after replacement with the placeholder c Description This area displays the description of the placeholder Remark The placeholders which can be specified differ depending on the area that this dialog box is called from For the specific placeh
279. hanged via the execution of a user program are displayed in this color in the Memory panel CPU Register panel Local Variables panel SFR panel Watch panel Edit value Font color Blue Background color Default color Values forcibly modified by the user are displayed in this color in the Memory panel CPU Register panel Local Vari ables panel SFR panel Watch panel Current PC Font color Black Background color LightOrange The row with the current PC position is displayed in this color in the Editor panel Breakpoint Font color Black Background color SalmonPink The line at which a break point is set is displayed in this color in the Editor panel Update periodic Font color Pink Background color Default color Areas configured for real time display updates are shown in this color in the Memory panel and Watch panel Read or fetch Font color Default color Background color LightGreen Locations that have been read or fetched are displayed in this color in the Trace panel IECUBE IECUBE2 Simulator Font color Default color Background color Orange Locations that have been written are dis played in this color in the Trace panel IECUBE IECUBE2 Simulator Read and write Font color Default color Background color LightSkyBlue Locations that have been read and writ ten are displayed in this color
280. haracters into the text box maximum characters 1024 or select from the input history in the drop down list maximum numbers of the history 10 If this dialog box is opened from the panel with the character being selected the selected characters are shown by default If this dialog box is opened from the Editor panel words variable function at the caret position are shown by default You can select the following wildcard by using the gt button This is available when this dialog box is opened from the Editor panel and Wild card is selected in Search criteria Any single digit Zero or more of any character Any single character R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 183 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Any one character not in the set Any one character in the set You can select the following regular expressions by using the gt button This is available when this dialog box is opened from the Editor panel and Regular Expression is selected in Search criteria End of line Group capture Zero or more One or more Any single character Any one character not in the set Any one character not in the set Escape special character b Word boundary n Line break s Whitespace Beginning of line Or Remark For details on regular expressions see APPENDIX E REGULAR EXPRESSIONS SYNTAX 2 Replace w
281. he Help menu of CubeSuite then update items for the microcontroller of the project currently open in CubeSuite is automatically selected 2 Click Select all in the update selection area to select the check boxes of all updates 3 If Update Manager failed to obtain the information then the Error page appears 3 Download and insiall Update items selected on the Select updates page appears on the Download and install page Remark _ If there are the updates that must be installed together with the updates selected on the Select updates page a Message dialog box appears Click the Yes button on the Message dialog box to select the required updates R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 24 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 22 Download and install Page CubeSuite Update Manager Select updates a eat All Download and install nH B RL78 G13 16KB ms R5F1006AA Total 2Update s xxxKB Update Download and install Download only CubeSuite Option CubeSuite Vxx xx xx Review update history Download size xxxKB Restore hidden updates This is update for CubeSuite Change settings Detail Update Manager Help CubeSuite Update Manager Vxx xx xx Exit Download size xxxKB This is update for CubeSuite Update Manager Vz xx xox soon xox Renesas Electronics Corporation Check the information and click the Install button 4 Confirm the download an
282. he category name insert the contents of the clip board Note that this menu is only enabled when the file or the Category node exists Ifa project with the same contents is already on the clipboard however then if multiple files or Category nodes are selected and the build tool is running then it will be invalid Rename You can rename the selected project subproject file and Category node Press Enter key to confirm the rename Press the ESC key to cancel When the file is selected the actual file name is also changed When the selected file is added to other project those file names are also changed Note that this menu is only enabled when the project subproject file other than the dependency files and Category node is selected Note that rename is disabled when the build tool is operating Help menu Project Tree panel dedicated items Open Help for Project Tree Panel Displays the help of this panel R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 142 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Context menu 1 When a Project node is selected Build Actively project Builds the active project If the active project is the main project its subproject is not built Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Rebuild Actively project Rebuilds the active project If the active project is the main project its subproject is not rebuilt Note th
283. he characters that are searched and moves the caret Cancel Ignores the setting and closes this dialog box Help Displays the help of this dialog box Note If the designated characters cannot be searched Search text was not found is displayed on the status bar of the Main window R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 182 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Find in Files tab In this tab the designated characters are found in batch and the search results are listed in the Output panel The Output panel is used to jump to the relevant location by double clicking the search result Remark The gt button in Search text will be displayed only if this dialog box is opened from the Editor panel Figure A 36 Find and Replace Dialog Box Find in Files Tab Find and Replace Quick Find L Quick Replace Replace in Files Search text mai 3 Search location Current document main c Option Search criteria Normal 4 4 C Match case Match whole word Open file before replacing Function butions The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open From the Edit menu select Find From the Edit menu select Replace Description of each area 1 Search text Designate characters to find You can directly enter the c
284. he item below Application CC RX CA850 CX NC30 Localised support CA78KOR CA78K0 Select this to generate the ROMization module file CA850 CA78KOR load module file and hex file from C source files by using the build tool provided by CubeSuite The generated file will be the debug target If the build tool is NC30 Localised support sample startup programs are generated when the project is cre ated C Application CC RX Select this to generate the load module file and hex file from a C source file only a file that has a main func tion and C source files by using build tool CC RX provided by CubeSuite The generated file will be the debug target Empty Application CC RX NC30 Localised support Select this to generate the load module file by using build tool CC RX NC30 Localised support provided by CubeSuite The generated file will be the debug target Sample startup programs are not generated when the project is created Library CC RX CA850 CX NC30 Localised support CA78KOR CA78K0 Select this to generate a library file for a user library by using the build tool provided by CubeSuite Debug Only Select this to debug a load module file or hex file generated with a build tool other than the one provided by CubeSuite i e creates a debug dedicated project See APPENDIX F USING AN EXTERNAL BUILD TOOL for details on how to create and use the debug dedicated project Remark When Application CC RX is sele
285. he specified subproject to a project Cancel Closes this dialog box R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 275 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Browse For Folder dialog box This dialog box is used to select the folder or file output destination e g source code or report file for the caller of this dialog box Figure A 77 Browse For Folder Dialog Box Browse For Folder Select the folder to package project and tool Desktop J B My Documents 4 My Computer wo My Network Places Recycle Bin E Function buttons Make New Folder The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open Click the Copy button in the History page in the CubeSuite Update Manager window From the Project menu select Save Project and Development Tools as Package On the Project Tree panel select the Project node and then Save Project and Development Tools as Package from the context menu On the Start panel click the Go button in the Open Sample Project area In the Create Project dialog box click the Browse button in the project file area In the Source Convert Setting dialog box CX click the Browse button in the Backup of project before conver sion area In the Add File dialog box click the Browse button in the Place area In the Find i
286. heck boxes for the combinations of the main project and subprojects and their build modes which you wish to run a build When this dialog box is opened for the first time after the project is created all the check boxes are unchecked From the second time the previous setting is retained R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 202 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE b Build mode This area displays the build modes which the main project and subprojects have c Defined macros lt 1 gt When the target project type is other than a debug dedicated project For the combination of the main project and subprojects and their build modes the defined macros which have been set in the Compile Options tab and the Assemble Options tab on the Property panel are separated with and displayed The defined macro in the compile option comes before the one in assemble option They are separated with and displayed lt 2 gt When the target project type is a debug dedicated project This item is invalid Remarks 1 Use one of the following methods to select multiple rows Left click the mouse with pressing the Ctrl key Left click the mouse with pressing the Shift key Drag the mouse to select a range of rows Pressing the space key while a row is selected switches the selected non selected state of the checkbox 2 Clicking on the header of each column sorts the entries in ascending order by
287. hen mapping emulation memory alternative ROM RAM in the IECUBE V850E1 specify the one of the following chip selects as a string csO cs1 cs2 cs3 cs4 cs5 cs6 or cs7 For models in the V850ES series however the chip select allocation is fixed or the chip select will not function so this can be omitted If chip select is specified then accessSize cannot be omitted Return value If memory mapping was configured successfully True If there was an error when configuring memory mapping False Detailed description This function configures memory mapping with the memory type specified by mapType R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 402 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX G Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS Example of use gt gt gt debugger Map Set MapType EmulationRom 0x100000 Ox10ffff True gt gt gt R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 403 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX G Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS debugger Memory Copy This function copies the memory Specification format debugger Memory Copy addressi1 address2 address3 Argumeni s Argument Description address1 Specify the start address to copy from address2 Specify the end address to copy from address3 Specify the address to copy to Return value If the memory was copied successfully True If there was an error when copying the memory Fa
288. hen the property of the build tool in the Property panel of the debug dedicated project is changed If a rapid build is enabled it is possible to perform a build in parallel with the above operations To enable disable a rapid build select Rapid Build from the Build menu A rapid build is enabled by default Figure F 33 Rapid Build Item When a rapid build Is valid When a rapid build Is invalid Build Build fp Build Project F7 fp Build Project F7 GF Rebuild Project Shift F7 GF Rebuild Project Shift F7 ed Clean Project ta Clean Project Rapid Build FA Rapid Build al Build DebugOnly ra Build DebugOnly t Rebuild DebugOnly t Rebuild DebugOnly LA Clean DebugOnly LA Clean DebugOnly Re A Ty Build Mode Settings Ty Build Mode Settings El Batch Build El Batch Build T Build Option List T Build Option List Caution This function is valid only when editing source files with the Editor panel Remarks 1 After editing source files it is recommend to save frequently by pressing the Ctrl S key 2 _Enable Disable setting of the rapid build applies to the entire project main project and subprojects 3 Ifyou disable a rapid build while it is running it will be stopped at that time R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 328 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX F USING AN EXTERNAL BUILD TOOL F 5 5 Run a batch build A batch build is a function that builds rebuild
289. hi Chiyoda ku Tokyo 100 0004 Japan LICENSOR and the Customer LICENSEE with the following terms and conditions about the provided software program Licensed Program SECTION 1 LICENSE 1 1 Subject to complying to the terms and conditions set forth herein and executing only for develop the other program as executing the fights and licenses relating to the Licensed Program LICENSOR grants to LICENSEE non exclusive and non transferable rights a P relating to the Licensed Program set forth in follows Do you accept to the end user license agreement E BEE na O Accept CubeSuite Nex Check the information and if you agree it select Accept then click the Next button Caution If you select Do not accept you cannot continue with the installation R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 14 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 6 Select the install target and the installation location Select the check boxes of the install target If you wish to change the installation location edit it in the Install location area Figure 2 6 Development Tools Selection Window Installer step 3 8 Development Tools Selection Please specify the development tools to install Tools for RL78 and 78K microcontrollers Tools for RX microcontrollers Drive Free space Tools for 850 microcontrollers xxxKB Emulator USB drivers Required g xxx
290. holds break point information return value of the debugger Breakpoint Information function Type class BreakpointInf Number 0 Name None O Enable True BreakType Address1 Address2 Address3 Address4 Variable BreakType Hardware None None None None Variable Description Number This holds the event number Name This holds the name of the break point Enable True Enabled False Disabled This holds whether the break point is enabled or not BreakType This holds the break type Type Description BreakType Software Software break except a simulator BreakType Hardware Hardware break BreakType Read Data read break Data write break BreakType Write Address1 This holds address information 1 as a string Address2 This holds address information 2 as a string Only for combined breaks Address3 This holds address information 3 as a string Only for combined breaks Address4 This holds address information 4 as a string Only for combined breaks Detailed description BreakpointInfo is a class and it is passed as the return value when the debugger Breakpoint Information function is executed R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Feb 01 2013 2tENESAS Page 441 of 491 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX G Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS Example of use gt gt gt info debugger Breakpoint Informati
291. ialog box using a selected file encoding Not open the selected file in the Open File dialog box and closes this dialog box Displays the help for this dialog box R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 175 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Bookmarks dialog box This dialog box is used to display the position where a bookmark is to be set or to delete a bookmark Figure A 32 Bookmarks Dialog Box Bookmarks Line Num Path View 17 G Sample appli source 15 C Sample applis source Remove 22 C Sample applisource Remove All Previous T Function buttons The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open From the Edit menu select Bookmark gt gt List Bookmarks Description of each area 1 Bookmark list area Display a list of bookmarks that have been registered The bookmarks are listed alphabetically by file name for Bookmark Bookmarks in the same file are listed in line number order When a bookmark is added to the Editor panel a bookmark function is added In the bookmark list area double clicking on a line moves a caret to the corresponding position for the bookmark a File Display a file name without any path registered as a bookmark Line Number Display a line number registered as a bookmark b lt c Path Display a file
292. igh performance Embedded Workshop PM Project The project created with the old IDE can be converted to the CubeSuite project Support version High performance Embedded Workshop GO V 4 07 00 or later SH RX REC M16C H8 project 3 In following case the build options also can be converted From the HEW RX compiler package V 1 00R00 or later project to the CubeSuite RX project Open Sample Project Many sample projects that can be built immediately are provided After selecting the desired project from the list below press the GO button and specify the destination folder to copy the selected sample project 78K0 7 KOR AL7B RX VASO 78K0_KC2 L_Tutotial_Basic_Operation wal 7BKO_KF2_Tutorial_ Analysis Output Information M0200002 The following plug ins are not enabled Code Generator Plug in Debug Console Plug in Pin Configurator Plug in Program Analyzer Plug in IronPython Console Plug in Stack Usage Tracer Tanl Thherface Protocol iTTPi Plum in l N All Messages en l ae fie Ra DISCONNECT The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area How to open Select Windows Start gt gt Programs gt gt Renesas Electronics CubeSuite gt gt CubeSuite Remark In Windows 8 double click on CubeSuite on the start screen R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 112 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSui
293. ignated as search criteria a Search criteria Select one of the following items from the drop down list Item Operation Normal Finds the characters designated in Search text Wild card Finds using the wildcard designated in Search text Note Regular Expressions Finds using the regular expressions designated in Search text Note This item is enabled only when the Editor panel is focused b File type Specify File types to search Select one of the following items from the drop down list Item Operation Source files Extensions Files to find are limited to the source files Text files txt Files to find are limited to the text files All files Finds all the files Note Shows extensions of the source file added to the Project Tree panel Note that the finds can be operated by limiting the search criteria by directly entering the file name in the text box maximum characters 1024 If this is the case the wildcard can be used and multiple file names can be specified by separating them with Remark Up to 10 items for the input history are recorded in the drop down list c Match case Finds with the designated characters in case sensitive Finds with the designated characters in not case sensitive default d Match whole word Finds with a designated exact word Finds with at least one of the words default R20UT2444EJ0100 Re
294. ile to a Project Add a download file to debug to the created debug dedicated project Furthermore to perform source level debugging add C source files to be used for creation of the download file to the project This section describes how to add these files to the debug dedicated project F 3 1 Add a download file Add a load module file to the debug dedicated project as the download file to debug Caution To perform source level debugging step execution in source level units etc a load module file with the symbol information must be added to the debug dedicated project Remarks 1 The specified load module file is reflected automatically on the Download File Settings tab in the Prop erty panel of the debugging tool Also use this Download File Settings tab to configure the load module file type and download options add a hex file or binary file to download additionally as well as the load module file added by this method below See the CubeSuite Integrated Development Environment User s Manual Debug for details on the downloading 2 Multiple load module files can be added to the debug dedicated project V850 A load module file can be added by the following methods Adding an existing file Creating and adding an empty file R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 309 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX F USING AN EXTERNAL BUILD TOOL 1 Adding an existing file Drag a load module file from
295. in 4 Register to Favorite Project Figure 2 55 Favorite Projects ltem After Registering a Project Favorite Projects af Favorite Project ra oe Pa Donici al avorite 0 f a 7 Ai 4 Fa vorite Project SH LRegister to Favorite Project be 2 Register to Favorite Project Sii 3 Register to Favorite Project r Aei 4 Register to Favorite Project R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 49 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 7 4 Remove a subproject from the project To remove a subproject registered to a project from that project select the Subproject node on the project tree and select Remove from Project on the context menu In addition the subproject file itself is not deleted from the file system Figure 2 56 Remove from Project Item sub Subproject uPD7OF3746 E A Pin Configura tf Rebuild sample 7 Code Genera p Clean sample A CAB50 Build Ss V850 Simulate BE Open Folder with Explorer Program anaj El Windows Explorer Menu 4 Ei File E Build sample Add gt Ric Set sub as Active Project Remove from Project Shift Del Ey Paste Ctrl aje Rename F2 a Property 2 7 5 Change the project name You can change the name of the project main project or subproject on the project tree Select the Project node or Subproject node and select Rename on the context menu Figure 2 57 Rename Item For a
296. in CubeSuite Setup e Microsoft NET Framework 4 and Microsoft Visual C 2010 SP1 runtime libraries are required to run CubeSuitet Tf these are not installed these are installed by the CubeSutte setup To the customer who downloads the evaluation CubeSuite from the web site and uses Windows XP Windows Vista or Windows 7 environment When Microsoft NET Framework 4 isn t installed please connect the PC to network and then begin setup If the PC is not connected to network please access to the Microsoft Download Center by the other PC which is connected to network and get Microsoft NET Framework 4 And please install Microsoft NET Framework 4 to the PC before CubeSuitet setup e Please use the latest edition for Microsoft NET Framework 4 and Microsoft Visual C 2010 SP1 Please wisit Microsoft s web site for more information about the latest edition e Ifyou are required to restart Windows during the setup please display this screen after restart and click the Begin CubeSuitet Setup button e The temporary folder name that includes multi byte characters may cause an error at installation For instance the login name is Japanese Click the Begin CubeSuite Setup button CubeSuite setup begins Caution CubeSuite setup must be conducted with administrator privileges Remark If the page does not appear automatically open Install hta in the DVD R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 12 of 491 Feb 01 2013 Cub
297. ine at the cursor if it is empty or contains only whitespace 2tENESAS Page 115 of 491 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE c View The View menu displays panel and other view related menu commands Project Tree Shows the Project Tree panel and move the focus to it Property Shows the Property panel and move the focus to it The property selected in the Project Tree panel is shown Output Shows the Output panel and move the focus to it Debug Manager Shows the Debug Manager panel Watch Displays a cascading menu for opening a Watch panel E Watch1 Shows the Watch 1 panel Watch2 Shows the Watch 2 panel Watch3 Shows the Watch 3 panel Watch4 Shows the Watch 4 panel Local Variable Shows the Local Variables panel Call Stack Shows the Call Stack panel Memory Displays a cascading menu for opening a Memory panel E Memory1 Shows the Memory 1 panel SFR R8C Localised sup Shows the SFR panel R8C Localised support 78KOR 78K0 IOR panel port 78KOR 78KOV IOR RX V850 RX V850 Trace Shows the Trace panel IECUBE IECUBE2 Simulator Disassemble Displays a cascading menu for opening a Disassemble panel E Disassemble1 Shows the Disassemble 1 panel Disassemble2 Shows the Disassemble 2 panel Disassemble3 Shows the Disassemble 3 panel Disassemble4 Shows the Disassemble 4 panel Event Shows the Events panel Show Current PC Location Shows the current P
298. ing a build Note that this property is not applied to Reset All to Default from the context menu Default DefaultBuild How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction DefaultBuild Runs a build with the default build mode that is set when a new project is created Build mode that is added Runs a build with the build mode that is added to the project other than to the project other than DefaultBuild DefaultBuild R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 160 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 2 Build The detailed information on a build is displayed and their configuration can be changed Commands executed in Specify the commands to be executed when running a build see F 5 1 Run a build of the the project building debug dedicated project The following placeholders are supported ActiveProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the active project folder ActiveProjectName Replaces with the active project name BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name MainProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the main project folder MainProjectName Replaces with the main project name MicomToolPath Replaces with the absolute path of the install folder of this product ProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the project folder ProjectName Replaces with the project name TempDir Replaces with the absolute path
299. ing a rebuild then all these files are saved 1 When running a rebuild of the entire project The commands being specified in all the debug dedicated projects that belong to the project are executed Click the button on the toolbar Remarks 1 Rebuilds are run in the order of subproject main project Subprojects are rebuilt in the order that they are displayed on the project tree You can change the display order of the subprojects by dragging the subproject to be moved and dropping it on the desired location 2 Ifa project other than a debug dedicated project is included in your projects then rebuilds will be run for that project using the build tool provided by CubeSuite see the CubeSuite Integrated Development Environment User s Manual Build 2 When running a rebuild of the active project Select the debug dedicated project and then select Rebuild active project from the context menu R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 325 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX F USING AN EXTERNAL BUILD TOOL Figure F 30 Rebuild active project Item ey WE Build SubProject_DebugOnly R SubProject_DebugOnly S igisi J uPD7031314 Microco u E A Pin Configurator D6 i H Rebuild SubProject_DebugOnly A None Build Tool i 850 Simulator Debus op File B ray Download Files p Clean SubProject_DebugOnly Open Folder with Explorer lt Add gt Set SubProject_DebugOnly as Active Pro
300. ion This function displays the PC value Example of use gt gt gt debugger Get PC O0x92B0 R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 394 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX G Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS debugger Go This function continues program execution Specification format debugger Go goOption GoOption Normal Argumeni s goOption Specify an option The options that can be specified are shown below Type Description GoOption IgnoreBreak Execute ignoring breakpoints GoOption WaitBreak Wait until program stops GoOption Normal Breakpoints enabled do not wait until program stops default Return value None Detailed description This function continues program execution If goOption is specified the processing is performed in accordance with the specification Example of use gt gt gt debugger Go gt gt gt debugger Go GoOption WaitBreak gt gt gt R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 395 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX G Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS debugger le GetValue debugger le SetValue This function sets or refers the IE register or DCU register Specification format debugger Ie GetValue ieType address debugger Ie SetValue ieType address value Argumeni s Argument Description ieType Specify a register The registers that can be specified are show
301. ion This property sets or refers to data collected in debugging debugger Memory NoVerify This property switches the write time verification setting debugger Opiton Coverage debugger Option OpenBreak debugger Option ReuseCoverageData debugger Option Timer debugger Option Trace debugger Option UseTraceData This property sets or reference the options of the debug tool debugger XTrace Addup debugger XTrace Complement debugger XTrace Mode This property sets or reference the tracing options of the debug tool R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Feb 01 2013 2tENESAS Page 474 of 491 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX G Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS debugger ADConvertDatalnExecution This property sets or refers to data collected in debugging Smart Analog Specification format debugger ADConvertDataInExecution adConvertDataInExecution Setting s Setting Description adConvertDataInExecution Set whether to collect data during debugging True Collect data during debugging False Do not collect data during debugging Reference Setting for data collection during execution Detailed description This property sets or refers to data collected in debugging Example of use gt gt gt print debugeer ADConvertDataInExecution False gt gt gt debugger ADConvertDataInExecution True gt gt gt print debugger ADConvertDataInExecution True gt gt gt
302. is the responsibility of the buyer or distributor of Renesas Electronics products who distributes disposes of or otherwise places the product with a third party to notify such third party in advance of the contents and conditions set forth in this document Renesas Electronics assumes no responsibility for any losses incurred by you or third parties as a result of unauthorized use of Renesas Electronics products This document may not be reproduced or duplicated in any form in whole or in part without prior written consent of Renesas Electronics Please contact a Renesas Electronics sales office if you have any questions regarding the information contained in this document or Renesas Electronics products or if you have any other inquiries Note 1 Renesas Electronics as used in this document means Renesas Electronics Corporation and also includes its majority owned subsidiaries Note 2 Renesas Electronics product s means any product developed or manufactured by or for Renesas Electronics 2012 4 How to Use This Manual This manual describes the role of the CubeSuite integrated development environment for developing applications and systems for RX family V850 family R8C family Localised support RL78 family 78KOR microcontrollers 78KO microcontrollers and provides an outline of its features CubeSuite is an integrated development environment IDE for RX family V850 family R8C family Localised support
303. isplay change area Expands the entire currently displayed detailed information display change area Detailed information display change area In this area the detailed information on the node that is selected in the Project Tree panel is displayed categoraized in the list Also you can directly change the settings of the selected node The node includes Project node Subproject node Microcontroller node Design Tool node Build Tool node Debug Tool node Analyze Tool node File node and Category node The E mark indicates all the items in the category are expanded The H mark indicates all the items are shrinked You can expand shrink the items by clicking these marks or double clicking the category name If the HEX mark is displayed only the hex number is allowed in the text box Please see the information on each tab for the details of the display setting in the category and its contents Property description area In this area brief description of the categories and their contents selected in the Detailed information display change area is shown Tab selection area Categories for the display of the detailed information are changed when a tab is selected In this panel the following tabs are contained see the section explaining each tab for the details on the contents of the display or the method of the setting on the tab a Project node is selected in Project Tree panel Project node Project tab Subproject
304. ists the information is output for each build mode in the format shown below Tool name Tab name of build tool property in CubeSuite Option of HEW project gt Option of CubeSuite project The information for individual compile options is output in the format shown below Tool name Tab name of build tool property in CubeSuite file name Option of HEW project gt Option of CubeSuite project Build modes are output in the following order Debug Build Release Build user created build mode Debug Build and Release Build are the build modes that HEW provides by default They differ depending on whether the debug information output option is set or not Other Options is output if Tab name of build tool property in CubeSuite for Tool name does not exist R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 66 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 7 10 Convert a PM project into a CubeSuite project You can convert a PM project into a CubeSuite project Select Open Project from the Project menu with CubeSuite and then select a workspace file prw or project file prj When opening from a PM workspace file prw When opening from a PM project file prj 1 When opening from a PM workspace file prw a Select the project for conversion settings When a PM workspace file is selected the Project Convert Setting dialog box will open Figure 2 71 Project Conver
305. it in an external text editor or the like and copy and paste it into the console 2 Caution for prompt displays The Python Console prompt of gt gt gt may be displayed multiply as gt gt gt gt gt gt or results may be displayed after the gt gt gt and there may be no gt gt gt prompt before the caret If this happens it is still possible to continue to enter functions 3 Caution for executing scripts for projects without load modules If a script is specified in the startup otpions that uses a project without a load module file or if project_filename py is placed in the same folder as the project file then although the script will be executed automatically after normal project loading it will not be executed if there is no load module file 4 Cautions for forced termination If the following operations are performed while a script like an infinite loop is running then the results of function execution may be an error because the function execution will be terminated forcibly Forcible termination by selecting Forcibly terminate from the context menu or pressing Ctrl D in the Python Console Changing the active project in a project with multiple projects R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 484 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX H INDEX A Add Existing Subproject dialog box 274 Add File dialog box 169 Add Folder and File dialog box 171 Additional Function tab
306. ited on the Editor panel Print Preview window This window is used to preview the file currently being displayed in the Edi tor panel before printing Build Mode Settings dialog box This dialog box is used to add and delete build modes and configure the cur rent build mode in batch Character String Input dialog box This dialog box is used to input and edit characters in one line Batch Build dialog box This dialog box is used to do build rebuild and clean process in batch with the build mode that the project has Progress Status dialog box This dialog box is used to display how the process has been progressed when the time consuming process is taken place Pack Settings dialog box This dialog box is used to pack and save the project and this product Option dialog box This dialog box is used to configure the CubeSuite environment Plug in Manager dialog box This dialog box is used to set the plug ins to be read in when this product is started User Setting dialog box This dialog box allows you to customize toolbars and menus displayed in the Main window New Toolbar dialog box This dialog box is used to create a new toolbar to appear in the Main win dow Rename Toolbar dialog box This dialog box is used to edit the name of a toolbar created by the user Customize Keyboard dialog box This dialog box is used to assign shortcut keys to the various commands
307. ith This item is disabled 3 Search location Designate the location to search Select either one of the following items from the drop down list or directly enter the file location from the keyboard maximum number 10 Item Operation Current document Panel Name Finds within the current Editor panel All open documents Finds all the opening the Editor panel If no file is opened in the Editor panel this item is disabled Active project Finds the text file included in the active project When File type is specified searches only the specified type Note that is the current project does not exist this item is disabled Main project and subprojects Finds within the text file included in the main project and subproject When File type is specified searches only the specified type Note that is the current project does not exist this item is disabled Folder Name Finds within the text file in the folder specified by directly entering the maximum characters 259 the path relative path is from the project folder or specified in the Browse For Folder dialog box opened by clicking the button in this area When folders are not specified the project folder name is shown in by default folder if the project does not exist the current user document folder is shown When File type is specified finds only the specified type Remark Up to 10 items for the input history are recorded in the drop
308. ith absolute path or selecting from the Browse button By default the old development environment project folder appears d Button Browse Opens the Browse For Folder dialog box When a folder is selected an absolute path of the folder is shown in Place R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 136 of 491 Feb 01 2013 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Remarks 1 The number of characters that can be entered in Project name and Place is up to 259 both for the path name and file name together 2 When the input for Project name violates any restriction the following messages are shown in the tooltip Message Description The project name is invalid Enter characters The project file name uses characters that are not that can be used as a file name allowed The subproject name is invalid A subproject In the specified location there is already a main project with the same name cannot be made in the with the same name excluding extension location where the main project exists Set the project name The project name is not specified 3 When the input for Place violates any restriction the following messages are shown in the tooltip Message Description The file name including the path is too long The file name with the path is more than 259 characters Make it within 259 characters The location where the project is to be cre The fo
309. ject Remove form Project t Shift Del p f Rename F2 Property EE BF Be F 5 3 Run a clean The command specified with the Commands executed in the project cleaning property in the Build category in the Property panel is executed see 2 Setting the command when running a clean This allows you to delete all the intermediate files and generated files output by running a build The commands being specified in the entire project main project and subprojects or active project see F 4 3 Set the target project for a build can be executed 1 When running a clean of the entire project The commands being specified in all the debug dedicated projects that belong to the project are executed Select Clean Project from the Build menu Figure F 31 Clean Project Item Build E Build Project F Shift F7 Rapid Build Update Dependencie E Build Debugonly T Rebuild Debugonly LA Clean DebugOnly Update Dependencies of DebugOnh Ke Stop Build tri F Ty Build Mode Settings Batch Build Ty Build Option List R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 326 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX F USING AN EXTERNAL BUILD TOOL Remarks 1 Cleans are run in the order of subproject main project Subprojects are cleaned in the order that they are displayed on the project tree You can change the display order of the subprojects by dragging the subproject to be moved and droppi
310. ject Convert Setting Dialog Box When Main Project Is Selected Project Convert Setting Project settings New microcontroller Microcontroller New microcontroller Update A Product Name R 5F521054xFF On chip ROM EAEAN E On chip RAM size Bytes 204 Additional Information Peckege PLOPOORDIA A E FEARED J RS5F521054xFK 64pin SME A5F521054xFM 64pin ME R5F521054xFN 80pin ME R5F521054xFP 100pin ME R5F521054xLJ 100pin J R5F521064xFF 80pin l k occcoroca cvece i v Snes seer SecsionX600_E1_E20_SVSTEM New project Kind of project Empty Application CC AX Project name Project i Place D work HEW AxConvertT est Project x Browse V Backup the project composition after before conversion Cancel Help Figure 2 68 Project Convert Setting Dialog Box When Subproject Is Selected Project Convert Setting Project Description J A Project settings New microcontroller Microcontroller New microcontroller Search micr ller Update a Ax210 Product Name R5F52105AxFF R5F52105AxFF 80pin aache Hi en ayaa 2 AM R5F5210544FK 64pin Additonal Information Package PLOPODBOIA A p R5F521054xFM 64pin J RS5F521054xFN 80pin J R5F521054xFP 100pin J A5F521054xLJ 100pin R5F52106AxFF 80pin k nereanca gena SecsionRX600_E1_E20 SVSTEM New project Kind of project
311. ject cleaning property in the Build category in the Property panel Clean can delete all the intermediate files and generated files output by running a buildNote gt See F 5 3 Run a clean Rapid build Runs a build in parallel with the change of the build setting gt See F 5 4 Runa rapid build Batch build Runs builds in batch with the build modes that the project has gt See F 5 5 Runa batch build Note It is assumed that a proper command has been set in the Property panel see F 4 1 Set the commands 2 Displaying execution results The execution results of the build standard output and standard error from the external build tool used are dis played in each tab on the Output panel Build rebuild or batch build gt All Messages tab and Build Tool tab Rapid build gt Rapid Build tab Figure F 27 Build Execution Results Build Rebuild or Batch Build Start build all Thursday May 13 2010 5 54 30 PM Start build SubProject DebugOnly DefaultBuild al Build ended Error 0 Warning 0 Start build test DefaultBuild JOO JOC iR Program Maintenance Utility Version XX OOd C SampleProjects V850 850std_DebugOnly gt make Copyright C XXX KKK KXK KKX All rights reserved Build ended Error 0 Warning 0 Ended Success 1 Projects Failed 0 Projects Thursday May 13 2010 5 54 30 PM al EOF 5 Build Tool Rapid Build R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 323 of 49
312. l download False Perform overwrite download default flashErase Specify whether to initialize a flash memory before download True Initialize a flash memory before download False Do not initialize a flash memory before download default Caution If two or more parameters are specified then three parameters must be specified It is not possible to specify only fileName and address Return value If a binary file was downloaded successfully True If there was an error when downloading a binary file False Detailed description When using the memory bank this function downloads binary files in memory bank format Example of use gt gt gt debugger Download BinaryBank C test testModule bin 0x1000 False True gt gt gt debugger Download BinaryBank C test testModule2 bin 0x2000 True False gt gt gt R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 378 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX G Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS debugger Download Coverage This function downloads coverage data IECUBE IECUBE2 Simulator Specification format debugger Download Coverage fileName Argumeni s fileName Specify a coverage data file Return value If a binary file was downloaded successfully True If there was an error when downloading a binary file False Detailed description This function downloads coverage data Example of use gt gt gt
313. lay 1 emal Text Editor J Number of screen lines G Font and Color 10000 4 3 Extemal Tools 2 Sy Buld Debug P C Throw exception 3 Et Python oe Use remoting function at startup G Text Editor 4 Ga Update P V Clear the window when the active project is changed 5 LE Others gt V Display the results of executing CubeSuite Python function E User Information Function buttons Initialize All Settings Cancel Apply Help The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open From the Tool menu select Options Description of each area 1 Number of screen lines Specify the number of screen lines for the Python console Either enter a number between 5000 and 100000 directly via the keyboard or specify a number via the E buttons The default is 10000 Remark This item can be set or referred by using CubeSuite Python property common ViewLine 2 Throw exception Throws an exception Does not throws an exception default Remark This item can be set or referred by using CubeSuite Python property common ThrowExcept R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 229 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 3 Use remoting function at startup Enables the function for linking to external tools when starting the Python console default Disables the functio
314. lder creation was canceled or failed so that a ated does not exist nonexistent folder has been specified The location for project creation is invalid The file name with the invalid path is designated The Enter characters that can be used as a path characters lt gt cannot be used for the name folder name Some other projects are same setting Attempt to create a project file with the same absolute Change the project name or the folder path as another project Set the place The creation location is not specified 5 Backup the project composition after before conversion Select this check box to pack up and save the project source files and complete project immediately after the con version Remark This item will be invalid when a PM workspace is converted and the main project node is selected The destination folder for saving is on the same level as the conversion target project folder named conversion target project folder_org If there is an existing folder file with the same name the folder name has a number from 1 to 99 appended thus n ee Function buttons Button Function Closes this dialog box and converts a project according to the designated condition Cancels the designated condition and closes the dialog box Displays the help of this dialog box R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 137 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDI
315. lease wait The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area How to open Opens automatically while checking for updates Description of each area 1 Checking for Updates message area This area displays messages while checking for updates When the update check ends it closes automatically R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 105 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Update in progress dialog box This dialog box displays the progress of update download and installation Figure A 10 Update in progress Dialog Box Update in progress Downloading updates Update status Downloading CubeSuite Yw xx x8 29 complete Downloading 1 2 2 ELLE LLL ELLE LLL Function buttons The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open Opens automatically while downloading and installing updates Description of each area 1 Update status area This area displays the current status of downloads and installs It automatically closes when the updates are downloaded and installed 2 Downloading Installing area Displays the proportion of the size of target downloads that is complete Displays the proportion of the number of target updates installed that is complete Function buttons R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS P
316. ler or is selected by its nickname from the list of microcontrol lers Cancel Cancels the designated condition and closes the dialog box Help Displays the help of this dialog box R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 168 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Add File dialog box This dialog box is used to create a new file and add it to the project Figure A 28 Add File Dialog Box Add File File type C source file c Header file h inc Assemble file asm s Python script file py Text file txt All files Empty C source file 2 File name cc L 3 File location D work DebugOnly The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open From the File menu select Add gt gt Add New File On the Project Tree panel select the Download files node and then select Add gt gt Add New File from the con text menu Description of each area 1 File type area Select the type of the file to be created When the file type is selected the description is displayed at the lower box The file types to be displayed are as follows C source file c Header file h inc Assemble file asm s Python script file py Text file txt All files R20UT2444EJ0100 Re
317. locate trace memory Notes 1 Applies to all of the following MINICUBE2 E1Serial and E20Serial 2 Applies to all of the following MINICUBE E1Jtag E20Jtag and MINICUBE2utag 3 This is only a break cause during trace 4 This is only a break cause during a break R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Feb 01 2013 7tENESAS Page 390 of 491 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX G Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS Example of use gt gt gt debugger GetBreakStatus Temporary gt gt gt a debugger GetBreakStatus Temporary gt gt gt print a Temporary gt gt gt if debugger GetBreakStatus BreakStatus Temporary print Temporary break Temporary Temporary break gt gt gt R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 391 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX G Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS debugger GetCpuStatus This function displays the current CPU status Specification format debugger GetCpuStatus Argumeni s None Return value Current CPU status string CPU Status Description Hold In bus hold HoldStoplidle Bus hold Software STOP Hardware STOP IDLE mode PowOff Power not supplied to the target Reset In reset state Standby In standby mode Stop In STOP mode Stopldle Software STOP Hardware STOP IDLE mode Wait In wait state Halt In HALT mode Sleep In sleep state None N A Detailed description
318. log box to add an existing subproject to a project Add New Subproject Opens the Create Project dialog box to add a new subproject to a project Add File Opens the Add Existing File dialog box to add the selected file to a project Add New File Add New Category Opens the Add File dialog box to create a file with the selected file type and add to the file to a project The added file can be opened with the application corresponds to the file exten sion Adds a new Category node to the root of the File node This allows the category name to be changed The default category name is New category The new category name can be changed to the same name as the existing Category node Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Set Project Active Project Sets the selected project or subproject to an active project Close Project Closes the current project Changes the current project or file to the new one If they have not saved con firm the user whether to save them Save Project Saves the configuration information of the current project to the project file Save Project As Opens the Save Project As dialog box to save the configuration information of the current project to the project file with another name Remove from Project Removes the selected project or subproject from the project The subproject files or the file themselves are not delete
319. lse Detailed description This function adds the file specified in fileName to the active project If category is specified the file is added below that category If the specified category does not exist it is created newly Example of use gt gt gt project File Add C project sample src test c test True gt gt gt project File Add C project sample src testl c C project sample src test2 c test j sre True R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 348 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX G Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS project File Exists This function confirms whether the file exists in the active project Specification format project File Exists fileName Argumeni s fileName Specify the full path of the file whose existence in the active project is to be checked Return value If the specified file existed in the active project True If the specified file did not exist in the active project False Detailed description This function confirms whether the file specified in fileName exists in the active project Example of use gt gt gt project File Exists C project sample src test c True gt gt gt R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 349 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX G Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS project File Information This function displays the list of the files registered in the
320. lse Detailed description This function copies the memory from address to address2 into address3 Example of use gt gt gt debugger Memory Copy 0x1000 0x2000 0x3000 True gt gt gt R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 404 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX G Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS debugger Memory Fill This function fills the memory Specification format debugger Memory Fill address1 address2 value memoryOption MemoryOption Byte Argumeni s Argument Description address1 Specify the start address to fill address2 Specify the end address to fill to value Specify the fill value memoryOption Specify the fill unit The units that can be specified are shown below Type Description MemoryOption Byte Byte unit 8 bits default MemoryOption HalfWord Half word unit 16 bits RX V850 MemoryOption Word Word unit RL78 78K 16 bits RX V850 32 bits Return value If the memory was filled successfully True If there was an error when filling the memory False Detailed description This function fills from address1 to address2 with value If memoryOption is specified fill according to that specification Example of use gt gt gt debugger Memory Fil1l 0x1000 0x2000 OxFF True gt gt gt debugger Memory Fil1l 0x2000 0x3000 Ox0A MemoryOption Word False gt gt gt R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7
321. lumns that are hidden on the Editor panel are not displayed these columns are not printed R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 196 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Toolbar Opens the Print dialog box provided by Windows to print the current Editor panel as shown by the print preview form Copies the selection into the clipboard Increases the size of the content Decreases the size of the content Displays the preview at 100 percent zoom default Fits the preview to the width of this window Displays the whole page Boo ee ee Displays facing pages Context menu Increase Zoom Increases the size of the content Decrease Zoom Decreases the size of the content R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 197 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Build Mode Settings dialog box This dialog box is used to add and delete build modes and configure the current build mode in batch Figure A 41 Build Mode Settings Dialog Box Build Mode Settings Selected build mode 1 Apply to All Build mode list DefaultBuild Duplicate Function buttons The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open From the Build menu select Build Mode Settings Description of each area
322. lute path of the Windows system folder When python is described in the first line the contents from the second line to the last line are regarded as the script of the Python console and then executed when running a build The placeholders can be described in the scriput Default Commands executed in the project cleanning 0 How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the but ton For the subproperty you can enter directly in the text box Restriction Up to 1023 characters Up to 64 commands can be specified R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 161 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 3 Notes The detailed information on records is displayed and their configuration can be changed Add memos to this build tool Memo is added one item in one line The added memos are displayed as subproperty Note that this setting is common to all the build modes Default Memo number of items How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can enter directly in the text box Restriction Up to 256 characters Up to 256 items can be specified R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Feb 01 2013 2tENESAS Page 162 of 491 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Editor panel This panel is used to display and edit text files and source
323. main c As Er main c Save Settings l Save all Ctrl Shift 4 i Page Setup tea Print Ctrl P Print Preview Recent Files gt Recent Projects gt Exit 2 8 3 Pack and save the project and this product You can copy the product suite IDE language tools microcontroller information etc and project set also includes subprojects if they exist to a specified folder and save it organized into a single folder Select the Project node on the project tree and if you select Save Project and Development Tools as Package on the context menu If the project composition and properties have been changed the message dialog box below will open R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 77 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 83 Message Dialog Box Question Q0201001 gt Project has been changed Save J CeCe Ga Ce When you save the project click the Yes button When you don t save the project click the No button When files are being edited the message dialog box below will open Figure 2 84 Message Dialog Box Question Q0 201005 p Save all the files currently being edited J Ce J Cen Ce When you save the files click the Yes button When you don t save the files click the No button When using external tools such as an external text editor and files are being edited the message dialog box below will open Figure 2 85 Message Dial
324. mand Categories Commands All Commands A Action Event Build E Add Debug Add a Disassemble Add Edit Editor Add New Category Event Add New File File Add New Subproject Help Add New Watch Jump Specify a Shortcut o CC Currently assigned to Toggle Insert Mode Description Adds a file to a project The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open In the Toolbars tab of the User Setting dialog box click the Keyboard button Description of each area 1 Specify a Command area a Categories Display a list of the categories of commands provided by CubeSuite b Commands Display a list of the commands belonging to the category selected under Categories and their associated icons if any If All Commands is selected under Categories then all commands provided by CubeSuite appear with their associated icons if any R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 254 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 2 Specify a Shortcut area This area displays the default shortcut key currently assigned to the command selected under Commands if no keys area assigned then None appears To change the assigned shortcut key select a key from the following drop down list and then click the Assign but ton None Shift F1
325. ment R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 72 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Number Description Options not to use Build mode If an option that has been set in a PM project and is not used in a CubeSuite project option that has been deleted by upgrading the compiler package and PM option exists the informa tion is output for each build mode in the format shown below Tool name Tab name of build tool property in CubeSuite Option Build modes are output in the following order Debug Build Release Build user created build mode Debug Build and Release Build are the build modes that PM provides by default They differ depending on whether the debug information output option is set or not Other Options is output if Tab name of build tool property in CubeSuite for Tool name does not exist Options to change Build mode If an option that has been set in a PM project and has been changed to use in a CubeSuite project option that the range the parameter can be specified has been changed and option that has been changed by upgrading the compiler package exists the information is output for each build mode in the format shown below Tool name Tab name of build tool property in CubeSuite Option of PM project gt Option of CubeSuite project Build modes are output in the following order Debug Build Release Build user created build mode Debug Build
326. more than one option separate them by spaces FileName Passes the name of the file to display to the external text editor FilePath Passes the absolute path of the file to display to the external text editor FileRelativePath Passes the absolute path of the file from the project folder to display to the external text editor Line Passes the caret position line number to the external text editor 5 Open in internal editor during debug This item is only enabled if the Use external text editor check box is selected Suppresses starting an external text editor and opens the file to display in the Editor panel during debugging default Opens the file to display in an external text editorl 6 Buttons Initialize Settings Returns all currently displayed setting to their default values Function buttons Button Function Initialize All Settings Restores all settings on this dialog box to their default values Note however that newly added items in the General External Tools category will not be removed OK Applies all setting and closes this dialog box Cancel Ignores the setting and closes this dialog box Apply Applies all setting does not close this dialog box Help Displays the help of this dialog box R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 216 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE General Font and Color category
327. mory data was uploaded successfully True If there was an error when uploading the memory data False Detailed description This function saves the memory data from address to address2 in Intel format Example of use gt gt gt debugger Upload Intel C test testIntel hex 0x1000 0x2000 True True gt gt gt R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 418 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX G Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS debugger Upload IintelldTag This function saves the memory data in ID tagged Intel format Specification format debugger Upload IntelIdTag fileName address1 address2 force False Argumeni s Argument Description fileName Specify a file name address1 Specify an upload start address address2 Specify an upload end address force Specify whether to overwrite True Overwrite False Do not overwrite default Return value If the memory data was uploaded successfully True If there was an error when uploading the memory data False Detailed description This function saves the memory data from address1 to address2 in ID tagged Intel format Example of use gt gt gt debugger Upload IntelIdTag C test testIdTagIntel hex 0x1000 0x2000 True True gt gt gt R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 419 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX G Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS debugger U
328. mpiler for W850 Build tool plug in to use CX compiler for 850E 2 Debug tool plug in to use 850 Emulator Debug tool plug in to use 850 Simulator Debug tool plug in to use Y850E 2 Emulator Debug tool plug in to use V850E2 Simulator Build tool plug in to use NC30 compiler for RSC Debug tool plug in to use REC Emulator Build tool plug in to use CA 8KOR compiler for RL78 78KOR Debug tool plug in to use RL78 78K0R Emulator Debug tool plug in to use RL78 78K0R Simulator Build tool plug in to use C478K0 compiler for 78K0 Debug tool plug in to use 78K0 Emulator Debug tool plug in to use 78K0 Simulator Function buttons The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open From the Tool menu select Plug in Setting R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Feb 01 2013 ztENESAS ox Cre ee Page 241 of 491 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Description of each area 1 Plug in list area This area shows a list of the build tool and debug tool plug ins installed in this product in the following format Module Name Shows the plug in module names Description Shows a simple description of the plug in Function buttons Button Function OK Applies all setting and closes this dialog box Cancel Cancels the designated condition and closes the dialog box Help Displays the help of
329. n This function displays map information debugger Map Set This function configures memory mapping debugger Memory Copy This function copies the memory debugger Memory Fill This function fills the memory debugger Memory Read This function refers the memory debugger Memory Write This function writes to the memory debugger Next This function performs procedure step execution debugger Register GetValue This function refers register IO register SFR debugger Register SetValue This function sets the value of a register IO register SFR debugger Reset This function resets the CPU debugger ReturnOut This function runs until control returns to the program that called the current func tion debugger Run This function resets and then run the program debugger Step This function performs step execution debugger Stop This function stops the execution of the debug tool debugger Upload Binary This function saves the memory data in binary format debugger Upload Coverage This function saves the coverage data debugger Upload Intel This function saves the memory data in Intel format debugger Upload ntelldTag This function saves the memory data in ID tagged Intel format debugger Upload Motorola This function saves the memory data in Motorola format debugger Upload MotorolaldTag This function saves the mem
330. n This is available when this dialog box is opened from the Editor panel and Wild card is selected in Search criteria Any single digit Zero or more of any character R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 190 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Any single character Any one character not in the set Any one character in the set You can select the following regular expressions by using the gt button This is available when this dialog box is opened from the Editor panel and Regular Expression is selected in Search criteria End of line Group capture Zero or more One or more Any single character Any one character not in the set Any one character not in the set Escape special character b Word boundary n Line break s Whitespace Beginning of line Or Remark For details on regular expressions see APPENDIX E REGULAR EXPRESSIONS SYNTAX 2 Replace with Designate characters to be replaced You can directly enter the characters into the text box maximum characters 1024 or select from the input history in the drop down list maximum numbers of the history 10 3 Search location Designate the location to find Select either one of the following items from the drop down list or directly enter the file location from the keyboard maximum number 10 Item Operation Current document Panel
331. n but you can type an arbitrary string directly into the text box 3 Font settings for text editor area Click the Font button to open the Font Dialog Box and configure the fonts for your text editor Figure A 52 Font Dialog Box Font style Microsoft Sans Serif Regular Microsoft Sans Serif Italic T Miriam Fixed Bold Miram Transparent Bold Italic O MY Boli O Myriad Web Pro O Myriad Web Pro Condi Effects Sample C Strikeout C Underline AaBbYyzz Script Western v R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 220 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 4 Buttons Import Opens the Open Option Setting File dialog box to refer the settings saved in the file to this category Export Opens the Save Option Setting File dialog box to save the settings of this category to a file Initialize Settings Returns all currently displayed setting to their default values Function buttons Button Function Initialize All Settings Restores all settings on this dialog box to their default values Note however that newly added items in the General External Tools category will not be removed OK Applies all setting and closes this dialog box Cancel Ignores the setting and closes this dialog box Apply Applies all setting does not close this dialog box Help Displays the help of this dialog box
332. n Files tab or Replace in Files tab of the Find and Replace dialog box click the button In the Pack Settings dialog box click the Browse button in the Place area Description of each area 1 Message area Shows messages related to folders selected in this dialog box 2 Folder location area Select a folder to set in the caller of this dialog box or a folder to which to output files e g source code and report files The folder selected by default differs depending on the caller R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 276 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE a b c d e Project menu and Project Tree panel C Documents and Settings user name My Documents is selected for the first time The previously selected folder is selected after the second time Find and Replace dialog box Source Convert Setting dialog box and Add File dialog box The folder set in the caller is selected When the field is blank or the path which does not exist is entered the project folder is selected instead Create Project dialog box The folder set in the caller is selected When the field is blank or the path which does not exist is entered C Documents and Settings user name My Documents is selected instead Path Edit dialog box and Property panel The project folder is selected CubeSuite Update Manager window C Documents and Settings user name Desktop is
333. n This class creates a break condition BreakpointInfo This class holds break point information BuildCompletedEventArgs This class holds the parameters when a build completes DisassemblelInfo This class holds disassembly information DownloadInfo This class holds download information MapInfo This class holds map information StackInfo This class holds stack information Tracelnfo This class holds trace information XRunBreakinfo This class holds XRunBreak information XTimelnfo This class holds timer information R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 438 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX G Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS BreakCondition This class creates a break condition Type class BreakCondition Address Data None AccessSize None BreakType BreakType Hardware Variable Variable Description Address Specify the address at which to set a break Must be specified Specify the number to set as a break condition for the data If None is specified then the data condition is ignored AccessSize Specify the access size 8 16 or 32 If None is specified then all access sizes will be specified BreakType Specify the break type The break types that can be specified are shown below Description BreakType Software Software break except a simulator BreakType Hardware Hardware break default BreakType Read
334. n below Type Description leType Reg IE register 78K0 RL78 78KOR IECUBE V850 IECUBE2 V850 leType Dcu DCU register IECUBE V850 address Specify the address to reference set value Specify the setting value Return value debugger le GetValue is the register value numeric value debugger le SetValue is True if the setting was completed successfully or False if there was an error when setting the register Detailed description debugger le GetValue displays the value of the register specified by address The register type is specified by ieType debugger le SetValue writes value to the register specified by address The register type is specified by ieType Remark When the DCU register is referenced the register value is reset to 0 Example of use gt gt gt debugger Ie GetValue IeType Reg 0x100 0x12 gt gt gt debugger Ie SetValue IeType Reg 0x100 0x10 True gt gt gt debugger Ie GetValue IeType Reg 0x100 0x10 gt gt gt R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 396 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX G Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS debugger isConnected This function checks the connection status of the debug tool Specification format debugger IsConnected Argumeni s None Return value If the debug tool is connected True If the debug tool is not connected False Detailed description This
335. n case sensitive Finds the designated characters in not case sensitive default d Match whole word Finds a designated exact word Finds at least one of the words default e Open file before replacing This item is disabled R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 185 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Function buttons Button Function Option Switches between display hide the Option area in this tab Find All Finds characters with designated criteria in batch and shows the search results in list in the Output panel Cancel Ignores the setting and closes this dialog box Help R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Feb 01 2013 Displays the help of this dialog box 2tENESAS Page 186 of 491 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Quick Replace tab In this tab search is done with the designated characters and then they are replaced to the characters to be replaced Remark This tab will be disabled if you call the Find and Replace dialog box from a panel other than the Editor panel Figure A 37 Find and Replace Dialog Box Quick Replace Tab Find and Replace Quick Find Find in Files Quick Replace Replace in Files i Search text 2 Replace with 3 Search location Current document main c Option Search criteria Normal 4 C Match case C Match
336. n decimal A number in other than decimal or a string has been specified Function buttons Button Function OK Adds the folder that was dragged and dropped and the files in that folder to the project And then closes this dialog box Cancel Does not add the folder and files and then closes this dialog box Help Displays the help of this dialog box R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 172 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Text Edit dialog box This dialog box is used to input and edit texts in multiple lines Figure A 30 Text Edit Dialog Box Text Edit Placeholder Placeholder Value Description ActiveProjectDir D work DebugOnly Absolute path of the active project folde ActiveProjectName DebugOnly Active project name MainProjectDir D work DebugOnly Absolute path of the main project folder MainProjectName DebugOnly Main project name MicomT oolPath C Program Files Absolute path of the CubeSuite install lt gt Fncion ators 2 BuildModeName DefaultBuild Build mode name The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open On the Build Options tab of the Property panel select either one of the following properties and then click the button The Commands executed in the project building property in the Build cate
337. n error when deleting XRunBreak information False Detailed description This function deletes XRunBreak information Example of use gt gt gt debugger XRunBreak Refer None gt gt gt debugger XRunBreak Set 1 TimeType S True True gt gt gt debugger XRunBreak Refer 1Second Periodic gt gt gt debugger XRunBreak Delete True gt gt gt debugger XRunBreak Refer None R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 431 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX G Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS debugger XRunBreak Refer This function displays XRunBreak setting information V850 Simulator Specification format debugger XRunBreak Refer Argumeni s None Return value List of period time value and period information TimeType see the XRunBreakInfo property for detail Detailed description This function displays the period information period time Periodic of the set XRunBreak If there is no XRunBreak setting None is displayed Example of use gt gt gt debugger XRunBreak Refer None gt gt gt debugger XRunBreak Set 1 TimeType S True True gt gt gt debugger XRunBreak Refer 1Second Periodic R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 432 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX G Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS debugger XRunBreak Set This function configures XRunBreak information V850 Simulator
338. n for linking to external tools when starting the Python console Remark This item can be set or referred by using CubeSuite Python property common UseRemoting 4 Clear the window when the active project is changed Clears the window when the active project is changed default Does not clear the window when the active project is changed Remark This item can be set or referred by using CubeSuite Python property common ConsoleClear 5 Display the results of executing CubeSuite Python function Displays the results of executing a CubeSuite Python function in the Python console default dl Does not display the results of executing a CubeSuite Python function in the Python console Remark This item can be set or referred by using CubeSuite Python property common ViewOutput Function buttons Button Function Initialize All Settings Restores all settings on this dialog box to their default values Note however that newly added items in the General External Tools category will not be removed OK Applies all setting and closes this dialog box Cancel Ignores the setting and closes this dialog box Apply Applies all setting does not close this dialog box Help Displays the help of this dialog box R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 230 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE General Text Editor category Use this
339. n the Property panel of the debug ging tool is downloaded If downloadOption is specified the processing is performed in accordance with the specification Example of use gt gt gt debugger Download LoadModule C test testModule 1mf True gt gt gt debugger Download LoadModule C test testModule2 1lm DownloadOption SymbolOnly True False gt gt gt R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 385 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX G Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS debugger Erase This function erases the flash memory Specification format debugger Erase eraseOption EraseOption Code Argumeni s Argument Description eraseOption Specify an option The options that can be specified are shown below Type Description EraseOption Code Erase the code flash memory default EraseOption Data Erase the data flash memory EraseOption External Erase the flash memory in external space Caution IECUBE IECUBE2 and the simulator do not have functionality to delete code flash memory For this reason if you are using IECUBE IECUBE2 or the simulator you cannot omit eraseOption or specify EraseOption Code Return value If the flash memory was erased successfully True If there was an error when erasing the flash memory False Detailed description This function erases the flash memory specified by eraseOption Example of use gt
340. n the customization targets This dialog box has the following tabs Toolbars tab Commands tab R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 245 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 2 Customization area You can set detailed customization conditions For details of displayed items setting method see the description of each tab Function buttons Keyboard Opens the Customize Keyboard dialog box to assign customized items to keys on the keyboard Close Cancels the toolbar menu customization setting and closes this dialog box R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 246 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Toolbars tab You can set whether toolbars are displayed or not change toolbar names and make new toolbars Figure A 63 User Setting Dialog Box Toolbars Tab User Setting Toolbars Commands Toolbars 1 Edit Build Rename 2 Z Debug C Layout _ view Panels Program Analyzer C Stack Usage Tracer Function buttons Keyboard The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open From the Tool menu select User Setting Description of each area 1 Toolbars area Display a list of the names of registered toolbars A check mark appears in front of the name of the toolbar currently di
341. nd the debug tool via the command input method Figure A 84 Python Console Panel Python Console gt gt gt 1 The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area File menu Python Console panel dedicated items Context menu How to open From the View menu select Python Console Description of each area 1 O area Enter and run IronPython functions and control statements and CubeSuite Python functions The results of function execution and errors are also displayed Use a print statement to display the result of IronPython functioins File menu Python Console panel dedicated items The following items are exclusive for File menu in the Python Console panel other items are common to all the pan els Save Python Console Saves the content displayed in the current panel in the last text file txt to be saved Note that if this item is selected first after the program starts then the behavior is the same as selecting Save Python Console As Save Python Console As Opens the Save As dialog box to save the contents currently displayed on this panel in the designated text file txt R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 291 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Context menu Cut Cuts the selected characters and copies them to the clip board Copy Copies the sele
342. nds executed in the project cleaning Property After Setting Commands make clean R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 318 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX F USING AN EXTERNAL BUILD TOOL To change the specified commands you can use the button or enter the command directly in the text box of the subproperty F 4 2 Set the build mode You can collectively change the settings of the commands executed according to the purpose of the build The commands set in F 4 1 Set the commands are organized into what is called build mode and by changing the build mode you eliminate the necessity of changing the command settings every time i e the command settings can be made with each build mode The build mode prepared by default is only DefaultBuild Add a build mode according to the purpose of the build The method to add and change a build mode is shown below Create a new build mode Change the build mode 1 Create a new build mode Creating a new build mode is performed with duplicating an existing build mode Select Build Mode Settings from the Build menu The Build Mode Settings dialog box will open Figure F 20 Build Mode Settings Dialog Box Build Mode Settings Selected build mode Apply to All Build mode list DefaultBuild Select the build mode to be duplicated from Build mode list and click the Duplicate button The Character String Input dialog
343. nel dedicated items Context menu How to open Select either one of the Project node Subproject node Microcontroller node Design Tool node Build Tool node Debug Tool node Analyze Tool node File node or Category node in Project Tree panel Then select Property in View menu or in the context menu On the Code Generator panel click Generate Code button and then select Property from the View menu or context menu On the Code Generator Preview panel select file and then select Property from the View menu or context menu Remark When either one of the Project node Subproject node Microcontroller node Design Tool node Build Tool node Debug Tool node Analyze Tool node File node or Category node is selected in Project Tree panel while the Property panel is open the detailed information of the selected node is displayed R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 150 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Description of each area 1 2 3 4 Name for the selected node area and display status change button In the name for the selected node area the name of the selected node in Project Tree panel is displayed This area is left blank when multiple nodes are selected The display status change button expands or collapses the currently displayed detailed information display change area Collapses the entire currently displayed detailed information d
344. nformationNe 1 Execution Place Information of this product Note 2 Plug in Information Module name VersionNote 3 Assembly Versione 3 DLL file name 3 UR i Note 1 Each plug in information for this product in use Present Project InformationNe 4 Main Project Information Subproject Information This shows the absolute path of the project file the absolute path including the mtpj file name for main projects and the absolute path including the mtsp file name for subprojects Microcontroller Information The following item to the specified microcontroller information Device name Device file name List of version Build Tool Information The following out of the set build tool plug in informationN 5 Build tool name Version of the build tool plug in Version of the compiler package to use 1 Debug Tool Information The following out of the set debug tool plug in information if the debug tool is not set hide Connected debug tool name Version of the debug tool plug in Version of the debug tool control program The Error Information Which OccurredN te Notes 1 Detailed information on the occurred error information This is not shown when the information does not exist 2 The module name of a plug in not read in has the suffix added to the end The module name of a plug in read in but not functioning has the suffix ad
345. ng Input Dialog Box Character String Input 1 Function buttons The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open On the Project Tree panel after selecting a file open the message dialog box by selecting Change Extension from the context menu And then click the Yes button in the dialog box In the Build Mode Settings dialog box select a build mode to be duplicated from Build mode list and then click the Duplicate button Description of each area 1 String area Input characters in one line By default the current value of the area that this dialog box is called from is reflected to this area You cannot start a new line Remark Up to 32767 characters can be entered When the input violates any restriction the following messages will be shown in the tooltip More than maximum number of restriction in the prop The numbers of input characters exceeds the erty that called this dialog box characters cannot be maximum number of restriction in the property that specified called this dialog box Function buttons Button Function Reflects the entered characters to the area that this dialog box is called from and closes this dialog box Does not reflect the entered characters to the area that this dialog box is called from and closes this dialog box R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 200 of 4
346. ng it on the desired location 2 Ifa project other than a debug dedicated project is included in your projects then cleans will be run for that project using the build tool provided by CubeSuite see the CubeSuite Integrated Development Environment User s Manual Build 2 When running a clean of the active project Select the debug dedicated project and then select Clean active project from the context menu Figure F 32 Clean active project Item a SubProject_DebugOnly a a Build SubProject_DebugOnly A J uPD7031314 Microco E A Pin Configurator Desi Rebuild SubProject_DebugOnly A None muk Tool p Clean SubProject_DebugOnly S 850 Simulator Debug a Fie Open Folder with Explorer lt Tl 7 a ray Download Files Add gt El Remove form Project t Shift Del iy aj Rename F2 Property R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 327 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX F USING AN EXTERNAL BUILD TOOL F 5 4 Run a rapid build CubeSuite can automatically start a build see F 5 1 Run a build when one of the following events occurs When any one of the following files that are added to the debug dedicated project is updated C source file assembler source file header file jump table file and symbol address file When the C source file assembler source file header file jump table file or symbol address file is added to or removed from the debug dedicated project W
347. nge the arrangement of these commands using the following buttons in this area Opens the Add Command Dialog Box for selecting a command to be added above the command cur rently selected in this area In the Add Command Dialog Box all commands that can be added are displayed grouped by their categories First select the category of command in the Categories area then select the command you want to add and press the OK button pressing the Cancel button cancels the addition of the command and closes this dialog box Delete Deletes the command currently selected in this area Move Up Moves the command currently selected in this area up one line Move Down Moves the command currently selected in this area down one line Modify Selection Displays the following menu items for editing the arrangement of the menu item or button currently selected in this area Menu Item Description Reset Resets the selected menu item button Delete Deletes the selected menu item button Name Displays the name of the selected menu item button Default Style Checking this menu item returns the display style of the selected menu item button to the default state by default Text Only Always Checking this menu item displays the selected menu item button by text only the icon will not be displayed Text Only in Menus This is enabled only when a menu item is selected Checking this m
348. nics product before using it in a particular application You may not use any Renesas Electronics product for any application for which it is not intended Renesas Electronics shall not be in any way liable for any damages or losses incurred by you or third parties arising from the use of any Renesas Electronics product for which the product is not intended by Renesas Electronics You should use the Renesas Electronics products described in this document within the range specified by Renesas Electronics especially with respect to the maximum rating operating supply voltage range movement power voltage range heat radiation characteristics installation and other product characteristics Renesas Electronics shall have no liability for malfunctions or damages arising out of the use of Renesas Electronics products beyond such specified ranges Although Renesas Electronics endeavors to improve the quality and reliability of its products semiconductor products have specific characteristics such as the occurrence of failure at a certain rate and malfunctions under certain use conditions Further Renesas Electronics products are not subject to radiation resistance design Please be sure to implement safety measures to guard them against the possibility of physical injury and injury or damage caused by fire in the event of the failure of a Renesas Electronics product such as safety design for hardware and software including but not limited to redundancy fire c
349. node Subproject tab Microcontroller node Microcontroller Information tab Design Tool node Pin Configurator Information tab Top View Setting tab Generation tab Macro Setting tab See the CubeSuite Integrated Development Environment User s Manual Design for details about this tab R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 151 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Build Tool node Except for a debug dedicated projec Common Options tab N 1 pet Compile Options tab Link Options tab ROMization Process Options tab CA850 CA78KOR ROMize Options tab CX Hex Output Options tab CC RX CX Hex Convert Options tab CA850 Object Convert Options tab CA78KOR CA78K0 Librarian Options tab CC RX Library Genetate Options tab CC RX NC30 Localised support Archive Options tab CA850 Create Library Options tab CA78KOR CA78K0O CX Section File Generate Options tab CA850 Dump Options tab CA850 Cross Reference Options tab CA850 Memory Layout Visualization Options tab CA850 I Assemble Options tab gt l I Variables Functions Relocation Options tab CA78KOR Variables Relocation Options tab CA78K0 Memory Bank Relocation Options tab CA78K0 See the CubeSuite Integrated Development Environment User s Manual Build for details about this tab Build Tool node Build Options tab For a De
350. nstall CubeSuite CubeSuite Vxx xx xx 2 J Download size xxxKB This is update for CubeSuite Detail The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area How to open From the CubeSuite Update Manager window menu area click Download and install From the Select updates page main area click Download and install Description of each area 1 Button Install Begins the download and installation process This button is disabled if no updates are selected Caution If a emulator USB driver is installed on Windows Vista Windows 7 or Windows 8 the warning dialog box may appear 2 Update Selection area Displays a list of items to update The following information is displayed for each update Category Displays the category of the update Updates with the same category are displayed together Title Displays the title of the update Download size Displays the download size of the update Summary Displays a summary of the update information R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 98 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Detail This appears if there is detailed information about the update Selecting it will display details in a browser R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 99 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Download only page This page displays a list of s
351. nt User s Manual Build for details about this tab Notes 1 For details on the debug dedicated project see APPENDIX F USING AN EXTERNAL BUILD TOOL 2 This tab is also displayed in the following case CA78KO0 CA78KOR When Yes is selected in Output assemble file property in Assembly File category in Individ ual Compile Options tab CA850 When Yes is selected in Set individual compile option property in Build category in Build Settings tab CA850 When aC source file is selected and on the Individual Compiler Options tab under the Out put Files category the Output assembly files property is set to Yes Fs b Click the Generate Code button in the Code Generator panel Macro Setting tab See the CubeSuite Integrated Development Environment User s Manual Design for details about this tab c On the Code Generator Preview panel select file File Setting tab See the CubeSuite Integrated Development Environment User s Manual Design for details about this tab Remark When more than two components are selected in Project Tree panel only the tab that is common to all the components is displayed If the property is modified that is taken effect to the selected components all of which are common to all Dialog boxes opened from the Property panel The following dialog boxes are opened from the Property panel Character String Input dialog box See Charac
352. o as Subproject node Subprojects added to the project For subprojects see 2 Projects and subprojects Note See APPENDIX F USING AN EXTERNAL BUILD TOOL for details on a debug dedicated project Remarks 1 Only the tools corresponding to the microcontroller in use are shown 2 When more than one components are selected only the tab that is common to all the components is displayed When more than one files are selected and their common properties are different that field is left blank R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Feb 01 2013 2tENESAS Page 38 of 491 CubeSuite V2 00 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 Projects and subprojects Projects can have subprojects added to the level beneath them The subproject s settings information is saved to a subproject file cssp Subprojects for example are used in the following ways When also creating a project to create library files used in the project create a project to create library files as a subproject When developing the same application system for different microcontrollers create the projects that differ for the microcontroller as subprojects When subprojects are added this manual call the project the main project as opposed to its subprojects Project is a common term for the main project and subprojects Figure 2 43 Project Tree Panel When Subprojects Added Project Tree ERE sample Project PE uPD70F3746 Microcontroller F A Pin
353. o be shown in the text area P gt is displayed The absolute path pops up when the mouse cursor is hovered over Function buttons Button Function OK Closes this dialog box and creates a project according to the designated condition Cancel Cancels the designated condition and closes the dialog box Help Displays the help of this dialog box R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 132 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Project Convert Setting dialog box This dialog box includes the settings for conversion from the old development environment CubeSuite HEW PM project or workspace to a CubeSuite project Remark For details of the method of conversion of an old development environment project see the following 2 7 8 Convert a CubeSuite project into a CubeSuite project 2 7 9 Convert a HEW project into a CubeSuite project 2 7 10 Convert a PM project into a CubeSuite project Figure A 18 Project Convert Setting Dialog Box Project Convert Setting Project Description Project settings SRE New microcontroller L Projects Microcontroller 2 New microcontroller a Product Name R5F52105AxFF ERE On chip ROM size KBytes 128 it On chip RAM size Bytes 20480 1 2 iei ERED Additional Information Package PLOPOOSQA 4 l pin R5F521054xFN 80pin R5F521054xFP 100pin JE R5F521054xLJ 100pin d R5F52106AxFF 80pin zl
354. ocontroller node is selected Change Microcontroller Opens the Change Microconiroller dialog box to change the microcontroller When multiple Microcontroller nodes for the projects using the same microcontroller are selected the microcontroller settings can be changed at one time Property Displays the selected microcontroller s property in Property panel 4 When a Build Tool node is selected Only menu items that are displayed when a Build Tool node for a debug dedicated project see APPENDIX F USING AN EXTERNAL BUILD TOOL is selected are shown here See the CubeSuite Integrated Development Environment User s Manual Build for the information about the Build Tool node for a project other than a debug dedicated project Build Project Runs a build the selected project main project or subproject A build of a subproject is also run when it is added in the project Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 144 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Rebuild Project Runs a rebuild the selected project main project or subproject A rebuild of a sub project is also run when it is added in the project Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Clean Project Runs a clean of the selected project main project or subproject A clean of a sub project is also run when it is added in the project
355. of HEW Tab name of build tool property in CubeSuite file name Option of HEW project gt Option of CubeSuite project Number Description 1 Options not to use Build mode If an option that has been set in a HEW project and is not used in a CubeSuite project option that has been deleted by upgrading the compiler package and HEW option exists the informa tion is output for each build mode in the format shown below Tool name Tab name of build tool property in CubeSuitetr Option The information for individual compile options is output in the format shown below Tool name Tab name of build tool property in CubeSuite file name Option Build modes are output in the following order Debug Build Release Build user created build mode Debug Build and Release Build are the build modes that HEW provides by default They differ depending on whether the debug information output option is set or not Other Options is output if Tab name of build tool property in CubeSuite for Tool name does not exist R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 65 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Number Description Options to change Build mode If an option that has been set in a HEW project and has been changed to use in a CubeSuite project option that the range the parameter can be specified has been changed and option that has been changed by upgrading the compiler package ex
356. og Box Question Q0 201006 p If the registered files opened by some external tools exit that tools To P continue the processing press 0K ox E Remark This dialog box only appears if in the Option dialog box in the General External Text Editor category you selected the Use external text editor property To continue with the operation click the OK button The Pack Settings dialog box will open R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 78 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 86 Pack Settings Dialog Box Pack Settings Pack project and tools Pack project only Saves this product set and the project set together in 1 folder Packing may take a few minutes to a few dozen minutes Place D Documents and Settings xxxxxx My Documents Top folder of pack target D work sample OK Cancel Help Specify the pack type project and tools or project only save location folder and the top folder of the packing target on the dialog box Caution Specify a folder other than the project folder to save to Remark Specify the top folder of the packing target to save with the project folder structure preserved Figure 2 87 Sample of Project Pack Specify top folder Project folder Ma The folder structure of the files under the work P rj i l J i folder is preserved in the saved pack src re L inc S
357. oject The project convert information file is output to the project folder of the project Subproject The project convert information file is displayed the File node of the project Subproject on the Project Tree panel The output format of the project convert information file is shown below 1 Time and date on which a project was converted 2 lt IDE version gt CubeSuite IDE Version Date 3 lt Compiler package version gt Compiler package used in PM project Version gt Compiler package used in CubeSuite project Version 4 lt Options not to use Build mode gt Tool name of PM Tab name of build tool property in CubeSuitet Option 5 lt Options to change Build mode gt Tool name of PM Tab name of build tool property in CubeSuitet Option of PM project gt Option of CubeSuite project Number Description Time and date on which a project was converted The time and date on which a PM project was converted into a CubeSuite project is output using format dddd mmmm dd yyyy hh mm ss AM PM IDE version and date The version of CubeSuite and the date are output Compiler package version The compiler package used in a PM project and the version and the compiler package used in a CubeSuite project and the version are output The version of the compiler package used in a CubeSuite projectis is the latest version in the compiler packages which are installed in the CubeSuite environ
358. oject the versions of the IDE and compiler package and conversion information of options is output to a file as project divert information The project divert information file name is ProjectDivertInformationn txt n 2 to 100 nis not added normally It is added if the file to be created already exist The project divert information file is output for each created project subproject The project divert information file is output to the project folder of the project Subproject The project divert information file is added to the File node of the project subproject on the Project Tree panel The output format of the project divert information file is shown below 1 Time and date on which a project was created 2 lt CubeSuite IDE Integrated Development Environment Framework version gt CubeSuite IDE Version of IDE of CA850 project gt Version of IDE of CX project 3 lt Compiler package version gt CA850 Version gt CX Version 4 lt Options not to use Build mode gt Command name Tab name of build tool property Option 5 lt Options to change Build mode gt Command name Tab name of build tool property Option of CA850 project gt Option of CX project Number Description Time and date on which a project was created The time and date on which a CX project was created by reusing a CA850 project is output using for mat dddd mmmm dd yyyy hh mm ss AM PM CubeSuite IDE Integra
359. ol CubeSuite and the debugging tool by executing Python functions and control statements in the panel Figure 2 96 Python Console Panel Python Console DebugTool Change DebugTool Simulator DebugTool GetType i Connect i Remark See APPENDIX G Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS for details about the Python console and Python functions R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 86 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 12 Manipulate CubeSuite on the Command Line You can launch CubeSuite from the command line e g the Windows command prompt and control it via command input without displaying the Main window This section describes the control of CubeSuite when launched from the Windows command prompt From the command prompt execute CubeSuite exe or CubeSuiteW exe located in the CubeSuite installation folder 1 When executing CubeSuite exe If you execute CubeSuite exe you can launch CubeSuite load plugins and execute builds without displaying the Main window The format to specify on the command line is shown below CubeSuite exeA bb br bcb bcA build mode name A npAplug in name plug in name A npall A plug in optionA plug in parameter Aproject file name A One or more spaces Can be omitted When options are separated by pipeline characters any one of the options can be specified Pattern in proceeding can be repeated
360. older see the description of the area that this dialog box is called from Function buttons Button Function OK Reflects the entered text to the text box that opened this dialog box and closes this dialog box Cancel Does not reflect the entered text to the text box that opened this dialog box and closes this dialog box Help Displays the help of this dialog box R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 174 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Encoding dialog box This dialog box is used to select a file encoding Remark The target file name is displayed on the title bar Figure A 31 Encoding Dialog Box main c Encoding Available encodings 1146 IBM EBCDIC UK Euro 1147 IBM EBCDIC France Euro 1148 IBM EBCDIC International E uro a f 1149 IBM EBCDIC Icelandic Euro 1200 Unicode 1201 Unicode Big Endian 1250 Central European Windows 1251 Cyrillic w i Function buttons The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open From the File menu open the Open File dialog box by selecting Open with Encoding and then click the Open button in the dialog box Description of each area 1 Available encodings area Select the encoding to be set from this area Function buttons Button Function Opens the selected file in the Open File d
361. olds mnemonic information ReadAddress This holds read address information ReadData This holds read data information WriteAddress This holds write address information WriteData This holds write data information VectorAddress This holds vector address information VectorData This holds the vector data IsDma Detailed description This holds whether the data is DMA or not True The data is DMA False The data is other than DMA Tracelnfo is a class and it is the structure of the return value from the debugger XTrace Dump function R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Feb 01 2013 2tENESAS Page 451 of 491 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX G Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS Example of use gt gt gt info debugger XTrace Dump 10 853 00h00min00s001ms704us000ns 854 00hOOmin00s001ms706us000ns 855 00hO0Omin00s001ms706us000ns 856 00h0OOmin00s001ms706us000ns 857 00h0O0Omin00s001ms710us000ns 858 00hOOmin00s001ms712us000ns 859 00hOOmin00s001ms716us000ns 860 00hOOmin00s001ms720us000ns 861 00h00min00s001ms720us000ns 862 00h00min00s001ms724us000ns gt gt gt print info 0 FrameNumber 853 gt gt gt print Timestamp 1704000 gt gt gt print FetchAddress 706 gt gt gt print info Mnemonic movhi Oxffff rl gp gt gt gt print info ReadAddress None gt gt gt print ReadData None gt gt gt print False gt gt gt gt g
362. ollowing table describes the escape characters and sequences that can be used in regular expressions Table E 1 List of Character Escapes Escaped Character Description Ordinary characters Characters other than match themselves a Matches a bell alarm u0007 t Matches a tab u0009 r Matches a carriage return u000D v Matches a vertical tab u000B f Matches a form feed u000C n Matches a new line u000A e Matches an escape u001B 040 Matches an ASCII character as octal exactly three digits The character 040 represents a space x20 Matches an ASCII character using hexadecimal representation exactly two digits u0020 Matches a Unicode character using hexadecimal representation exactly four digits When followed by a character that is not recognized as an escaped character matches that charac ter For example is the same as x2A E 2 Character Classes The following table describes character matching syntax Table E 2 List of Character Classes Character Class Description Matches any character except n When within a character class the will be treated as a period character aeiou Matches any single character in the specified set of characters Saeiou Matches any single character not in the specified set of characters 0 9a fA F Use of a hyphen allows specification of contiguous character ranges
363. olor G External Tools G Build Debug E Python Console E Text Editor Update S E Others E User Information Function buttons Initialize All Settings Cancel Apply Help The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open From the Tool menu select Options Description of each area 1 Category selection area Select the items to configure from the following categories Category Description General Startup and Exit category Configure startup and shutdown General Display category Configure messages from the application General External Text Editor category Configure the external text editor General Font and Color category Configure the fonts and colors shown on each panel General External Tools category Configure the startup of external tools General Build Debug category Configure building and debugging General Python Console category Configure the Python console General Text Editor category Configure the text editor R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 208 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE General Update category Configure update Other User Information category Configure user information 2 Settings This area is used to configure the various options for the selected category For details a
364. omatically hide panels 82 2 9 2 Floating a window 82 2 9 3 Docking windows 82 2 9 4 Displaying multiple panels 83 2 9 5 Resetting the window layout 83 2 10 Acceletate the Startup Time of CubeSuite 84 2 10 1 Use rapid start 84 2 10 2 Use acceleration utility 85 2 11 Execute Python Fuctions 86 2 12 Manipulate CubeSuite on the Command Line 87 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 91 A 1 Description 91 APPENDIX B GLOSSARY 297 APPENDIX C HOW THE MANUALS ARE ORGANIZED 298 APPENDIX D INPUT CONVENTIONS 300 D 1 Input Conventions 300 D 2 Displaying Icons at Locations of Input Errors 301 APPENDIX E REGULAR EXPRESSIONS SYNTAX 302 E 1 Character Escapes 302 E 2 Character Classes 302 E 3 Supported Unicode General Categories 303 E 4 Quantifiers 304 E 5 Atomic Zero Width Assertions 304 E 6 Grouping Constructs 305 E 7 Substitutions 305 E 8 Other Consiructs 306 APPENDIX F USING AN EXTERNAL BUILD TOOL 307 F 1 Overview 307 F 2 Create a Debug dedicated Project 308 F 3 Add a File to a Project 309 F 3 1 Add a download file 309 F 3 2 Add C source files and other files 311 F 3 3 Remove an added file from a project 315 F 4 Make Settings for Build Operations 316 F 4 1 Set the commands 316 F 4 2 Set the build mode 319 F 4 3 Set the target project for a build 321 F 5 Runa Build 323 F 5 1 Runa
365. ompleting a build default False Return a prompt without waiting to complete a build Return value When waitBuild is set to True If a build was completed successfully True If there was an error when running a build False When waitBuild is set to False If a build successfully started execution True If a build failed to start execution False Detailed description This function runs a build of a file specified by fileName If rebuild is set to True then a rebuild of a specified file is run If waitBuild is set to False then a prompt is returned without waiting to complete a build The build BuildCompleted event is issued when a build completes Example of use gt gt gt build File C test test c True gt gt gt R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 359 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX G Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS build Update This function updates the dependencies for the build tool Specification format build Update Argumeni s None Return value None Detailed description This function updates the dependencies of the files during build Example of use gt gt gt build Update gt gt gt R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 360 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX G Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS G3 5 CubeSuite Python function for debug tool Below is a list of CubeSuite
366. on 1 Break0001 Enable test1 c main 2 2 Break0002 Disable test2 c _sub4 10 gt gt gt print info 0 Number 1 gt gt gt print info 0 Name Break0001 gt gt gt print info 0 BreakType Hardware gt gt gt print info 0 Enable True gt gt gt print info 0 Address1 test1 c _main 2 gt gt gt print info 0 Address2 None gt gt gt print info 1 Number 2 gt gt gt print info 1 Name Break0002 gt gt gt print info 1 BreakType Hardware gt gt gt print info 1 Enable False gt gt gt print info 1 Address1l test2 c _sub4 10 gt gt gt print info 1 Address2 None gt gt gt R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Feb 01 2013 ztENESAS Page 442 of 491 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX G Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS BuildCompletedEventArgs This class holds the parameters when a build completes Type class BuildCompletedEventArgs Error None Cancelled False HasBuildError False HasBuildWarning False Variable Variable Description Error When an exception occurs in the build this holds the error contents System Exception Cancelled This holds whether the build execution was canceled or not HasBuildError This holds whether an error occurred in the build or not HasBuildWarning This holds whether a warning occurred in the build or not Detailed description BreakCompletedEventArgs is a class and it is passed as the argument onl
367. on and notify the user when the download is complete R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 107 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Notify me but do not automatically download them If corresponding updates are found during periodic checks for updates notify the user Do nothing If corresponding updates are found during periodic checks for updates do not notify the user 2 Internet Connections area Describes the Internet connection Function buttons OK Finalizes the settings reflects them and closes the dialog box Cancel Cancels any changes made to the settings and closes the dialog box R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 108 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Task Tray When the application is checking for or downloading updates in the background an icon appears in the Windows task tray Figure A 12 Sample Task Tray Display i Updates are found Please click here to run updates 1 18 AM The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area How to open Appears automatically when the application is checking for or downloading updates in the background Description of each area 1 Task tray The following icons appear when the application is checking for or downloading updates in the background This icon indicates that the application is checking for
368. on FUNCTIONS G3 3 CubeSuite Python function for project Below is a list of CubeSuite Python functions for a project Table G 3 CubeSuite Python Function For Project Function Name Function Description project Change This function changes the active project project Close This function closes a project project Create This function creates a new project project File Add This function adds a file to the active project project File Exists This function confirms whether the file exists in the active project project File Information This function displays the list of the files registered in the active project project File Remove This function removes a file from the active project project GetDeviceNameList This function displays the list of the device names of the microcontroller project Information This function displays the list of project files project Open This function opens a project R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Feb 01 2013 2tENESAS Page 343 of 491 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX G Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS project Change This function changes the active project Specification format project Change projectName Argumeni s projectName Specify the full path of the project or subproject to be changed Return value If the active project was changed successfully True If there was an error when changing
369. on butons The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open On the Project Tree panel select the microcontroller node and then select Change microcontroller from the context menu Description of each area 1 Change microcontroller to area Select a microcontroller to be used a Microcontroller search box You can search a microcontroller selected in the list of microcontrollers simply b List of microcontrollers Select a microcontroller The microcontrollers can be specified are listed and categorized by their nicknames The following information on the selected microcontroller that is used in the project is shown in the box at right Product Name On chip ROM size Kbytes RX R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 167 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Internal ROM size Kbytes V850 R8C Localised support RL78 78KOR 78K0 On chip RAM size Bytes RX Internal RAM size Bytes V850 R8C Localised support RL78 78KOR 78K0 Additional InformationNete Note Other information appears only when present Function buttons Button Function Closes this dialog box and changes the microcontroller according to the designated condi tion Note that this button is invalid when the target microcontroller after the change is the same as the current microcontrol
370. on dialog box under the General Startup and Exit cate gory Function buttons Closes this dialog box Displays the help of this dialog box R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 265 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Other Windows dialog box This dialog box is used to select one of the divide panels shown in the Main window to activate or close Figure A 73 Other Windows Dialog Box Other Windows Propert Activate Code Generator Code Generator Preview start asm Close Windowis main c sysyeminit c inittab asm sysyem c sysyem_user c macrodriver h 1 Function buttons The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open From the Window menu select Other Windows Remark Other Windows only appears when ten or more divide panels are open Description of each area 1 Select divide panel area Selecting a divide panel switches the target Function buttons Button Function Activate Activates the divide panel selected in the Select divide panel area and close this dia log box Close Window s Closes the divide panel selected in the Select divide panel area and close this dialog box R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 266 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE R20UT2444EJ0100
371. on format common ConsoleClear bool Setting s Set whether to verify during writes True Verify during writes False Do not verify during writes Reference Current set value Detailed description This property sets or refers whether to clear the display of the Python console when changing the active project Example of use gt gt gt print common ConsoleClear True gt gt gt common ConsoleClear False R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 456 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX G Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS common EnableRemotingStartup This property sets and displays the setting for enabling or disabling the function for linking to an external tool at Cube Suite startup Specification format common EnableRemotingStartup bool Setting s Setting Description bool Set whether to enable or disable the function for linking to an external tool at CubeSuite startup True Enable the function for linking to an external tool default False Disable the function for linking to an external tool Use the common UseRemoting property to enable or disable linking to an external tool while running Reference Current set value Detailed description This property sets and displays the setting for enabling or disabling the function for linking to an external tool at CubeSuite startup Example of use gt gt gt print common EnableRemotin
372. on of each area 1 Encode Select the encoding to be set from the drop down list The items of the drop down list are displayed according to the following sequence Note that the same encoding and encoding which are not supported by the current OS will not be displayed Current encoding of the file default Default encoding of the current OS Most recently used encodings maximum 4 Popular encodings for current locale e g for United States locale it will be Western European Windows Unicode UTF 8 All other encodings supported by the OS in alphabetical order 2 Newline code Select the newline code to be set from the drop down list You can select any of items below Windows CR LF Macintosh CR R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 194 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Unix LF An active newline entry is selected by default 3 Reload the file with these settings Reloads the file with the selected encoding and newline code when the OK button is clicked FJ Does not reload the file when the OK button is clicked default Function buttons Button Function Sets the selected encoding and newline code to the target file and closes this dialog box If Reload the file with these settings is selected sets the selected encoding and newline code to the target file and reloads the file And then closes this dialog box Cancels the s
373. ontrol and malfunction prevention appropriate treatment for aging degradation or any other appropriate measures Because the evaluation of microcomputer software alone is very difficult please evaluate the safety of the final products or systems manufactured by you Please contact a Renesas Electronics sales office for details as to environmental matters such as the environmental compatibility of each Renesas Electronics product Please use Renesas Electronics products in compliance with all applicable laws and regulations that regulate the inclusion or use of controlled substances including without limitation the EU RoHS Directive Renesas Electronics assumes no liability for damages or losses occurring as a result of your noncompliance with applicable laws and regulations Renesas Electronics products and technology may not be used for or incorporated into any products or systems whose manufacture use or sale is prohibited under any applicable domestic or foreign laws or regulations You should not use Renesas Electronics products or technology described in this document for any purpose relating to military applications or use by the military including but not limited to the development of weapons of mass destruction When exporting the Renesas Electronics products or technology described in this document you should comply with the applicable export control laws and regulations and follow the procedures required by such laws and regulations It
374. ontroller Name Description of each area 1 Select updates area If a microcontroller was specified the microcontroller name appears Download and install Downloads the selected updates and after the downloads are complete install them Download only Downloads the selected updates only 2 Update selection area Displays a list of items to update Click Select all to select the check boxes of all updates The following information is displayed for each update R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 96 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Category Displays the category of the update Updates with the same category are displayed together Title Displays the title of the update Download size Displays the download size of the update Summary Displays a summary of the update information Detail This appears if there is detailed information about the update Selecting it will display details in a browser 3 Button Hide If an update is selected in the Update Selection area it is completely hidden R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 97 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Download and install page This page displays a list of selected updates and starts the download and installation process Figure A 3 Download and install Page y oe Download and install BS D Total 1Update s xxx KB 1 I
375. ools in the PM project to the version of the build tools after conversion the added options are set to the build tools default values after conversion 3 The project files after conversion are created in the folder the PM project file was placed in If there is already a project file with the same name _number_ number 1 2 will be added to the file name R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 71 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 4 After conversion the build mode will have the same name as that of a PM project Any characters that are not allowed in a CubeSuite folder name however lt gt will be replaced by underscores _ If there is another build mode with the same name after conversion then the _n_ n 1 2 will be appended to the build mode name 5 The following PM and build tool versions are supported for conversion PM V6 30 and CC78KO V4 00 RA78K0 V4 00 or higher 78K0 PM V6 20 and CC78KOR V1 00 RA78KOR V1 00 or higher 78KOR and PM V6 00 and CA850 V3 00 or higher V850 The latest version of the compiler pack age installed on your computer is set as the version of your build tool 6 The conversion result is output to a file as project convert information The project convert information file name is ProjectConvertInformation_projectname txt The project convert information file is output for each converted project Subpr
376. option setting file When you first select a folder the folder is set to C Documents and Settings user name My Documents The second and subsequent times this defaults to the last folder that was selected 2 List of files area File list that matches to the selections in Save in and Save as type is shown 3 File name area Specify the name of an option setting file R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 285 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 4 Save as type area The following file type is displayed Option Setting File mtpu Option setting file Function buttons Save Saves an option setting file as the designated file name Cancel Closes this dialog box R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 286 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Select Program dialog box This dialog box is used to select the executable file of an external tool Figure A 82 Select Program Dialog Box Select Program 1 4 Look in E My Documents My Recent Documents sample I _pi Desktop 7 My Documents 9 My Computer 3 PFile name f 4 y Network iles of type Program files exe he Function buttons The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open Inthe General External Tools category o
377. or the CubeSuite Python functions Specification format Help Argumeni s None Return value None Detailed description This function starts CubeSuite s integrated help and displays the help for CubeSuite Python functions Example of use gt gt gt Help R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 336 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX G Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS This function registers a hook or callback function Specification format Hook scriptFile Argumeni s scriptFile Specify the script file where the hook or callback function is defined Return value None Detailed description This function loads scriptFile and registers a hook or callback function in the script file There is no problem even if functions other than a hook or callback function are declared The hook or the callback function is registered when the script file is ended If Hook functions are declared they are called after CubeSuite events occur The types of hook function are shown below Note that hook functions do not take parameters Hook Function Event BeforeBuild Before build BeforeDownload Before download AfterDownload After download AfterCpuReset After CPU reset BeforeCpuRun Before execute AfterCpuStop After break Example Sample script file def BeforeDownload Processing you want to perform before the download
378. ory data in ID tagged Motorola format debugger Upload Tektronix This function saves the memory data in Techtronics format debugger Upload TektronixldTag This function saves the memory data in ID tagged Techtronics format debugger Watch GetValue This function refers a variable value debugger Watch SetValue This function sets a variable value debugger Where This function displays a stack backtrace debugger Whereami This function displays a location debugger XCoverage Clear This function clears the coverage memory debugger XCoverage GetCoverage This function gets the coverage debugger XRunBreak Delete This function deletes XRunBreak setting information debugger XRunBreak Refer This function displays XRunBreak setting information debugger XRunBreak Set This function configures XRunBreak settings debugger XTime This function displays timing information between Go and Break debugger XTrace Clear This function clears the trace memory debugger XTrace Dump R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Feb 01 2013 This function dumps the trace data 2tENESAS Page 362 of 491 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX G Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS debugger Address This function evaluates an address expression Specification format debugger Address expression Argumeni s expression Specify an address expression Return
379. ow Panel Dialog Box Name Function Description Save As dialog box This dialog box is used to save the editing file or contents of each panel to a file with a name Open Option Setting File dialog box This dialog box is used to select an option setting file to import to the Gen eral Font and Color category of the Option dialog box Save Option Setting File dialog box This dialog box is used to save the setting of the General Font and Color category of the Option dialog box to an option setting file Select Program dialog box This dialog box is used to select the executable file of an external tool Select External Text Editor dialog box This dialog box is used to select the executable file of an external text editor Python Console panel This panel is used to use IronPython to control CubeSuite and the debug tool via the command input method Select Script File dialog box This dialog box is used to select the script file for the Python console CubeSuite Uninstaller window This window is used to specify one or more installed CubeSuite products to uninstall at once R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 93 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE CubeSuite Update Manager window This window displays the status of and controls the update function Figure A 1 CubeSuite Update Manager Window CubeSuite Update Manager Select updates Z All Select update
380. owing menu items beneath this button Menu Item Description Reset Resets the selected menu item button Delete Deletes the selected menu item button Name Displays the name of the selected menu item button Default Style Checking this menu item returns the display style of the selected menu item button to the default state by default Text Only Always Checking this menu item displays the selected menu item button by text only the icon will not be displayed Text Only in Menu This is enabled only when a menu item is selected Checking this menu item displays the selected menu item button by text only the icon will not be displayed Image and Text Checking this menu item displays the selected menu item button by both text and icon Begin a Group Inserts separator just before the selected menu item button Recently Used This item is not supported in this version Rearrange Commands Function buttons Opens the Rearrange Commands dialog box for changing the arrangement including addi tion and deletion of menu items and tool bar buttons in the Main window Keyboard Opens the Customize Keyboard dialog box to assign customized items to keys on the keyboard Close Cancels the toolbar menu customization setting and closes this dialog box R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Feb 01 2013 2tENESAS Page 250 of 491 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE
381. ows Vista 32 bit OS 64 bit OS Windows 7 32 bit OS 64 bit OS Windows 8 32 bit OS 64 bit OS Microsoft NET Framework 4 Microsoft Visual C 2010 SP1 runtime libraries Internet Explorer 6 0 or higher 3 Supported target environments Emulator IECUBE IECUBE2 MINICUBE MINICUBE2 E1 E20 EZ Emulator Simulator R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 11 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS This chapter describes how to install CubeSuite how to use the license management and update feature and the procedure from launching CubeSuite to starting development 2 1 Installing CubeSuite This section describes how to install CubeSuite 1 Insert the DVD into the drive The Preparing to Install page appears automatically Figure 2 1 Preparing to Install Page the Renesas Electronics microcontroller development tools installer Readme First CubeSuite Thank you for purchasing CubeSuitet The following document provides information about CubeSuite development tool components This includes summaries and operating precautions Please read this document before using CubeSuitet Read me first Readme PDF will not be installed Please save it to your PC Adobe Reader is required to view this file Please visit Adobe Systems Incorporated s web site for more information Click the button below to start CubeSuitet setup application Beg
382. pdates and after the downloads are complete install them Download only Downloads the selected updates only Review update history Displays the update history Restore hidden updates Displays the Restore hidden updates page Change settings Displays the Update Manager Options dialog box Help Displays help Exit Exits Update Manager 2 Main area Switch the display to one of the following pages in accordance with the active function Select updates page Download and install page Download only page Finish page History page Restore hidden updates page Error page R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Feb 01 2013 2tENESAS Page 95 of 491 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Select updates page This page displays a list of available updates Select updates to download and install Figure A 2 Select updates Page Select updates It s strongly recommended that you apply the updates to keep software up to date 4 74 EXDownload and install Download only Total OUpdate s OKB Select all CubeSuite O amp CubeSuite Vxx xx xx Download size xxxKB This is update for CubeSuite Detail o The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area How to open From the CubeSuite Update Manager window menu area click All From the CubeSuite Update Manager window menu area click Microc
383. pj on the dialog box The project file is saved in the speci fied folder with the filename Cautions 1 The files registered to the project are the same as those in the original project the files regis tered to the project are not copied 2 If there is already a subproject file in the same folder and with the same file name excluding the file extension as the project file then the project file will not be saved correctly Change the name of the main project or the subproject R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 76 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Remarks 1 If you save the project file with a different name from the original project file and then modify one or both of them then the project files will have different contents 2 To save the subproject files new folders are created with the names new project name_n n 1 2 in the same folder as where the project file is to be saved One subproject file is saved in one folder 2 8 2 Save all files You can save the project file and all the files being edited From the File or Project menu select Save All the project file is overwritten with the current settings information and all files being edited are saved Figure 2 82 Save All Item New gt E Open Ctrl O Open with Encoding Add gt Close Project RU Close main c E Save Project Ctrl Shift 5 ae Save Project As ke Save main c Ctrl 5 A Save
384. play how the process has been progressed when the time consuming process is taken place This dialog box automatically closes when the process in progress is done Figure A 44 Progress Status Dialog Box Progress Status o Loading project 1 J 2 O Function buttons The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open The dialog box automatically opens when a message is output while the time consuming process is in progress Description of each area 1 Message Display Area Displays the message output while process is in progress edit not allowed 2 Progress bar The progress bar shows the current progress of the process in progress with the bar length When the process is 100 done the bar gets to the right end this dialog box automatically closed Function buttons Cancel Cancels the process in progress and closes this dialog box Note that if the process termination is impossible this button is disabled R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 204 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Pack Settings dialog box This dialog box is used to pack and save the project and this product Figure A 45 Pack Settings Dialog Box Pack Settings Pack project and tools Pack project only Saves this product set and the project set together in 1 folder Packing
385. played on the panel Find Replace Context menu Copy Opens the Find and Replace dialog box with the Quick Find tab target Opens the Find and Replace dialog box with the Replace in Files tab target Copies the selected characters to the clip board Select All Selects all the messages displayed on the panel Clear Deletes all the messages displayed on the panel Tag Jump Jumps to the caret line in the editor indicated by the message file line and column Help for Message R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Feb 01 2013 Displays the help with regard to the displayed message or the message at the current caret Note that the help is only for warning error messages 7tENESAS Page 166 of 491 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Change Microcontroller dialog box This dialog box is used to change the microcontroller to be used in the project Remark See 2 7 11 Change the microcontroller for details about changing the microcontroller Figure A 27 Change Microcontroller Dialog Box Change Microcontroller Change microcontroller to x te VE50ESA3 Produa NameuPD Z0 are g A E ternal size tes 2 EA she Internal RAM a at 440 JE pPD7OF3745 1 44pin qa 4 ye VE50ES HES cH 8 VB50ES HF3 cH We V850ES HG3 cH te V850ES HJ3 cH We V850ESAIG3 H cH We V850ES IG3 U cH te V850ESH3 H cH We V850ESJH3 U cH te V850ESAC3 H a VORNES HEH Functi
386. ple of use gt gt gt debugger Download Information 1 DefaultBuild test 1mf R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 384 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX G Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS debugger Download LoadModule This function downloads a load module Specification format debugger Download LoadModule fileName downloadOption DownloadOption Both append False flashErase False Argumenit s Argument Description fileName Specify a download file downloadOption Specify an option The options that can be specified are shown below Type Description DownloadOption NoSymbol Do not load symbol information DownloadOption SymbolOnly Only load symbol information DownloadOption Both Load both symbol information and object information default Specify whether to make an additional download True Perform additional download False Perform overwrite download default flashErase Specify whether to initialize a flash memory before download True Initialize a flash memory before download False Do not initialize a flash memory before download default Return value If a binary file was downloaded successfully True If there was an error when downloading a binary file False Detailed description This function downloads a load module If fileName is not specified the file specified on the Download File Settings tab i
387. pload Motorola This function saves the memory data in Motorola format Specification format debugger Upload Motorola fileName addressi1 address2 force False Argumeni s Argument Description fileName Specify a file name address1 Specify an upload start address address2 Specify an upload end address force Specify whether to overwrite True Overwrite False Do not overwrite default Return value If the memory data was uploaded successfully True If there was an error when uploading the memory data False Detailed description This function saves the memory data from address to address2 in Motorola format Example of use gt gt gt debugger Upload Motorola C test testMotorola hex 0x1000 0x2000 True True gt gt gt R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 420 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX G Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS debugger Upload MotorolaldTag This function saves the memory data in ID tagged Motorola format Specification format debugger Upload MotorolaldTag fileName address1 address2 force False Argumeni s Argument Description fileName Specify a file name address1 Specify an upload start address address2 Specify an upload end address force Specify whether to overwrite True Overwrite False Do not overwrite default Return value If the memory data was uploade
388. plorer menu corresponding to the selected file Add Shows the cascading menu to add files and Category nodes to the project Add File Opens the Add Existing File dialog box to add the selected file to the project The file is added to the same level as the selected file Add New File Opens the Add File dialog box to create a file with the selected file type and add to the file to the project The file is added to the same level as the selected file The added file can be opened with the application corresponds to the file extension Add New Category R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Feb 01 2013 Adds a new Category node at the same level as the selected file You can rename the category Up to 200 characters can be specified The default category name is New category You can also add a Category node with the same name as the existing Category node This menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation and when categories are nested 20 levels 2tENESAS Page 146 of 491 CubeSuite V2 00 00 Remove from Project APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Removes the selected file from the project The file itself is not deleted from the file system Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Copy Copies the selected file to the clipboard When the file name is in editing the selected characters are copied to the clipboard Paste This menu
389. project Device This property refers the microcontroller of the active project Specification format project Device Setting s None Reference Microcontroller of the active project Detailed description This property refers the microcontroller of the active project Example of use gt gt gt print project Device R5F100LE R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 465 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX G Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS project lsOpen This property confirms whether the project has been opened Specification format project IsOpen Setting s None Reference If the project has been opened True If the project has not been opened False Detailed description This property confirms whether the project has been opened Example of use gt gt gt print project IsOpen True gt gt gt R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 466 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX G Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS project Kind This property refers the kind of the active project Specification format project Kind Setting s None Reference Kind of active project Type Description Application Project for application Library Project for library DebugOnly Debug dedicated project Empty Project for empty application CppApplication Project for C application RI600V4 Project for
390. project file name Remark When the subproject is created the entered project name is followed by the extension cssp and forms the subproject name b Place Designate the location to create the project file by directly entering it with absolute path or selecting from the Browse button The last designated location is shown in the box C Documents and Settings User name My Documents is shown by default when the project is created for the first time c Button Browse Opens the Browse For Folder dialog box When a folder is selected an absolute path of the folder is shown in Place d Make the project folder Use this check box to select whether to create a folder with the project name under the location specified in Place The check box is selected by default e Project file path The full path of the project file specified via Project name and Place is shown Remarks 1 The number of characters that can be entered in Project name and Place is up to 259 both for the path name and file name together 2 When the input for Project name violates any restriction the following messages are shown in the tooltip R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 128 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 Message Description The project name is invalid Enter characters that can be used as a file name APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE The project file name uses characters that are not allowed A
391. ption dialog box in the General Update category the Check for updates when opening project checkbox is selected and the conditions set in Check at intervals of are met Figure 2 28 Option Dialog Box General Update Category T General E Startup and Exit G Display G External Text Editor G Font and Color G External Tools Check at intervals of 3 2 Days G Build Debug Python Console Update Manager Option E Text Editor GEN T Others E User Information Check for updates when opening project Cx Cee Cie Cie Remarks 1 This function performs the check for updates in parallel with the CubeSuite process While the check is ongoing the icon appears in the Task Tray 2 If the check does not find any updates the auto checking function exits 2 Auto download function The auto download function checks if the conditions for updating in 1 are met and then downloads any updates that were found This function is executed for each category when in the Update Manager Options dialog box Download updates automatically and notify me when it s finished is selected R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 28 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 29 Update Manager Options Dialog Box Update Manager Options Automatic Updates CubeSuite can check for updates regularly Category If updates are found Download updates automatically and notify Devic
392. put by the build pro cess R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 317 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX F USING AN EXTERNAL BUILD TOOL Figure F 17 Commands executed in the project cleaning Property If you click the button the Text Edit dialog box will open Figure F 18 Text Edit Dialog Box Text Edit Text make clean Placeholder Placeholder Value Description a ActiveProjectDir D work DebugOnly Absolute path of the active project folde ActiveProjectName DebugOnly Active project name BuildModeName DefaultBuild Build mode name MainProjectDir D work DebugOnly Absolute path of the main project folder MainProjectName DebugOnly Main project name MicomT oolPath C Program Files Absolute path of the CubeSuite install lt Mm gt In Text enter the command to be executed with one item per line The commands can be specified up to 1023 characters per line up to 64 lines Remarks 1 This property supports placeholders If a line is double clicked in Placeholder the placeholder will be reflected in Text 2 When python is described in the first line the contents from the second line to the last line are regarded as the script of the Python console and then executed when running a clean The placeholders can be described in the scriput If you click the OK button the entered commands are displayed as subproperties Figure F 19 Comma
393. r XRunBreak Refer None gt gt gt debugger XRunBreak Set 1 TimeType S True True gt gt gt debugger XRunBreak Refer 1Second Periodic R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 434 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX G Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS debugger XTime This function displays timing information between Go and Break Specification format debugger XTime Argumeni s None Return value List of timing information see the XTimelnfo property for detail Detailed description This function displays timing information between Go and Break in nanoseconds Example of use gt gt gt debugger XTime 9820214200nsec gt gt gt R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 435 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX G Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS debugger XTrace Clear This function clears the trace memory IECUBE IECUBE2 Simulator Specification format debugger XTrace Clear Argumeni s None Return value If the trace memory was cleared successfully True If there was an error when clearing the trace memory False Detailed description This function clears the trace memory Example of use gt gt gt debugger XTrace Clear False gt gt gt R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 436 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX G Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS debugger
394. r as when launching it from the Start menu npAplug in name plug Start CubeSuite displaying the Main window without loading the specified plu in name gins in the Plugins folder In plug in name specify the name of the folder in which the DLL file is saved Note that folder names are case insensitive You can specify multiple plug in names by separating them with commas You can also specify the np option itself multiple times Each DLL will not be loaded If the plugin specified by this option does not exist it will be ignored Start CubeSuite displaying the Main window without loading any of the specified plug ins in the Plugins folder If an invalid option is specified it will be ignored noproj Start CubeSuite displaying the Main window without reading in a project either a project specified on the command line or the last used project nrs If CubeSuite is already started and in the standby state using rapid start see 2 5 Start CubeSuite ignore this and start another process R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 stENESAS Page 89 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Option Description plug in optionA plug in Specify an option for the plugin see 3 Plug in Options parameter project file name Start CubeSuite displaying the Main window with the specified project file loaded 3 Plug in Options Below are the plug in options that can
395. r the speci fied project file cannot be found The divert project name is invalid Enter The file name with the invalid path is designated The characters that can be used as a file name characters lt gt cannot be used for the folder name The project which is being used can t be The currently open project main project or sub diverted project has been specified as the source project The specified file is invalid Enter a divert An existing file that is not a project file or subproject project file file has been specified 3 When the path name is too long to be shown in the text area gt is displayed The absolute path pops up when the mouse cursor is hovered over gt c Button Browse Open Project dialog box appears When a project file is selected an absolute path of the project file is shown in Project to be passed d Copy composition files in the diverted project folder to a new project folder Select this check box when copying composition files in the project folder of the project specified in Project to be passed to a new project folder The check box is unchecked by default This field is enabled only when the Pass the file composition of an existing project to the new project check box is checked Remarks 1 When the version of the build tool used in the source project is different from the version of the build tool in the project to be created it is
396. rator Design Tool A CA850 Build Tool S 850 Simulator Debug Tool p Program Analyzer Analyze Tool ie File UR sub Subproject 9 uPD70F3746 Microcontroller E A Pin Configurator Design Tool eij Code Generator Design Tool A CA850 Build Tool 850 Simulator Debug Tool P Program Analyzer Analyze Tool g File 2 List control This displays a widget such as Unused w in the panel settings areas Click the to display a list of available selections 3 Context menu This refers to the menu that appears when you right click in a window over an icon or other object on the screen The menu displays a list of operations currently available for the object you clicked Figure B 88 Sample Context Menu f E m TS Select All ctrl A gt clear amp Tag Jump Shift F 12 Help for Message R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 297 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX C HOW THE MANUALS ARE ORGANIZED APPENDIX C HOW THE MANUALS ARE ORGANIZED This section describes the manuals of the CubeSuite integrated development environment for the microcontrollers RX V850 R8C Localised support RL78 78KOR and 78K0 The manuals are organized as follows in accordance with the software development phases Figure C 1 List of Manuals Preparation ementation Debugging Debug Coding Manual of each microcontroller Build RX V850 RBC RL78 78KOR
397. rd Paste Pastes the contents of the clip board to the property while editing the property Delete Deletes the selected text while editing the property Select All Selects all the text in the selected property while editing the property Reset to Default Restores the configuration of the selected item to default of the project default configura tion For Individual Compile Options tab and Individual Assemble Options tab restores to the configuration of the general option Reset All to Default Restores the configuration of the current tab to default of the project default configura tion For Individual Compile Options tab and Individual Assemble Options tab restores to the configuration of the general option R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Feb 01 2013 7tENESAS Page 154 of 491 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Project tab This tab shows the detailed information on projects main project categorized by the following and the configuration can be changed 1 File 2 Notes Figure A 21 Property Panel Project Tab Property LR sample Property E File Notes File name This is the name of the file to which the information of this main project is to be saved Description of each category 1 File The detailed information on files are displayed File name Displays the file name of the file to save the information on the main project
398. ric characters B Specifies that the match must not occur on a b boundary E 6 Grouping Constructs The following table describes the grouping constructs Grouping constructs allow you to capture groups of sub expres sions and to increase the efficiency of regular expressions with non capturing look ahead and look behind modifiers Table E 7 List of Grouping Constructs Grouping Constructs Description Captures the matched substring if used in a find and replace operation Zero width positive look ahead assertion Continues match only if the sub expression matches at this position on the right For example _ w matches an underscore followed by a word char acter without matching the word character Zero width negative look ahead assertion Continues match only if the sub expression matches at this position on the right For example b un w b matches words that do not begin with un Zero width positive look behind assertion Continues match only if the sub expression matches the position on the left For example lt 19 99 matches instances of 99 that follow 19 Zero width negative look behind assertion Continues match only if the sub expression does not match this position on the left E 7 Substitutions Substitutions are allowed only within find replace replacement patterns Character escapes and substitutions are the only special constructs recognized in a replacement pattern The following tabl
399. ring particular attention Remark Supplementary information Numeric representation Decimal XXXX Hexadecimal OxXXXXX Related Documents The related documents indicated in this publication may include preliminary versions However preliminary versions are not marked as such CubeSuite This manual Integrated Development Environment V850 Design R20UT2134E User s Manual R8C Design R20UT2135E RL78 Design R20UT2136E 78KOR Design R20UT2137E 78KO Design R20UT2138E RX Coding R20UT2470E V850 Coding R20UT0553E Coding for CX Compiler R20UT2139E R8C Coding R20UT0576E RL78 78KOR Coding R20UT2140E 78K0 Coding R20UT2141E RX Build R20UT2472E V850 Build R20UT0557E Build for CX Compiler R20UT2142E R8C Build R20UT0575E RL78 78KOR Build R20UT2143E 78KO Build R20UT0783E RX Debug R20UT2350E V850 Debug R20UT2446E R8C Debug R20UT0770E RL78 Debug R20UT2445E 78KOR Debug R20UT0732E 78K0 Debug R20UT0731E Analysis R20UT2447E Message R20UT2448E Caution The related documents listed above are subject to change without notice Be sure to use the latest edition of each document when designing All trademarks or registered trademarks in this document are the property of their respective owners TABLE OF CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 GENERAL 8 1 1 Introduction 8 1 2 Features 9 1 3 System Configuration 10 1 4 Operating Environment 11 CHAPTER 2
400. rk You can use one of the procedures below to open files other than those listed above in the Editor panel Drag a file and drop it onto the Editor panel Select a file and then select Open with Internal Editor from the context menu R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 141 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Toolbar Sorts files and Category nodes in Project tree area in order of their names A Ascending order Bi Descending order Ea Ascending order Sorts files in Project tree area in order of the time stamp 9 Descending order Et Ascending order E Descending order Sorts files other than the dependency files and Category nodes in Project tree area in order of the user definition default Display order is changed by dragging and dropping the file and Category node Refreshes the state of highlighting for files read only files non existent files and overlay icons Edit menu Project Tree panel dedicated items Copies the selected file or Category node to the clip board While editing the file name or the category name the characters of the selection are copied to the clip board Note that this menu is only enabled when the file other than the dependency files or the Category node is selected Inserts the contents of the clip board to the root of the node that is selected on the Project Tree While editing the file name or t
401. rkspace is not converted A HEW project will be converted into a main project or subproject depending on the inter project dependen cies described in the workspace file If there are no inter project dependencies then the projects will be added to the project tree in the order they appear in the workspace file If there are inter project dependencies then the first project to appear that is not dependent on any other projects will be the main project Subprojects are built in the order that they appear in the project tree Thus projects are added to the project tree in the reverse of the dependency order Examples 1 If projects A B C D have no inter dependencies HEW workspace before conversion CubeSuite project after conversion Workspace Main project A Project A Subproject B __ Project B gt __ Subproject C Project C L_ Subproject D L Project D 2 If project C depends on project A and projects B and D have no dependencies HEW workspace before conversion CubeSuite project after conversion Workspace Main project B Project A Subproject A Project B gt Subproject C Project C L_ Subproject D L Project D R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 61 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS HEW s placeholders which are used in build options are replaced with C
402. rmation on the subproject Default Name of the subproject file How to change Changes not allowed Relative path Displays the relative path of the subproject file to which subproject information is saved from the location of the main project This property is shown only when the subproject is selected in Project Tree panel Note that if the relative path does not exist such as the case that the main project and subproject are in the different drive it is not displayed Default Relative path from the main project How to change Changes not allowed Absolute path Displays the absolute path of the subproject file to save the information on them Default Absolute name of subprojects How to change Changes not allowed R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 156 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Save with absolute path Select whether to save the subproject information to a subproject file using the absolute path Default No How to change Select a value from the drop down list Ristriction Yse Saves the file using the absolute path No Saves the file using the relative path 2 Notes The detailed information on records is displayed and their configuration can be changed Add memos to subprojects Memo is added one item in one line The added memos are displayed as subproperty Default Memo Number of items
403. roject Open Existing Project Loads the project of CubeSuite Can also be opened directly from the following link Recent Project Favorite Project G al i Nothing Nothing Open Existing CubeSuite High performance Embedded Workshop PM Project The project created with the old IDE can be converted to the CubeSuite project Support version High performance Embedded Workshop Go V 4 07 00 or later SH RX REC M16C H8 project In following case the build options also can be converted From the HEW RX compiler package V 1 00R00 or later project to the CubeSuite RX project Open Sample Project Many sample projects that can be built immediately are provided After selecting the desired project from the list below press the GO button and specify the destination folder to copy the selected sample project 78KO 78KOR RL78 AX V850 7 KO_KC24_Tutorial_ Basic_Operation wal 78KO_KF2_Tutorial_Analysis The following plug ins are not enabled Output Information M0Z0000Z Code Generator Plug in Debug Console Plug in Pin Configurator Plug in Program Analyzer Plug in IronPython Console Plug in Stack Usage Tracer Tanl Tnter face Protacal iTTP Plurn ir All Messages F Fe Fa Jeu Fe ag Fe lz Fa Fn Re On the second and subsequent occasions you can startup CubeSuite from the icon in the task tray when the rapid start see 2 10 1 Use
404. roject Sets the selected project to an active project Save Project and Development Tools as Package Saves a set of the project and this product by copying them in a folder Paste This menu is always disabled Rename You can rename the selected project Property Build Actively project Displays the selected project s property in Property panel 2 When a Subproject node is selected Builds the active project Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Rebuild Actively project Rebuilds the active project Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Clean Actively project R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Feb 01 2013 Cleans the active project Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation ztENESAS Page 143 of 491 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Open Folder with Explorer Opens the folder that contains the subproject file of the selected subproject with Explorer Windows Explorer Menu Displays the Windows Explorer menu corresponding to the subproject file for the selected subproject Add Shows the cascading menu to add subprojects files and Category nodes to the project Opens the Add Existing Subproject dialog box to add the selected subproject to a project Add Subproject The subproject cannot be added to another subproject
405. rom the Tool menu select Options Description of each area 1 Check for updates when opening project Automatically checks for updates when a project is opened Does not automatically check for updates when a project is opened 2 Check at intervals of Specify the interval at which to check for updates Either enter a number between 0 and 99 directly via the keyboard or specify a number via the buttons 3 Buttons Update Manager Option Displays the Update Manager Options dialog box R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 235 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Function buttons Button Function Initialize All Settings Restores all settings on this dialog box to their default values Note however that newly added items in the General External Tools category will not be removed Applies all setting and closes this dialog box Ignores the setting and closes this dialog box Applies all setting does not close this dialog box Displays the help of this dialog box R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Feb 01 2013 2tENESAS Page 236 of 491 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Other User Information category Use this category to configure other setting relating to user information Figure A 58 Option Dialog Box Other User Information Category E 1 General E ET Startup and Exit Others
406. rs are specified by using the format parameter name default value Example lf the Specification format is function arg1 arg2 1 arg3 True gt gt gt function arg3 False argl main arg2 gt gt gt function False main 3 NG because it is assumed that argl False arg2 main arg3 3 You should be careful when you describe a path for a folder or file as parameters IronPython recognizes the backslash character as a control character For example if a folder or file name starts with a t then the sequence t will be recognized as a tab character Do the following to avoid this Examples 1 In a quoted string prepend the letter r to make IronPython recognize the string as a path r C test test py 2 Use a forward slash instead of a backslash C test test py A slash is used in this document R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 332 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX G Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS G3 1 CubeSuite Python function for basic operation Below is a list of CubeSuite Python functions for basic operation Table G 1 CubeSuite Python Function For Basic Operation Function Name Function Description ClearConsole This function clears the string displayed on the Python console CubeSuiteExit This function exits from CubeSuite Help This function displays the help for the CubeSuite Python functions
407. rt Setting Dialog Box Source Convert Setting You can convert the project composition files like source files for the build tool of the new project Do you really want to convert source files Original source files are overwritten by conversion Backup of project before conversion Backup the project composition files before conversion Place D work sample sample_backup Function buttons The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open From the Create Project dialog box set the build tool of the source project to CA850 and that of the project to cre ate to CX and then click the Create button Caution You cannot open this dialog box when the Copy composition files in the diverted project folder to a new project folder check box is checked from the Create Project dialog box Description of each area 1 Source convert selection area Select whether to convert the source files when creating the project When Yes is selected The source files are converted When No is selected The source files are not converted R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 131 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 2 Backup of project before conversion area Make settings relating to backing up the source project a Backup the project composition files before conversion Select this che
408. s 2 The following information item is output to the quality report file Time and date on which the file is created Log of the build results Information on the command file which is used during building Information on the detailed version of this product or the current project 3 The quality report file is output with the file name QuarityReport project name build mode name text to the project folder of each project If a file having the same name exists it will be overwritten It is also shown on the project tree under the Build tool generated files node 5 Enable Break Sound Beeps when the execution of a user program is halted due to a break event hardware or software break Does not beep when the execution of a user program is halted due to a break event hardware or software break default R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 227 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 6 Observe downloaded load module files changing Monitors load module files downloaded to the debugging tool for changes When there is a change a message dialog box confirming whether to execute the download is displayed Does not monitor load module files downloaded to the debugging tool for changes default 7 Add source files automatically for the Debug Only project only In a debug dedicated project when downloading a load module file into the debug tool source files
409. s RL78 G13 16KB R5F1006AA It s strongly recommended that you apply the updates to keep software up to date Update mata EXDownload and install Download only Download only Total OUpdate s OKB Option Select all Review update history CubeSuitet Restore hidden updates O amp CubeSuite Vxx xx xx Change settings Download size xxxKB Help This is update for CubeSuite Detail Exit xox Renesas Electronics Corporation The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area How to open From the Windows Start menu select Programs gt gt Renesas Electronics CubeSuite gt gt Update Manager Remark In Windows 8 double click on Update Manager on the start screen From the CubeSuite Help menu select Check for Updates In the Windows task tray click the Gi or i icon R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 94 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Description of each area 1 Menu area This area displays a menu for changing the appearance and settings of the main area Select an item to perform the corresponding action All Displays the updates Microcontroller Name Displays the updates corresponding to that microcontroller Displays up to five microcontrollers for which the specify microcontroller function was used most recent first Download and install Downloads the selected u
410. s ltem Favorite Projects Wri 1 Register to Favorite Project i Ari 2 Register to Favorite Project Mpd 3 Register to Favorite Project in 4 Register to Favorite Project 2 7 2 Add an existing subproject Select the Project node on the project tree and if you select Add gt gt Add Subproject on the context menu the Add Existing Subproject dialog box will open Figure 2 53 Add Existing Subproject Dialog Box Add Existing Subproject Look in sub N DefaultBuild s 4 sub mtsp My Recent Documents e Desktop My Documents My Computer My Network Files of type Subproject File mtsp Cancel On the dialog box specify the subproject file of the subproject to add and click the Open button R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 48 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 7 3 Project is added to the favorites menu You can add the currently open project to the menu as a favorite project up to four projects From the Project menu select Favorite Projects gt gt 1 4 Register to Favorite Project the path of the currently open project is registered under the Project menu gt gt Favorite Projects Figure 2 54 Register to Favorite Project Item Favorite Projects gt T 1 Favorite Project gt re Protec R 1 Register to Favorite Project 2 Register to Favorite Project Z 3 Register to Favorite Project
411. s Selected Project Convert Setting Project settings New microcontroller Microcontroller New microcontroller A Product Name uPD70F 3746 iy VE50ES HES Intemal ROM size KBytes 1024 i VO50ES HF3 Internal RAM size Bytes 61440 iy V850ES HG3 iy VE50ES HI3 Ge VE50ESAG3H te VE50ESAG3 U fe V850ESAH3 H oo Serer ui amp amp amp E gt New project Kind of project Application CA850 Project name sample Place D wosk sample Backup the project composition after before conversion Figure 2 65 Project Convert Setting Dialog Box When Subproject Is Selected Project Convert Setting Project Description Project settings New microcontroller Microcontroller New microcontroller 7 Product Name uPD70F3746 V850ES HE3 Internal ROM size KBytes 1024 VO50ES HF3 Internal RAM size Bytes 61440 it it i V850ES HG3 it it hy VB50ES HJ3 V850ESG3 H Ge VO50ESAG3 U E Me V850ESAH3 H La si erect New project Kind of project Application CA850 Project name sub Place D work sample sub V Backup the project composition after before conversion After setting the microcontroller to be used for the conversion target project and project type name and place of creation settings click the OK button R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 57 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSui
412. s and cleans are run in batch with the build modes that the project main project and subproject has Select Batch Build from the Build menu The Batch Build dialog box will open Figure F 34 Batch Build Dialog Box Batch Build Build mode list Project Build mode Defined macros DefaultBuild C sample BuildMode2 sub DefaultBuild C sub BuildMode2 In the dialog box the list of the combinations of the names of the main project and subprojects in the currently opened project and their build modes and macro definitions Defined macros is invalid when the target project is a debug dedi cated project is displayed Select the check boxes for the combinations of the main project and subprojects and build modes that you wish to run a batch build and then click the Build Rebuild or Clean button Remarks 1 See the sections below for a build rebuild and clean Build F 5 1 Runa build Rebuild F 5 2 Run a rebuild Clean F 5 3 Run a clean 2 The batch build order follows the project build order the order of the subprojects main project When multiple build modes are selected for a single main project or subproject after running builds of the subproject with all the selected build modes the build of the next subproject or main project is run 3 If there are files being edited with the Editor panel when running a batch build then all these files are saved 4 Ifa project other than a debug dedicat
413. s dialog box Closes this dialog box R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 177 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Go to Line dialog box This dialog box is used to move the caret to a specified source line Figure A 33 Go to Line Dialog Box Go to Line big Line number 1 133 Function buttons The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open From the Edit menu select Go To On the Editor panel select Go To from the context menu Description of each area 1 Line number valid line range valid line range shows the range of valid lines in the current file Directly enter a decimal value as the number of the line you want to move the caret to By default the number of the line where the caret is currently located in the Editor panel is displayed Function buttons Button Function OK Places the caret at the start of the specified source line Cancel Cancels the jump and closes this dialog box Help Displays the help for this dialog box R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 178 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Find and Replace dialog box This dialog box is used to find and replace the designated characters Remark The gt button in Search text will be displayed only if this
414. s in the 1 Internet Options in Control Panel Remark Click the ae or i icon to display the CubeSuite Update Manager window R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 29 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 31 CubeSuite Update Manager Window t CubeSuite Update Manager Select updates EZ All CubeSuite Update Manager RL78 G13 16KB R5F1006AA CubeSuite Update Manager keeps CubeSuite related software and documents up to date Option Review update history Restore hidden updates s Checking updates Change settings ay Please wait Help Exit Vaux xx ox oon xox Renesas Electronics Corporation Remark If the check does not find any updates the update notification function exits Remark Perform the installation in accordance with 2 4 1 The manual update feature step 3 2 4 3 Canceling an update From the Update in progress dialog box click the Cancel button to cancel the update If the update was canceled then the Finish page will show that the update was canceled When performing an update it is not possible to update currently running related tools or open files For this reason if a related tool is running then the installation will be postponed and the Finish page will indicate that the installation was suspended 2 4 4 Resuming an update When Update Manager or a tool related to CubeSuite supporting the update function is started it checks wheth
415. s saved in is opened in Explorer R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 51 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 7 7 Convert a CA850 project into a CX project You can convert a CubeSuite project with CA850 as the build tool into a project with CX as the build tool by creating the project reusing the file structure of a project When creating the project it is not necessary to code build tool dependent source because the source files are con verted for the CX The properties of the build tool are also maintained and converted for use with the CX Caution If you wish to reuse an existing PM project open the project in CubeSuite then save it as a CubeSuite project see 2 7 10 Convert a PM project into a CubeSuite project First from the Project menu select Create New Project the Create Project dialog box will open Figure 2 59 Create Project Dialog Box Create Project Microcontroller Using microcontroller E Update W v850E2 PJ4 A Product Name uPD70F 3506 AE PD 7O0F3504 1 44pi Internal ROM size KBytes 512 2 oe 5 Seni Intemal RAM size Bytes 40960 ME pPD70F 3507 1 44pin ME wPD70F 35081 44pin E gt t V850E 2 FF4 M te ie VO50E2 FK4 H oo BR COCA ALL Kind of project Application CX Project name sample_CX Place D work sample v Make the project folder D work sample sample_Cx sample_CX mtpj C Pass
416. se files see the following When Application or Library is selected on Kind of project gt See the CubeSuite Integrated Development Environment User s Manual Build When Debug Only is selected on Kind of project gt See F 3 Add a File to a Project R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 44 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 6 3 Add a new subproject Select the Project node on the project tree and if you select Add gt gt Add New Subproject on the context menu the Create Project dialog box will open Figure 2 48 Create Project Dialog Box When Adding a New Subproject Create Subproject Microcontroller Using microcontroller AA Se i VE50ESAU3 Product Name uPD70F3746 i Internal ROM size KBytes 1024 2 i ae it Intemal RAM size Bytes 61440 JE wPD70F3745 1 44pin Eh V850ES HES mhs VB50ES HF3 tH VB50ES HG3 on a Oe LA 4 Kind of project Application CA850 Project name Input the name of he Place D work sample Make the project folder lt is showr absolute path of a projec C Pass the file composition of an existing project to the new project ct to be passed Input project file to be diverted Copy composition files in the diverted project folder to a new project folder After setting each item on the dialog box click the Create button For more on the settings for each item
417. secutive space characters on the current line to tab characters but only for those sets of spaces that are at least equal to one tab size Tabify Selected Lines Tabifies the current line causing all spaces at the start of the line prior to any text to be converted to tabs where possible Untabify Selected Lines Untabifies the current line causing all tabs at the start of the line prior to any text to be converted to spaces Make Uppercase Converts all letters within the selection to uppercase Make Lowercase Converts all letters within the selection to lowercase Toggle Character Casing Toggles the character cases uppercase or lowercase of all letters within the selection Capitalize Capitalizes the first character of every word within the selection Delete Horizontal Whitespace Deletes any excess white space either side of the cursor position leaving only one whitespace character remaining If there the cursor is within a word or not surrounded by whitespace this operation will have no effect Trim Trailing Whitespace Deletes any trailing whitespace that appears after the last non whitespace char acter on the cursor line Delete Line Completely delete the current cursor line Duplicate Line Duplicates the cursor line inserting a copy of the line immediately after the cursor line Delete Blank Lines R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Feb 01 2013 Deletes the l
418. see 2 6 2 Create a new project Remark You can create a subproject with CX as the build tool by reusing the file structure of a subproject with CA850 as the build tool see 2 7 7 Convert a CA850 project into a CX project The project tree after adding the subproject will look like the one below R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 45 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 49 Project Tree Panel After Adding a Subproject Project Tree E3 2 0318 o cj sample Project uPD70F3746 Microcontroller E gt A Pin Configurator Design Tool E gt eij Code Generator Design Tool A CA850 Build Tool V850 Simulator Debug Tool Program Analyzer Analyze Tool sub Subproject 986 uPD70F3746 Microcontroller E A Pin Configurator Design Tool E eij Code Generator Design Tool A CA850 Build Tool 850 Simulator Debug Tool Program Analyzer Analyze Tool a File R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 46 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 7 Manipulate a Project This section describes how to manipulate a project 2 7 1 Open a project Use the following method to open a project Open an existing project Open a recently used project Open a project from the favorites menu 1 Open an existing project Existing projects are opened by specifying the project file From the Project menu select Open Projec
419. selected Function buttons Button Function Make New Folder Creates a new folder in the root of the selected folder The default folder name is New folder The designated folder path is set to the path that this dialog box is called from The folder selected in the Folder location area is set as the file output destination Cancel Closes this dialog box R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 277 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Save Project As dialog box This dialog box is used to save project files as different names Figure A 78 Save Project As Dialog Box Save Project As 1 4 Save in sample N DefaultBuild 4 O sub My Recent E sample mtpj Documents My Documents My Computer 9 Pa e z 4 My Neterork ave as type Project File mtpi Function buttons The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open From the File menu or Project menu select Save Project As Description of each area 1 Save in area Select a folder to save the project file The project folder is selected by default 2 List of files area File list that matches to the selections in Save in and Save as type is shown 3 File name area Specify the project file name to save R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 278 of 491 Fe
420. so the settings of the selected node can be changed Editor panel This panel is used to display and edit text files and source files Output panel The message that is output from the build tool debug tool each plug in or the result of the Find In Files with the Find and Replace dialog box is displayed Change Microcontroller dialog box This dialog box is used to change the microcontroller to be used in the project Add File dialog box This dialog box is used to create a new file and add it to the project Add Folder and File dialog box This dialog box is used to add existing files and folder hierarchies to the project Text Edit dialog box This dialog box is used to input and edit texts in multiple lines Encoding dialog box R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Feb 01 2013 This dialog box is used to select a file encoding 2tENESAS Page 91 of 491 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Window Panel Dialog Box Name Function Description Bookmarks dialog box This dialog box is used to display the position where a bookmark is to be set or to delete a bookmark Go to Line dialog box This dialog box is used to move the caret to a specified source line Find and Replace dialog box This dialog box is used to find and replace the designated characters Save Settings dialog box This dialog box is used to set the encoding and newline code of the file that is being ed
421. splayed in the Main window By removing the check mark you make a setting so that the toolbar will not be displayed R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 247 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 2 Buttons Opens the New Toolbar dialog box to make a new toolbar The name of the new toolbar will be added to the list displayed in the Toolbars area with a check mark placed in front Note that there are no buttons on the newly created toolbar The register buttons on it use the Commands tab Rename Opens the Rename Toolbar dialog box to change the name of the currently selected toolbar This function is disabled when a toolbar other than those created by the user is selected Deletes the selected toolbar This function is disabled when a toolbar other than those created by the user is selected Discards all changes made to the selected toolbar and returns it to the default state When a toolbar created by the user is selected this button returns the selected toolbar to the state with no buttons registered on it Function buttons Keyboard Opens the Customize Keyboard dialog box to assign customized items to keys on the keyboard Close Cancels the toolbar menu customization settings and closes this dialog box R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 248 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Commands tab
422. st action Redo Cut Copy Redoes an undone action Cuts the selection and copy it into the clipboard Copies the selection into the clipboard Paste Pastes the contents of the clipboard Delete Deletes the selection Select All Selects all items Rename Changes the name of the selected item Find Opens the Find and Replace dialog box or the Trace Search dialog box if the Trace panel has focus or the Memory Search dialog box if the Memory panel has focus and perform the specified search Replace Opens the Find and Replace dialog box and replace the specified string with another string Go To Opens the Go io Line dialog box if the Editor panel has the focus and jumps to the specified line Opens the Go to the Location dialog box if the Disassemble panel SFR panel R8C Localised support 78KOR 78K0 or IOR panel RX V850 has the focus and jumps to the specified location Outlining Displays a cascading menu for controlling expand and collapse states of source file outlining R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Feb 01 2013 2tENESAS Page 114 of 491 CubeSuite V2 00 00 Collapse to Definitions APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Collapses all nodes that are marked as implementation blocks e g function defi nitions Toggle Outlining Expansion Toggles the current state of the innermost outlining section in which the cursor lies when you are in
423. sted 20 levels Open Folder with Explorer This menu is always disabled Windows Explorer Menu This menu is always disabled Remove from Project This menu is always disabled Copy This menu is always disabled Paste Inserts the contents of the clipboard directly below this node However this menu is disabled when the contents of the clipboard exist in the same project Rename This menu is always disabled Displays this node s property on the Property panel Property 6 When the File node is selected Add Shows the cascading menu to add files and Category nodes to the project R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 145 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 Add File APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Opens the Add Existing File dialog box to add the selected file to the project The file is added directly below this node The added file can be opened with the application corresponds to the file extension Add New File Opens the Add File dialog box to create a file with the selected file type and add to the file to the project The file is added directly below this node The added file can be opened with the application corresponds to the file extension Add New Category Adds a new Category node directly below this node This allows the category name to be changed Up to 200
424. t the Open Project dialog box will open Figure 2 50 Open Project Dialog Box Open Project Look in O sample DefaultBuild sub My Recent 3 sample mtpj Documents File name e My Network Files of type Project File mtpj On the dialog box specify the project file and click the Open button Remark When CubeSuite is not running you can start CubeSuite and load a project by double clicking on that project in Explorer 2 Open a recently used project You can directly open the most recently used projects from the most recent to the fourth most recent from the menu From the File menu select Recent Projects the path of the recently used projects will display in a cascading menu in order from most recent to fourth most recent Select the project you wish to open R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 47 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 51 Recent Projects Item Recent Projects gt 1D work sample04 sample04 mtpj E 2 D work sample03 sample03 mtpj A 3 D work sample02 sample02 mtpj Of 4 D work sample sample mtpj 3 Open a project from the favorites menu Open a project registered on the favorites menu From the Project menu select Favorite Projects the path of the projects registered on the favorites menu is dis played as a cascading menu Select the project you wish to open Figure 2 52 Favorite Project
425. t gt gt debugger Step gt gt gt debugger Step StepOption Instruction R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 414 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX G Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS debugger Stop This function stops the execution of the debug tool Specification format debugger Stop Argumeni s None Return value None Detailed description This function stops the execution of the debug tool Forcibly halt the program Example of use gt gt gt debugger Stop gt gt gt R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 415 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX G Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS debugger Upload Binary This function saves the memory data in binary format Specification format debugger Upload Binary fileName addressi1 address2 force False Argumeni s Argument Description fileName Specify a file name address1 Specify an upload start address address2 Specify an upload end address force Specify whether to overwrite True Overwrite False Do not overwrite default Return value If the memory data was uploaded successfully True If there was an error when uploading the memory data False Detailed description This function saves the memory data from address to address2 in binary format Example of use gt gt gt debugger Upload Binary C test testBinary bin
426. t gt print info 2 FrameNumber 855 gt gt gt print info 2 Timestamp 1706000 gt gt gt print info 2 FetchAddress None gt gt gt print info 2 Mnemonic None gt gt gt print info 2 ReadAddress 67080192 0x000002c2 0x000002c6 0x000002ca 0x000002ce 0x000002d2 0x000002dc 0x00000312 0x00000316 movhi Oxffff rl gp id w 0x7ff4 r1 r6 Ox03f 9000 R 0x00000000 movhi Oxffff rl gp movea 0x7ff8 rl r7 jarl _main 0x36 br _main 0x36 prepare lp 0x4 Ox03f 9308 W 0x000002d6 br _main 0x2 R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Feb 01 2013 7tENESAS Page 452 of 491 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX G Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS XRunBreakinfo This class holds XRunBreak information return value of the debugger XRunBreak Refer function Type class XRunBreakInfo Value 0 TimeType Timetype Min IsPeriodic True Variable Variable Description This holds the event interval value This holds the unit of the interval value Type Description TimeType Min Minute unit TimeType S Second unit TimeType Ms Millisecond unit TimeType Us Microsecond unit TimeType Ns Nanosecond unit IsPeriodic This holds whether the callback is used periodically Detailed description XRunBreaklinfo is a class and it is passed as the return value when the debugger XRunBreak Refer function is executed Example of use gt gt gt debu
427. t in the context menu Caution If the selected subproject is the active project then it cannot be removed from the project Move subprojects You can move subprojects by the following procedure Drag the subproject you want to move then drop it in the destination Remark You can run multiple CubeSuite and drop the subproject to a different project In this case the dropped subproject is copied not moved Select multiple nodes You can select multiple nodes in sequence by the following procedure Click or place the cursor on the start node then click with pressing the Shift key or place the cursor on the end node You can select multiple nodes one by one by the following procedures Click on the node with pressing the Ctrl key R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 140 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Place the cursor key on the node with pressing the Ctrl key then press Space key f Running the editor The file with the specific extension is opened in the Editor panel When an external text editor is set to be used in the Option dialog box the file is opened with the external text editor that has been set Other files are opened with the applications associated by the host OS Caution The file with the extension that is not associated with the host OS is not displayed You can open the editor by one of the following procedures Double click the file Select a file
428. t Setting Dialog Box Project Convert Setting Pioject P Description You can convert your project for the CubeSuite E Group1 R project Select the project s from the left list box and change the settings to conversion as necessary Select iz projectB several projects with Ctrl button you can change those projects settings at once Ei Group2 When you press the OK button without changing any settings the new projects are made in the same iF project place as the selected projects and the old projects are backuped in _org attachment folder i R project Notice If you open a High performance Embedded Workshop project please be sure to select the device for each project The Project area shows the configuration of conversion target projects as a tree select the project for carrying out the conversion settings b Set the conversion target project When you select the project the area on the right shows the conversion target project setting items R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 67 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 72 Project Convert Setting Dialog Box When Main Project Is Selected Project Convert Setting ye i R projectB R Group2 E projectx R projectY Project settings New microcontroller Microcontroller New microcontroller Select microcontroller here ce Search microcontroller New project
429. t Specify an offset default 0 append Specify whether to make an additional download True Perform additional download False Perform overwrite download default flashErase Specify whether to initialize a flash memory before download True Initialize a flash memory before download False Do not initialize a flash memory before download default Caution If two or more parameters are specified then three parameters must be specified It is not possible to specify only fileName and offset Return value If a binary file was downloaded successfully True If there was an error when downloading a binary file False Detailed description This function downloads a hex file with ID tag Example of use gt gt gt debugger Download HexIdTag C test testModule hex True gt gt gt debugger Download HexIdTag C test testModule2 hex 0x1000 True False gt gt gt R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 383 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX G Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS debugger Download Information This function displays download information Specification format debugger Download Information Argumeni s None Return value List of download information see the Downloadinfo property for detail Detailed description This function displays download information in the following format download number download file name Exam
430. t be disconnected from the debug tool 3 When the microcontroller is changed the project must be saved 4 After the microcontroller is changed information for the pin configurator design tool code generator design tool and debug tool except for registration of the Watch panel is not maintained R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 75 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 8 Save the Project File The project s settings information is saved to the project file mtpj Select the File or Project menu gt gt Save Project When there is a change in the project the message dialog box below will open Figure 2 80 Message Dialog Box Question Q0201002 sample mtpj may have been changed by another program Overwrite save 2 Yes Help To continue with the operation click the Yes button on the dialog box The project file is overwritten with the current settings information 2 8 1 Save the project file with a different name You can save the project file with a different name From the File or Project menu select Save Project As the Save Project As dialog box will open Figure 2 81 Save Project As Dialog Box Save Project As Save in B sample gt DefaultBuild 4 sub My Recent E sample mtpj Documents Desktop My Documents My Computer My Network Save as type Project File mtpj Specify the save folder and separate project filename mt
431. t editor in project tree When the Editor panel is activated the file currently being opened is selected in the Project Tree panel default Even if the Editor panel is activated the file currently being opened is not selected in the Project Tree panel Displays overlay icons for Windows Explorer in the Project Tree panel Does not display overlay icons for Windows Explorer in the Project Tree panel default Caution The change of the setting is reflected after this product restarts 8 Location of a close button for a splitted panel Use this area to select the location of a close button for a splitted panel via the following drop down list Right edge of the tab area Displays to the right edge in the tab area default All tabs Displays to the right edge of the title in all tabs Active tab Displays to the right edge of the title in the active tab 9 Buttons Initialize Settings Returns all currently displayed setting to their default values R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 213 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Function buttons Button Function Initialize All Settings Restores all settings on this dialog box to their default values Note however that newly added items in the General External Tools category will not be removed Applies all setting and closes this dialog box Ignores the setting and closes this dialo
432. t is added in the project Note that this button is disabled when the build tool is in operation Runs a rebuild of the project A rebuild of a subproject is also run when it is added in the project Note that this button is disabled when the build tool is in operation Cancels the build rebuild batch build and clean operation Remark For details on a build rebuild clean or batch build see the following When the target project type is other than a debug dedicated project CubeSuite Integrated Development Environment User s Manual Build When the target project type is a debug dedicated project F 5 Runa Build R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 121 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 3 Panel display area The following panels are displayed in this area Project Tree panel Property panel Output panel Please see each panel section for the details of the contents of the display 4 Function keys bar Shows the function keys assigned to the currently active window and the function keys available in the main win dow Hover the mouse cursor over a function key button to display a message about that button 5 Statusbar Shows a brief explanation of the currently selected menu item and the various information necessary to debug etc See the CubeSuite Integrated Development Environment User s Manual Debug for details R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00
433. tENESAS Page 405 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX G Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS debugger Memory Read This function refers the memory Specification format debugger Memory Read address memoryOption MemoryOption Byte Argumeni s Argument Description address Specify the address to reference memoryOption Specify the display unit The units that can be specified are shown below Type Description MemoryOption Byte Byte unit 8 bits default MemoryOption HalfWord Half word unit 16 bits RX V850 MemoryOption Word Word unit RL78 78K 16 bits RX V850 32 bits Return value Referenced memory value numeric value Detailed description This function displays the address specified by address according to memoryOption in hexadecimal format Example of use gt gt gt debugger Memory Read 0x100 0x10 gt gt gt value debugger Memory Read 0x100 0x10 gt gt gt print value 16 gt gt gt debugger Memory Read 0x100 MemoryOption HalfWord 0x0010 gt gt gt R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 406 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX G Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS debugger Memory Write This function writes the memory Specification format debugger Memory Write address value memoryOption MemoryOption Byte Argumeni s Argument Description address Specify the address to s
434. te R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Feb 01 2013 2tENESAS Page 19 of 491 CubeSuite V2 00 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 14 Uninstallation Execution Window Progress Renesas Electronics CubeSuite Uninstaller Please select the items to be uninstalled Select all Unselect al Product A CubeSuite CA78KO Vane CubeSuite CA 8KOR Vx xx CubeSuite CA850 Vx xx F CubeSuite CC RX Vx xx xx CubeSuite CX Vx xx CubeSuite Code Generator for RL78_78K CubeSuite Code Generator for Y850 CubeSuite DevInfo_RL 78_78k CuheS ites Nevinta RX sss CubeSuite C478K0 Vx xx Uninstalling Uninstallation completed successfully CubeSuite CA78KOR Vx xx Uninstalling Uninstall Exit M M K M M M M M ral CubeSuite Remark If you click the Abort Uninstallations button a message stating that the user chose to cancel the uninstallation appears in the progress details area The uninstallation will halt when the uninstallation of the tool currently being uninstalled finishes 3 Confirm the results of the uninstallation When all setup related tasks are finished the results of the uninstallation appear Figure 2 15 Uninstallation Completion Window Result Renesas Electronics CubeSuite Uninstaller Please select the items to be uninstalled Select all Unselect al Product Uninstall bort Uninstallation Uninstallation completed success
435. te V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Description of each area 1 Menu bar This displays common menus Contents of each menu can be customized in User Setting dialog box a File The File menu displays file related menu commands Display a cascading menu of items to create Closes the current project and open the Create Project dialog box in order to create a new project Create New Project If the currently open project or its files have been modified then the program will ask if you would like to save your changes Create New File Creates a new blank file ready for editing The default title for a newly created and unsaved Editor panel is SourceX where X is the unique incremented number for creating the new source file Open Opens the Open File dialog box for opening files and projects Open with Encoding Opens the Open File dialog box in which you can select a file to be opened with a specific encoding and then the Encoding dialog box in which you can select the encoding Add Displays a cascading menu of items to add Add Subproject Opens the Add Existing Subproject dialog box to add an existing subproject to the project Add New Subproject Opens the Create Project dialog box for adding a new subproject to the project Add File Opens the Add Existing File dialog box and add the selected file s to the project Add New File Op
436. te V2 00 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Remarks 1 When any subproject does not exist in a CubeSuite project a subproject is not displayed 2 f you select Backup the project composition files after conversion immediately after the conver sion the project source files and complete project are packed up and saved 3 See Project Convert Setting dialog box for details about each setting item 4 Convert the CubeSuite project The CubeSuite project is converted to the CubeSuite project A CubeSuite project is converted to a CubeSuite project according to the rule below A CubeSuite project is converted to a project with the same name as the original project After conversion the project file name will be project name mtp Remarks 1 The project file after conversion is created in the folder the CubeSuite project file was placed in If there is already a project file with the same name _number_ number 1 2 will be added to the file name 2 The build mode and build options information is not the target for conversion if the build tool is different from the CubeSuite project file R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 58 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 7 9 Convert a HEW project into a CubeSuite project You can convert a High performance Embedded Workshop hereafter abbreviated HEW project for RX into a CubeSuite project for RX Select Open Project from the Project menu
437. te in progress dialog box This dialog box displays the progress of update download and installation Update Manager Options dialog box This dialog box displays and changes the Update Manager options Task Tray When the application is checking for or downloading updates in the back ground an icon appears in the Windows task tray License Manager window This window displays a list of licenses and adds and deletes licenses Main window This is the start up window that opens when CubeSuite is launched Start panel This panel allows you to easily open a tutorial access create open a project or load a sample project Create Project dialog box This dialog box is used to create new projects or subprojects Source Convert Setting dialog box CX This dialog box configures the composition files of the source project the source files and the like to convert them for the build tool of the project to be created Project Convert Setting dialog box This dialog box includes the settings for conversion from the old develop ment environment CubeSuite HEW PM project or workspace to a CubeSuite project Project Tree panel This panel is used to display components of the microcontroller build tool and source file of the project in tree view Property panel In this panel the detailed information on the node that is selected in the Project Tree panel is displayed categorized Al
438. ted Development Environment Framework version The version of IDE of a CA850 project and the version of IDE of a CX project are output Compiler package version The compiler package used in a CA850 project and the version and the compiler package used ina CX project and the version are output The version of CX is the latest version in the compiler packages which are installed in the CubeSuite environment R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 54 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Number Description Options not to use Build mode If an option that has been set in a CA850 project and is not used in a CX project exists the informa tion is output for each build mode in the format shown below Command name Tab name of build tool property Option This item is output only when the corresponding option exists CA850 options are converted into CX options which have the same function The option that has the same function and different name is not output Build modes are output in the following order DefaultBuild user created build mode DefaultBuild is the build mode that CubeSuite provides by default See CubeSuite Integrated Development Environment User s Manual Build for detail about a build mode Options to change Build mode If an option that has been set in a CA850 project and has been changed to use in a CX project exists in the case that the function is sam
439. ter String Input dialog box CubeSuite Integrated Development Environment User s Manual Build or CubeSuite Integrated Development Environment User s Manual Debug for details Text Edit dialog box See Text Edit dialog box CubeSuite Integrated Development Environment User s Manual Build or CubeSuite Integrated Development Environment User s Manual Debug for details Path Edit dialog box See the CubeSuite Integrated Development Environment User s Manual Build for details R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 153 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Edit menu Property panel dedicated items Undo Undoes any property changes being done Cut Cuts the selected text to the clip board while editing the property Copy Copies the selected text in the property to the clip board Paste Pastes the contents of the clip board to the property while editing the property Delete Deletes the selected text while editing the property Select All Selects all the text in the selected property while editing the property Help menu Property panel dedicated items Open Help for Property Panel Displays the help of this panel Context menu Undoes any property changes being done Cut Cuts the selected text to the clip board while editing the property Copy Copies the selected text in the property to the clip boa
440. that the Start panel opens automatically the first time that CubeSuite starts Figure 2 44 Start Panel Learn About CubeSuite We recommend reading the tutorial to find out what can be done in CubeSuite GO l The tutorial contains th Create New Project ew project can be created new project can also be created by reusing the file configuration registered to an existing project Open Existing Project peProject of CubeSuite Can also be opened directly from the following link Favorit Nothing Nothing Open Existing CubeSuite High performance Embedded Workshop PM Project The project created with the old IDE can be converted to the CubeSuite project Support version igh performance Emi 4 07 00 or later SH afollowing case the Open Sample Project Many sample projects tl specify the destination f 78K0 7eKor PLs Rx _ ve60 f 78K0_KC2 L_Basic_Operation_Tutorial EM 78K0_KF2 Analysis_Tutorial R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 40 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 6 2 Create a new project Create a new project From the Project menu select Create New Project the Create Project dialog box will open Figure 2 45 Create Project Dialog Box When First Started Create Project Microcontroller Using microcontroller a i VE50ESAU3 Product Name uPD 70F3746 a PD 70F3743 1 44pi Internal ROM size KBytes 1024 bo PD aul nl i n Int
441. the reuse of the file structure of an existing project When creating a project that reuses the file structure of an existing project check Pass the file composition of an existing project to the new project and specify the location of the project filename to reuse in Project to be passed Caution You cannot specify a CubeSuite High performance Embedded Workshop or PM project file If you wish to copy an existing CubeSuite High performance Embedded Workshop or PM project open the project in CubeSuite then save it as a CubeSuite project see 2 7 8 Convert a CubeSuite project into a CubeSuite project 2 7 9 Convert a HEW project into a CubeSuite project 2 7 10 Convert a PM project into a CubeSuite project for details Next specify the saved project file in this area Remarks 1 When the version of the build tool used in the source project is different from the version of the build tool in the project to be created it is automatically diverted the case that Debug Only is specified with Kind of project is excluded 2 You can create a project with CX as the build tool by reusing the file structure of a project with CA850 as the build tool see 2 7 7 Convert a CA850 project into a CX project An image of the dialog box after setting the items is shown below R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 43 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 46 Create Project Dialog Box After Set
442. this dialog box R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 242 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Additional Function tab This tab is used to set the plug ins other than build tool and debug tool plug ins to be read in when this product is started plug ins present in the Plugins folder of this product Caution The plug ins except for the Editor panel are disabled on this tab after default installation To use each plug in enable it on this tab and then restart CubeSuite Figure A 61 Plug in Manager Dialog Box Additional Function Tab Plug in Manager Checked plug ins are loaded at the CubeSuite start up These settings are enabled at the next start up You can never uncheck a check box of the grayout plugin that is required by the CubeSuite Also on the Basic Function tab it is recommended that the checkboxes of the plug in for the target microcontroller of the development are not cleared Basic Function Additional Function Module Name Description C Code Generator Plug in Plug in to generate the device driver automatically C Debug Console Plug in DebugConsole plug in to support using standard 1 0 M Editor plug in D Editor C IronPython Console Plug in Itis a console where the IronPython commands and the CubeSuite enhanced featur C Pin Configurator Plug in Plug in to define the device pin configuration C Program Analyzer Plug in Plug in to analyze program
443. ting Dialog Box Project Convert Setting You can convert your project for the CubeSuite Select the project s from the left list box and change the settings to conversion as necessary Select several projects with Ctrl button you can change those projects settings at once When you press the OK button without changing any settings the new projects are made in the same place as the selected projects and the old projects are backuped in _org attachment folder Notice f you open a High performance Embedded Workshop project please be sure to select the device for each project OK Cancel Help The Project area shows the configuration of conversion target projects as a tree select the project for carrying out the conversion settings b Set the conversion target project When you select the project the area on the right shows the conversion target project setting items R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 70 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 76 Project Convert Setting Dialog Box When Project Is Selected Project Convert Setting Project settings New microcontroller Microcontroller New microcontroller a E J uPD 70F 3746 1 44pin a Product Nama uPD CSAS 4 ty ntermal size K Bytes Saree Internal RAM Raa NAA 440 a VE50ES HG3 fe VE50ES HI3 a Ah VE50ESWG3H ai VE50ESWG3 U fe V350ES H3 H uarore i New project Kind of project Application C
444. ting Items Create Project Microcontroller Using microcontroller AB Se Ve50ESAU3 Product Name uPD70F3746 PD7OF3743 1 44pi Internal ROM size KBytes 1024 2 UPD aul a i ni Intemal RAM size Bytes 61440 ae PD 70F3745 144pin E Au PD70F3746 1 44pin Hy VB50ES HES cH VB50ES HF3 tH V850ES HG3 vv mi OO LL Kind of project Application CA850 Project name Input the name of the project Place C Documents and Settings xxxxxx My Documents Make the project folder Itis shown absolute path of a project file to create C Pass the file composition of an existing project to the new project Project to be passed Input project file to be diverted Copy composition files in the diverted project folder to a new project folder When you click the Create button the project file is created in the location specified in 4 and the structure of the cre ated project is displayed as a tree in the Project Tree panel Figure 2 47 Project Tree Panel After Creating a New Project Project Tree g BE dsam le Project uPD70F3746 Microcontroller E A Pin Configurator Design Tool E eij Code Generator Design Tool A CA850 Build Tool 850 Simulator Debug Tool amp Program Analyzer Analyze Tool im File Remark After creating a project you must add target files to the project in order to perform building or debugging For details on how to add the
445. tion timeout detected R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 389 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX G Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS po gt x lt lt a fo m N Break trigger String Description reuesoea Berroza euaes 3 Gerra Joyejnuis z aop INOUN aroyZ ANOUN Joyejnuis FlashMacroService Flash macro service active Temporary Temporary break lllegalOpcodeTrap Break due to illegal instruction exception Step Step execution breakNote 3 Note 4 ExecutionFails Execution faile Break caused by executing WAIT instruc tion WaitInstruction Break caused by undefined instruction exception UndefinedinstructionException Break caused by privileged instruction exception PrivilegelnstructionException AccessException Break caused by access exception FloatingPointException Break caused by floating point exception InterruptException Break caused by interrupt IntInstructionException BrkInstructionException Break caused by INT instruction exception Break caused by BRK instruction exception lOFunctionSimulationBreak Break caused by peripheral function simula tion lllegaliMemoryAccessBreak Break caused by illegal memory access StreamloError Break caused by stream I O error CoverageMemoryAllocationFailure Failed to allocate coverage memory TraceMemoryAllocationFailure Failed to al
446. to F12 Ctrl Shift 0 to 9 Alt Right Insert Ctrl Insert Ctrl Shift A to Z Alt Down Delete Ctrl Delete Ctrl Shift F1 to F12 Alt 0 to 9 F1 to F12 Ctrl 0 to 9 Alt Backspace Alt F1 to F12 Shift Insert Ctrl A to Z Alt Left Shift Delete Ctrl F1 to F12 Alt Up Current assigned to displays the command currently assigned to the shortcut key specified in the Specify a Shortcut area if no commands are assigned to this key then None appears 3 Description area This area displays a popup describing the function of the command selected under Commands Function buttons Button Function Assigns the shortcut key selected under Commands to the command selected under the Specify a Shortcut area Note however that this button will be disabled if the key selected in the Specify a Short cut area is already assigned to another command Remove Removes the assignment of the shortcut key selected under the Specify a Shortcut area to the command selected under Commands None will appear in the Specify a Shortcut area drop down list Note however that this button will be disabled if no keys have been assigned to the command selected under Commands Reset All Resets all shortcut key setting to their default values Close Ends the shortcut key assignment and closes this dialog box R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 255 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00
447. to create a new project a Pass the file composition of an existing project to the new project Select this check box when reusing the file composition of the existing project to create a new project b The check box is unchecked by default The category of the file can be also reused Project to be passed Designate the name of the source project when diverting the file composition of the existing project to create a new project Designate the name of the source project by directly entering it with absolute path or selecting with the Open Project dialog box after pressing the Browse button The last designated location is shown in the box C Documents and Settings User name My Documents is the default location when the file is created for the first time This field is enabled only when the Pass the file composition of an existing project to the new project check box is checked Caution You cannot designate the CubeSuite HEW or PM project file Remarks 1 2 When the input violates any restriction the following messages are shown Up to 259 characters can be entered R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Feb 01 2013 2tENESAS Page 129 of 491 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Message Description File name with the path is too long The file name with the path is more than 259 charac Shorten within 259 characters ters The divert project does not exist The path includes a nonexistent folder o
448. to that Example of use gt gt gt build ChangeBuildMode test_release True gt gt gt R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 357 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX G Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS build Clean This function runs a clean Specification format build Clean all False Argumeni s Specify whether to clean a project including subprojects True Clean all project including subprojects False Clean an active project default Return value If a clean was completed successfully True If there was an error when running a clean False Detailed description This function runs a clean of a project removes the files generated by a build If allis set to True then a clean of the subproject is run Example of use gt gt gt build Clean True gt gt gt R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 358 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX G Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS This function runs a build of a specified file Specification format build File fileName rebuild False waitBuild True Argumeni s Argument Description fileName Specify a file to run a build rebuild Specify whether to run a rebuild of a specified file True Run a rebuild of a specified file False Run a build of a specified file default waitBuild Specify whether to wait until completing a build True Wait until c
449. tor panel and edit the contents of the Note that the files that can be opened with the Editor panel are shown below Preprocessor expanded output file i NC30 Localised support C source file c C source file cpp cc cp CC RX Header file h inc Header file hpp CC RX Assembler source file src CC RX Assembler source file s CC RX CA850 CX Assembler source file asm CX CA78KOR CA78K0 Assembler source file a30 NC30 Localised support Link directive file dir dr CA850 CX CA78KOR CA78K0 Link order specification file mtls Section file sf CA850 Symbol information file sfg CX Variable and function information f ile vfi CA78KOR Variable information file vfi CA78KO Function information file fin CA78KO Map file map Map file lbp CC RX NC30 Localised support Symbol table file sym CA78KOR CA78K0 Hex file hex Hex file hxb hxf CA78KOR CA78K0 Assemble list file Ist CC RX NC30 Localised support S record file mot CC RX NC30 Localised support Jump table file jmp CC RX Symbol address file fsy CC RX Cross reference file cref CC RX NC30 Localised support Link subcommand file clnk CC RX NC30 Localised support Python script file py Text file txt R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Feb 01
450. ubeSuite s placeholders However the converted placeholder may not indicate the correct information because the concepts differs between HEW and CubeSuite Change the build options if necessary After conversion the main project file name will be project name mtpj and the subproject file name will be project name mtsp After conversion the main project will be the active project 2 When opening from a HEW project file hwp a Select the project for conversion settings When a HEW project file is selected the Project Convert Setting dialog box will open Figure 2 69 Project Convert Setting Dialog Box Project Convert Setting Project You can convert your project for the CubeSuite E ProjectA Select the project s from the left list box and change the settings to conversion as necessary Select several projects with Ctrl button you can change those projects settings at once When you press the OK button without changing any settings the new projects are made in the same place as the selected projects and the old projects are backuped in _org attachment folder Notice If you open a High performance Embedded Workshop project please be sure to select the device for each project The Project area shows the configuration of conversion target projects as a tree select the project for carrying out the conversion settings b Set the conversion target project When you select the project the
451. ubeSuite project settings are left unchanged and the conversion to a CubeSu ite project is carried out To change the microcontroller or project name click the No button continue to 2 2 Select the project for conversion settings The Project Convert Setting dialog box will open Figure 2 63 Project Convert Setting Dialog Box Project Convert Setting Project 7 Description You can convert your project for the CubeSuite E sample R sub Select the project s from the left list box and change the settings to conversion as necessary Select several projects with Ctrl button you can change those projects settings at once When you press the OK button without changing any settings the new projects are made in the same place as the selected projects and the old projects are backuped in _org attachment folder Notice If you open a High performance Embedded Workshop project please be sure to select the device for each project Cancel Help The Project area shows the configuration of conversion target projects as a tree select the project for carrying out the conversion settings R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 56 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 3 Set the conversion target project When you select the project the area on the right shows the conversion target project setting items Figure 2 64 Project Convert Setting Dialog Box When Main Project I
452. ubprojet Return value If a new project was created successfully True If there was an error when creating a new project False Detailed description This function creates a new project file specified by fileName Specify the microcontroller of the project by micomType and deviceName Specify the kind of the project by projectKind If subProject is set to True then a subproject is created Example of use gt gt gt project Create c project test mtpj MicomType RX R5F52105AxFN ProjectKind Application True gt gt gt R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 347 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX G Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS project File Add This function adds a file to the active project Specification format project File Add fileName category Argumeni s Argument Description fileName Specify the full path of the file to be added to the active project When specifying multiple files specify in the format file1 file2 category Specify the category that the file is added default not specified When specifying multiple levels specify in the format one two Return value If a file was added to the active project successfully True If there was an error when a file was added to the active project False If there was an error when any files were added to the active project when multiple files were specified for fileName Fa
453. ug Tool Hereafter referred to as Debug Tool node The debug tool in circuit emulator simulator etc used Program Analyzer Analyze Tool Hereafter referred to as Analyze Tool node The analyze tool used Note that this node is not shown when the project type is a debug dedicated projectN File Hereafter referred to as File node Download files Hereafter referred to as Download files node Files registered to the project are displayed directly below the File node This is a node for adding download files to the project Note that this node is shown only when the project type is a debug dedicated projectN Build tool generated files Hereafter referred to as Build tool generated files node This node is created during a build Files created by the build tools are displayed directly below the node except for object files Note that this node is not shown when the project type is a debug dedicated projectN Startup V850 RL78 78KOR 78K0 Hereafter referred to as Startup node This is a node for adding other than standard startup files to the project This node is always shown under the File node Note that this node is not shown when the project type is a debug dedicated projectNe Category name Hereafter referred to as Category node These user defined categories are used to classify files into modules Subproject name Subproject Hereafter referred t
454. uite V2 00 00 APPENDIX G Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS project Information This function displays the list of project files Specification format project Information Argumeni s None Return value List of project file names Detailed description This function displays the list of project files of the main project and subprojects included in the loaded project Example of use gt gt gt project Information c project sample test mtpj c project sample sub1 sublproject mtsp C project sample sub2 sub2project mtsp gt gt gt R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 353 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX G Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS project Open This function opens a project Specification format project Open fileName save False Argumeni s Argument Description fileName Specify a project file save If another project was opened specify whether to save any files being edited and the project when you close it True Save all editing files and a project False Do not save all editing files and a project default Return value If the project was closed successfully True If there was an error when closing the project False Detailed description This function opens a project specified by fileName If other project is opened that project is closed If save is set to True then all files being edited and
455. uite on the Command Line for details about the np and npall options Function buttons Button Function Applies all setting and closes this dialog box Cancels the designated condition and closes the dialog box Displays the help of this dialog box R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 244 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE User Setting dialog box This dialog box allows you to customize toolbars and menus displayed in the Main window When this dialog box is open any button on a toolbar or any menu item in a menu bar currently displayed in the Main window can be dragged and dropped to the desired position to change the sequence of buttons or menu items or perform button menu item deletion Caution While this dialog box is open you cannot use functions of toolbars menus You can use these functions as usual after you close this dialog box Figure A 62 User Setting Dialog Box User Setting a Toolbars Commands Toolbars Sart and save Edit Build Debug C Layout C view Panels Program Analyzer C Stack Usage Tracer Function buttons Keyboard The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open From the Tool menu select User Setting Description of each area 1 Tab selection area Tab selection allows you to switch betwee
456. ulator Specification format debugger XCoverage GetCoverage funcName progName fileName Argumeni s Argument Description funcName Specify the function name to retrieve coverage for progName Specify the name of the load module containing the function If there is only one load module then this can be omitted default fileName Specify the name of the file containing the function If it is a global function then this can be omitted default Caution If two or more parameters are specified then three parameters must be specified Return value Value without numeric value Remark The results of function execution are displayed with a sign added Detailed description This function gets coverage for the function specified by funcName If there are multiple load modules specify progName In the case of a static function specify fileName Example of use gt gt gt debugger XCoverage GetCoverage TestInit C test Test out C test Test c 81 50 gt gt gt R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 430 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX G Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS debugger XRunBreak Delete This function deletes XRunBreak information V850 Simulator Specification format debugger XRunBreak Delete Argumeni s None Return value If XRunBreak information was deleted successfully True If there was a
457. updates This icon indicates that a download is in progress The progress is shown as a percentage This is an update notification icon It also displays the details of the notification with the i icon Click it to display the CubeSuite Update Manager window R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 109 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE License Manager window This window displays a list of licenses and adds and deletes licenses Figure A 13 License Manager Window A License Manager You can add and remove license of Renesas Electronics microcontroller development tools License key is case insensitive and does not contain alphabetical 0 Add this License key Licenses RX License Pack 1 Function buttons RX License Pack 1 License key 20206 POD OOK POO POI POON 3 4 Serial number xxxxxxK The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open Upon installation in the License registration window click License Manager From the Windows Start menu select Programs gt gt Renesas Electronics CubeSuite gt gt License Manager Remark In Windows 8 double click on License Manager on the start screen Description of each area 1 Add this License key area Enter a license key in this area 2 Licenses area This area
458. utable The following window will be opened Click the Accelerate button Figure 2 95 Acceleration Utility for CubeSuite Acceleration Utility for CubeSuite EN TERS A This tool is for accelerating startup time of the CubeSuite The Accelerate button lt creates a native image corresponding to CubeSuite included in the same folder into the cache The free space of about 100MB is needed on the hard disk Accelerating may take a few minutes to a few dozen minutes The Cancel Acceleration button It deletes only native image corresponding to CubeSuite included in the same folder from the cache Cancel Acceleration The Cancel All Accelerations button It deletes all native images for CubeSuite fon this PC from the cache Cancel All Accelerations Note The default installation folder of this product is as follows C Program Files Renesas Electronics CubeSuite Caution The effectiveness of this utility will vary depending on your computer R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 85 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 11 Execute Python Fuctions CubeSuite enables the execution of IronPython functions and control statements and CubeSuite Python functions see G 3 CubeSuite Python Function Class Property Event added for controlling CubeSuite via command input method Select Python Console from the View menu The Python Console panel opens You can contr
459. uto hidden panel loses the focus a minimized icon and its panel name appear on the edge of the frame as a tab To display the auto hidden panel move the mouse cursor over the tab The panel opens from the tab and becomes available When the panel loses the focus again the panel will be minimized as the tab 2 Disabling the auto hide feature To disable the auto hide feature click on the panel to hide to select it Right click on the panel s title bar and select Auto hide or click on the panel s title bar EI 2 9 2 Floating a window To float a window click on its title bar and move it You can also double click the title bar of the window you wish to float or right click and select Floating Figure 2 92 Context Menu v Dockable Hide Panel Auto Hide 2 9 3 Docking windows You can dock a floating window to the main window Click and drag the title bar of the window you wish to dock Docking indicators appears automatically in the center top bottom left and right of the main window When the mouse pointer moves over one of the docking indicators part of the window background becomes blue If you release the mouse pointer at this point the window will be docked in the blue area Selecting the indicators allows the window to be placed freely as shown below Places in the upper part of CubeSuite Places in the left part of CubeSuite Places in the right part of CubeSuite Places in the low
460. v 1 00 2tENESAS Page 169 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 2 File name area Directly enter the name of the file to be created c is displayed by default Remark If any extension is not designated the one selected in the File type area will be added Also if the extension different from the one selected in the File type area is designated the one selected in the File type area will be added for example if you designate aaa txt as the file name and select C source file c as the file type the file is named as aaa txt c Note that if All files is selected in the File type area no extension will be added 3 File location area Designate the location to be created the file by directly entering its path or selecting from the Refer button The path of the project folder is displayed by default However when this dialog box is opened from the context menu in the Category node only when a shortcut to the folder has been made and the folder exists the path to the folder specified in the category is displayed a Button Refer Opens the Browse For Folder dialog box If a folder is selected the path will be added in the text box Remarks 1 If the text box is blank it is assumed that the project folder is designated 2 Ifthe relative path is designated the reference point of the path is the project folder Remark Up to 259 characters path
461. v 1 00 ztENESAS Page 192 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE e Open file before replacing Replace is done after opening the file to find replace characters in the Editor panel Replace is done without opening the file to find replace characters default Function buttons Button Function Option Switches between display hide the Option area in this tab Replace All Finds characters with designated criteria in batch and replaces the searched characters to the one designated to be replaced Cancel Ignores the setting and closes this dialog box Help Displays the help of this dialog box R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 193 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Save Settings dialog box This dialog box is used to set the encoding and newline code of the file that is being edited on the Editor panel Remark The target file name is displayed on the title bar Figure A 39 Save Settings Dialog Box main c Save Settings Encode Westem European Windows Newline code Windows CR LF 3 C Reload the file with these settings Function buttons H The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open Focus the Editor panel and then select file name Save Settings from the File menu Descripti
462. ve location project you must re register the files to the project 6 Emulator drivers are not saved If you use a pack on another computer you must install the drivers separately 2 8 4 Close a project To close a project select the File or Project menu gt gt Close Project Figure 2 90 Close Project Item Project iR Create New Project E Open Project Favorite Projects gt Add 7 E Save Project Ctrl Shift 5 qa Save Project As Fm Save Project and Development Tools as Package When the open project or changed files are not saved a Message dialog box is displayed Figure 2 91 Message Dialog Box Question Q0201001 Project has been changed Save p Ce Cen Cae Click the Yes button to save click the No button to not save R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 81 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 9 Changing the Window Layout This section describes how to change the CubeSuite window layout 2 9 1 Automatically hide panels Panels support the auto hide feature When the auto hide feature is in use unused panels are minimized on the edge of the frame making it possible to dis play more information at one time 1 Enabling the auto hide feature To enable the auto hide feature click on the panel to hide to select it Right click on the panel s title bar and select Auto hide or click on the panel s title bar Eq When an a
463. w button When you click the New button the item New External Tool is added to the bottom of the list In this state configure the details of the external tool to add in the New registration area Up to 8 external tools can be registered To change the settings of an external tool that has already been registered select the name of the external tool to modify and edit the desired setting The order of the items on this list is the same as the order in the menu R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 222 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE b Buttons New Adds the item New External Tool to the bottom of the list for the registration of a new external tool Note that this button will be disabled if 8 external tools have already been registered Delete Removes the external tool that is selected in the list Move Up Moves the external tool selected in the list up one row Move Down Moves the external tool selected in the list down one row 2 New registration area Use this area to configure the details of a newly added external tool Up to 8 external tools can be registered a Menu name Specify the name to use in the menu for launching the external tool up to 100 characters The name specified here will appear in the Tool menu selecting that item will launch the external tool When you finish entering the menu name the text box loses focus the name automatically repl
464. was an error when setting the value False Detailed description This function sets the value specified by value in the register specified by regName Example of use gt gt gt debugger Register GetValue pc 0x100 gt gt gt debugger Register GetValue A RB1 0x20 gt gt gt debugger Register SetValue pc 0x200 True gt gt gt debugger Register GetValue pc 0x200 gt gt gt R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 410 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX G Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS debugger Reset This function resets the CPU Specification format debugger Reset Argumeni s None Return value None Detailed description This function resets the CPU Example of use gt gt gt debugger Reset gt gt gt R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 411 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX G Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS debugger ReturnOut This function runs until control returns to the program that called the current function Specification format debugger ReturnOut Argumeni s None Return value None Detailed description This function runs until control returns to the program that called the current function Example of use gt gt gt debugger ReturnoOut gt gt gt R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 412 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPEN
465. watchOption is specified display according to watchOption R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Feb 01 2013 ztENESAS Page 424 of 491 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX G Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS Example of use gt gt gt debugger Watch GetValue testVal 128 gt gt gt debugger Watch GetValue testVal WatchOption Hexdecimal 0x80 gt gt gt debugger Watch GetValue testVal WatchOption Binary 0b10000000 R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 425 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX G Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS debugger Watch SetValue This function sets a variable value Specification format debugger Watch SetValue variableName value Argumeni s Argument Description variableName Specify the variable name register name and I O register name or SFR register name to set Specify the value to set Return value If a variable value was set successfully True If there was an error when setting a variable value False Detailed description This function sets the value specified by value in the variable register and I O register or SFR register specified by variableName Example of use gt gt gt debugger GetValue testVal 128 gt gt gt debugger GetValue testVal WatchOption Hexdecimal 0x80 gt gt gt debugger GetValue testVal WatchOption Binary 0b10000000 gt gt gt debugger SetValue testVal True gt gt
466. will be returned if the main project is the active project Detailed description This property sets or reference the options of the debug tool Example of use gt gt gt print debugger Option UseTraceData Trace gt gt gt debugger Option UseTraceData UseTraceDataType Coverage gt gt gt print debugger Option Coverage False gt gt gt debugger Option Coverage True gt gt gt print debugger Option Coverage True gt gt gt R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 478 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX G Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS debugger XTrace Addup debugger XTrace Complement debugger XTrace Mode This property sets or reference the tracing options of the debug tool IECUBE IECUBE2 Simulator Specification format debugger XTrace Addup addup Simulator debugger XTrace Complement complement IECUBE V850 IECUBE2 V850 debugger XTrace Mode traceMode Simulator IECUBE IECUBE2 Setting s Setting Description Set whether to add up times tags True Add up times tags False Do not add up times tags complement Set whether to supplement the trace True Supplement the trace False Do not supplement the trace traceMode Set the trace control mode The trace control modes that can be specified are shown below Type Description TraceMode FullBreak Stop program execution and writing of trace data after all trace
467. wnload Hex64Kb This function downloads a hex file in within 64 KB format debugger Download HexBank This function downloads a hex file in memory bank format debugger Download HexldTag This function downloads a hex file with ID tag debugger Download nformation This function displays download information debugger Download LoadModule This function downloads a load module debugger Erase This function erases the Flash memory debugger GetBreakStatus This function displays a break condition debugger GetCpuStatus This function displays the current CPU status debugger GetleStatus This function displays the current IE status debugger GetPC This function displays the PC value debugger Go This function continues program execution debugger le GetValue debugger le SetValue This function sets or refers the IE register or DCU register debugger IlsConnected This function checks the connection status of the debug tool debugger IsRunning This function checks the execution status of the debug tool debugger Jump File debugger Jump Address This function displays each panel debugger Map Clear R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Feb 01 2013 This function clears the mapping settings stENESAS Page 361 of 491 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX G Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS Function Name Function Description debugger Map Informatio
468. x Question Q026 2001 This product recommends that creating project at the same place as the original project folder Are you sure you want to change the project folder Selected folder D work sample sample_C lt Recommended folder diverted project folder D work sample Build error may be occurred in the creating project Because the folder for a creating project is different from the original Yes No JI Cancel Jl Help Click the Create button The Source Convert Setting dialog box CX appears Figure 2 61 Source Convert Setting Dialog Box Source Convert Setting You can convert the project composition files like source files for the build tool of the new Project Do you really want to convert source files Original source files are overwritten by conversion Backup of project before conversion Backup the project composition files before conversion Place D work sample sample_backup Select Yes to perform conversion on the source files To save a backup of the entire project including source files select the Backup the project composition files before conversion check box and specify a location in which to save the backup Click the OK button to convert the source files and create the CX project R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 53 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Remark The result that a CX project is created by reusing a CA850 pr
469. y name is in editing the contents of the clipboard are inserted Rename You can rename the selected Category node Property Displays the selected Category node s property on the Property panel R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 148 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Remarks 1 When more than one components are selected the context menu of the last selected component is displayed 2 The context menu of the currently selected component is displayed in the blank area under the project tree R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 149 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Property panel In this panel the detailed information on the node that is selected in the Project Tree panel is displayed categorized Also the settings of the selected node can be changed This also shows the type of the Generate Code button clicked in the Code Generator panel and information about the file selected in the Code Generator Preview panel and changes settings Figure A 20 Property Panel Property E sample Property E File Notes File name This is the name of the file to which the information of this main project is to be saved The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Dialog boxes opened from the Property panel Edit menu Property panel dedicated items Help menu Property pa
470. y when the build BuildCompleted event is issued It is not therefore possible to generate an instance of this class Example of use gt gt gt def buildCompleted sender e print Error 0 format e Error print BuildError e HasBuildError ToString print BuildWarning e HasBuildWarning ToString print BuildCancelled e Cancelled ToString gt gt gt build BuildCompleted buildCompleted Event connection gt gt gt build All True Error None BuildError False BuildWarning False BuildCancelled False True gt gt gt When an exception occurs displayed as follows gt gt gt build All True Error System Exception An error occurred during build E0203001 BuildError False R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 443 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX G Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS BuildWarning False BuildCancelled False False When a build error occurs displayed as follows gt gt gt build All True Error None BuildError True BuildWarning False BuildCancelled False False gt gt gt R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 444 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX G Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS Disassemblelnfo This class holds disassembly information return value of the debugger Assemble Disassemble function Type class DisassembleInfo Address 0 Code None Mnemonic
471. you must set that project as the active project Caution The active project is the project subjected to debugging lt is not possible to set the active project while connected to the debug tool and therefore you must disconnect the debug tool for active project setting To set the active project select the Project node to be set as the active project on the project tree and select Set selected subproject as Active Project from the context menu R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 321 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX F USING AN EXTERNAL BUILD TOOL Figure F 25 Set selected project as Active Project Item Be SubProject_DebugOnly ME uPD703131A Microcd l Build DebugOnly A None Build Tool Rebuild Debugonly i 850 Simulator Debu EMI Clean Debugonly File ral Download files Open Folder with Explorer E Windows Explorer Menu ae ee S Rel Add gt Rcd Set SubProject_DebugOnly as Active Project Ga Remove from Project Shift Del 5 aj Rename F2 Z Property When a project is set as the active project that Project node is underlined as follows Figure F 26 Active Project Project Tree a Er DebugOnly Project uPD7031314 Microcontroller w A Pin Configurator Design Tool A None Build Tool E A Pin Configurator Design Tool aN None Build Tool Ss 850 Simulator Debug Tool w File Remarks 1 Immediately after creating a project newly
472. yout 2 Restores a saved docking layout This command restores the layout saved via the Save Layout 2 If no layout has been saved to this slot the layout from the first startup is restored Restore Layout 3 Restores a saved docking layout This command restores the layout saved via the Save Layout 3 If no layout has been saved to this slot the layout from the first startup is restored Restore Layout 4 Restores a saved docking layout This command restores the layout saved via the Save Layout 4 If no layout has been saved to this slot the layout from the first startup is restored Reset Layout Returns all settings relating to the layout of the Main window docking panels to their default values Python Console Shows the Python Console panel Remark The layout is saved and restored in each of the following three states Before loading a project When a project is loaded and before a debug tool is connected When a project is loaded and a debug tool is being connected d Project Project menu shows menu items to operate the project Create New Project Closes the current project and opens the Create Project dialog box to create a new project Changes the current project or file to the new one If they have not saved con firm the user whether to save them Open Project Closes the current project and opens the Open Project dialog box to open the existing project Changes the
473. ys the help of this dialog box R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 240 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 Basic Function tab APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE This tab is used to set the build tool and debug tool plug ins to be read in when this product is started Figure A 60 Plug in Manager Dialog Box Basic Function Tab Plug in Manager Checked plug ins are loaded at the CubeSuite start up These settings are enabled at the next start up You can never uncheck a check box of the grayout plugin that is required by the CubeSuite Also on the Basic Function tab it is recommended that the checkboxes of the plug in for the target microcontroller of the development are not cleared Pare Basic Function Additional Function Module Name V RX Build tool CC RX Plug in Debugger Collection Plug in 850 Build tool C4850 Plug in V850E 2 Build tool CX Plug in 850 Emulator Plug in 850 Simulator Plug in 850E2 Emulator Plug in V850E 2 Simulator Plug in R amp C Build tool NC30 Plug in RSC Emulator Plug in RL78 78K0R Emulator Plug in RL78 78K0R Simulator Plug in 78KO Build tool C478K0 Plug in 78K0 Emulator Plug in 78K0 Simulator Plug in KSICSTCSICSI CSI CSI CSI CSI CSI CSI SICSIKSICOICS RL78 78K0R Build tool CA78K0R Plug in Description Build tool plug in to use CC RX compiler for Ax Debug tool plug in to use AX Emulator Simulator Build tool plug in to use C4850 co
474. ys the location at the address specified by address The location is normally displayed in the following format file name function name at file name line number However if the function or line number at that address is not found then the location is displayed in the following format If the symbol is not found then the location is displayed in the following format at address value If address is omitted then the location of the pc value is displayed Example of use gt gt gt debugger Whereami foo c func at foo c 100 gt gt gt debugger Whereami 0x100 foo c main at foo c 20 gt gt gt R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 428 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX G Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS debugger XCoverage Clear This function clears the coverage memory IECUBE IECUBE2 Simulator Specification format debugger XCoverage Clear Argumeni s None Return value If the coverage memory was cleared successfully True If there was an error when clearing the coverage memory False Detailed description This function clears the coverage memory Example of use gt gt gt debugger XCoverageClear True gt gt gt R20UT2444EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 429 of 491 Feb 01 2013 CubeSuite V2 00 00 APPENDIX G Python CONSOLE Python FUNCTIONS debugger XCoverage GetCoverage This function gets the coverage IECUBE IECUBE2 Sim

CubeSuite+ V2.00.00 Integrated Development Environment User`s

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents